Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Report (101)
'-?--/)\ 0\Cs- os:o OFFICE COPY • REGFIVE)17) mAR 29 7r, CI OF fiGAPV ClCallWater Services BUILDW, PW7.;;ON Durham AWWTF Phase 5 Secondary Treatment System Expansion Project Contract Documents - Specifications Volume 3 of 3 - Division 16 and 17 • BID SET March 16, 2018 Prepared By Rev BLACK & VEATCH CWS Project No. 6757 B&V Project No. 195757 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • The following Technical Specifications have been prepared by or under the direct supervision of Andrew James Truman, P.E., Black & Veatch Corporation. 110 Division 16— Electrical 16050 Common Work Results for 16222 Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Electrical Horsepower 16052 Hazardous Classified Area 16262 Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-50 Construction Horsepower 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16282 Active Harmonic Filter Equipment 16070 Hangers and Supports 16305 Electrical System Studies 16075 Electrical Identification 16411 Disconnect Switches 16123 600 Volt or Less Wires and 16412 Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Cables Breakers 16130 Conduits 16422 Motor Starters 16131 Cable Trays 16442 Panelboards 16133 Duct Banks 16444 600 Volt Class Motor Control Centers 16134 Boxes 16460 Low Voltage Transformers 16140 Wiring Devices 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaires 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections 16950 Field Electrical Acceptance Tests Roc? \�I Neel 85838PE• D. • .ta��y Sig - . oG OREGON (1-.��0,�, eE'R $ , �� JAMES EXPIRATION DATE: 6/30/2018 • Clean Water Services Durham AWWTF Secondary BLACK&VEATCH Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • The following Technical Specifications have been prepared by or under the direct supervision of Jason L. Hise, P.E., Black & Veatch Corporation. • Division 17 — Instrumentation Basic Measurement and Control 17050 Instrumentation Materials and 17204 Level Measurement Laser Methods 17101-01 CLD AB5 Mixed Liquor Return 17302 Flow Measurement- Magnetic Pump Flow Meters 17101-02 CLD AB5 WAS Pumps 17305 Flow Measurement-Thermal Mass 17101-03 CLD AB5 RAS Pumps 17316 Rotameters_Variable Area Flow Meters 17101-04 CLD AB5 Aeration and Mixers 17401 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement- Diaphragm and Annular Seals Measurement- 17101-05 CLD AB5 NRD Pumps 17402 Pressure Vacuum Instrument Valves 17101-06 CLD Secondary Clarifier 5 17403 Pressure Vacuum Measurement- Switches 17101-07 CLD Secondary Effluent 17404 Pressure_Vacuum Measurement- Collection Box Gauges 17101-08 CLD ABS Side Stream RAS 17505 Ammonium Analyzers Pumps 17101-09 CLD AB5 Drainage Pumps 17506 Dissolved Oxygen Analyzer 17101-10 CLD Gallery Air Supply 17507 Total Suspended Solids Analyzer 17101-11 CLD Odar Control 17508 Process Nutrient Online Analyzer • (NO2, NO3, NH3, PO4) 17101-12 CLD PEPS 17509 Nitrate Analyzer Control Systems - Panels, 17101-13 CLD Tunnel Sump Pumps 17710 Enclosures and Components 17101-14 CLD Electrical Room HVAC 17901 Instrument List 17201 Level Measurement-Switches and 17903 Input/Output List Floats 17203 Level Measurement Submersible PROE 0 iEt 91183. p' • 'tally Sig O'tally 'r 10 23N '41SON Mss EXPIRES: JUN 30. 2019 110 Clean Water Services Durham AWWTF Secondary BLACK&VEATCH Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • Clean Water Services Durham AWWTF Phase 5 Secondary Treatment System Expansion Project BID SET March 2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 3 DIVISION 00 AND 01 Subject Pages BIDDING AND CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS 00080 Advertisement to Bid 1 : 4 00100 Instructions to Bidders 1 : 12 00300 Bid Forms 1 : 12 00500 Agreement 1 : 10 00610 Performance Bond 1 : 2 00620 Payment Bond 1 : 2 00700 Standard General Conditions of the 1 : 46 Construction Contract 411 00800 Supplementary Conditions 1 : 47 00810 Oregon Prevailing Wage Rates 1 : 1 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01012 Partnering 1 : 2 01110 Summary of Work 1 : 8 01140 Work Restrictions 1 : 11 01292 Schedule of Values 1 : 4 01320 Web Based Construction Management 1 : 5 01324 Construction Schedule 1 : 11 01329 Safety Plan 1 : 2 01330 Submittal Procedures 1 : 10 01350 Special Procedures 1 : 2 01352 Alteration Project Procedures 1 : 4 01410 Regulatory Requirements 1 : 2 01424 Abbreviations 1 : 10 • 01450 Quality Control 1 : 2 Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) • Number Title Page Count 01455 Special Inspections, Observations and 1 : 6 Testing 01455-Sup Contractor's Statement of 1 : 2 Responsibility 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1 : 8 01505 Mobilization 1 : 2 01530 Protection of Existing Facilities 1 : 4 01532 Site Condition Surveys 1 : 2 01555 Site Access and Storage 1 : 3 01560 Temporary Environmental Controls 1 : 5 01570 Erosion and Sediment Control 1 : 2 01600 Product Requirements 1 : 4 01610 General Equipment Stipulations 1 : 5 01611 Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria 1 : 7 • 01611-S01 Non-Structural Components 1 : 1 Schedule 01630 Pipeline Schedule 1 : 3 01630-S01 Pipeline Schedule 1 : 3 01640 Manufacturers' Services 1 : 7 01655 Gravity Pipeline Testing 1 : 7 01656 Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection 1 : 3 01732 Cutting and Patching 1 : 4 01738 Selective Demolition 1 : 4 01756 Testing, Training and Facility Startup 1 : 13 01756-Sup01 Startup and Performance Evaluation 1 : 1 Form 01756-Sup02 Equipment Supplier's Certificate of 1 : 1 Installation 01756-Sup03 CWS Electrical, Instrumentation and 1 : 2 Control Startup Standard Procedures 01770 Closeout Procedures 1 : 4 • Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Number Title Page Count 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 1 : 4 01782-Sup Equipment Data Sheet 1 : 1 01782-Sup Sample Equipment Data Sheet 1 : 1 01782-Sup Maintenance Summary Form 1 : 2 VOLUME 2 OF 3- DIVISION 02 THROUGH 15 DIVISION 02 — SITEWORK 02200 Excavation and Fill for Structures 1 : 18 02202 Trenching and Backfilling 1 : 15 02202-Att 1 Protective System Design Certificate 1 : 1 02202-Fig 1 Embedments for Conduits 1 : 1 02260 Soldier Pile Lagging and Excavation 1 : 12 Support • 02370 Soil Stabilization 1 : 7 02512 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement 1 : 5 02522 Concrete Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter 1 : 5 02546 Aggregate Base To be added by Addenda 02605 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Manholes, 1 : 5 Frames and Covers 02606 Manholes and Vault Covers and 1 : 2 Accessories 02628 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe 1 : 2 02629 Fused oint PVC Pressure Pipe 1 : 7 02702 Sewer Pipe Installation and Testing 1 : 5 DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 1 : 4 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 1 : 3 03250 Concrete Joints and Accessories 1 : 5 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1 : 21 03313 Concrete Placing 1 : 5 • 03350 Concrete Finishing 1 : 7 Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) • Number Title Page Count 03370 Concrete Crack Repair 1 : 5 03390 Concrete Curing 1 3 03600 Grouting 1 : 2 DIVISION 04 — MASONRY 04200 Masonry 1 : 17 04210 Cast Stone 1 : 7 DIVISION 05 — METALS 05312 Steel Decking 1 : 4 05520 Metal Fabrications 1 : 14 05521 Metal Railings 1 : 5 05530 Metal Gratings 1 : 5 05550 Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry 1 : 6 05990 Structural Metals 1 : 10 DIVISION 07 —THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION • 07160 Dampproofing 1 : 3 07185 Masonry Water Repellent Coating 1 : 2 07272 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier 1 : 8 07412 Insulated Metal Wall Panels 1 : 10 07415 Standing Seam Metal Roofing 1 : 4 07600 Sheet Metal 1 : 6 07840 Firestopping 1 : 5 07900 Joint Sealants 1 : 4 DIVISION 08 — DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 1 : 4 08305 Floor Access Doors and Hatches 1 : 4 08305-S01 Floor Access Doors and Hatches 1 : 1 Schedule 08331 Overhead Coiling Aluminum Doors 1 : 6 08700 Finish Hardware 1 : 5 08800 Glass and Glazing 1 : 3 • Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Number Title Page Count DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 09940 Protective Coatings 1 : 19 09940-Fig 1 and 2 Coating System Data Sheets 1 : 2 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10200 Louvers 1 : 3 10400 Identifying Devices 1 : 4 10400-S01 Sign Schedule 1 : 2 10700 Fiberglass Sampling Shelter 1 : 6 10990 Miscellaneous Specialties 1 : 2 DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT 11060 Equipment Installation 1 : 3 11115 Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pumps 1 : 9 11121 Helical Screw Centrifugal Pumps 1 : 8 • 11150 Submersible Chopper Pumps 1 : 12 11154 Horizontal Submersible Propeller Pumps 1 : 11 11160 Progressing Cavity Pumps 1 : 10 11185 Submersible Sump and Sewage Pumps 1 : 10 11350 Bio-Filter System (Odor Control) 1 : 16 11356 Odor Control Fans 1 : 11 11410 Circular Clarifier Equipment 1 : 17 11520 Vertical Mixers 1 : 10 11520-Fig 1 Sample Locations for Suspended 1 : 1 Solids Tests 11570 Fine Pore Diffused Aeration Equipment 1 : 18 DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14622 Monorail Electric Wire Rope Hoists 1 : 9 411 Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) • Number Title Page Count DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL 15010 Valve Installation 1 : 4 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Pipe Accessories 1 : 14 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems 1 : 8 Materials and Methods 15061 Ductile Iron Pipe 1 : 23 15064 Stainless Steel Pipe and Alloy Pipe, Tubing, 1 : 8 and Accessories 15065 Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing, and 1 : 7 Accessories 15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and 1 : 7 Accessories 15069 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Accessories 1 : 2 15070 Copper Tubing and Accessories 1 : 3 15091 Miscellaneous Ball Valves 1 : 5 • 15092 Industrial Butterfly Valves 1 : 6 15092-S01 and Industrial Butterfly Valves Schedule 1 : 4 SO2 Manual Actuators and Eccentric Plug Valves Schedule, Vane Type Pneumatic Actuators 15093 Check Valves 1 : 6 15093-S01 Check Valves Schedule 1 : 1 15094 Backflow Preventers 1 : 2 15094-S01 Backflow Preventer Schedule 1 : 1 15095 Solenoid Valves 1 : 3 15096 Globe Valves 1 : 4 15096-S01 Industrial Butterfly Valves Schedule 1 : 1 Manual Actuators 15097 Pinch and Diaphragm Valves 1 : 2 15099 Pressure Reducing Valves 1 : 3 15099-S01 Pressure Reducing Valves Schedule 1 : 2 15100 Miscellaneous Valves 1 : 5 • Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Number Title Page Count 15101 Odor Control Dampers 1 : 5 15101-S01 Odor Control Dampers Schedule 1 : 1 15102 Eccentric Plug Valves 1 : 5 15102-S01 Eccentric Plug Valves Schedule - 1 : 3 Manual Actuators 15104 Resilient Seated Gate Valves 1 : 4 15104-S01 Resilient Seated Gate Valves 1 : 1 Schedule 15109 Knife Gate Valves 1 : 4 15111 Gate Installation 1 : 4 15112 Cast Iron Slide Gates 1 : 6 15112-S01 Cast-Iron Slide Gates Schedule, 1 : 1 Manual Actuators 15112-S02 Cast-Iron Slide Gates Schedule, 1 : 1 • Electric Actuators 15114 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 1 : 5 15114-S01 Open Channel Slide Gates 1 : 1 Schedule - Electric Actuators 15140 Pipe Supports 1 : 12 15140-Fig 1 A & B Hangers and Supports 1 : 2 15180 Valve and Gate Actuators 1 : 12 15250 Mechanical Insulation 1 : 8 15400 Plumbing 1 : 13 15499 Seal Water Stations 1 : 4 15500 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 1 : 22 15650 Refrigeration Systems 1 : 11 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1 : 7 • 4 Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Number Title Page Count VOLUME 3 OF 3- DIVISION 16 AND 17 DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 16050 Common Work Results for Electrical 1 : 25 16052 Hazardous Classified Area Construction 1 : 5 16060 Grounding and Bonding 1 : 7 16070 Hangers and Supports 1 : 6 16075 Electrical Identification 1 : 10 16075-S01 Equipment Nameplate Schedule 1 : 4 16123 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables 1 : 19 16130 Conduits 1 : 22 16131 Cable Trays 1 : 11 16133 Duct Banks 1 : 7 16134 Boxes 1 : 10 • 16140 Wiring Devices 1 : 8 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections 1 : 6 16222 Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower 1 : 10 16222-Att Motor Data Sheet 1 : 1 16262 Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-50 1 : 18 Horsepower 16282 Active Harmonic Filtering Equipment 1 : 7 16305 Electrical System Studies 1 : 13 16411 Disconnect Switches 1 : 9 16412 Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1 : 4 16422 Motor Starters 1 : 8 16442 Panelboards 1 : 7 16444 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers 1 : 14 16460 Low Voltage Transformers 1 : 4 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaires 1 : 11 16950 Field Electrical Acceptance Tests 1 : 13 • Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Number Title Page Count DIVISION 17 — INSTRUMENTATION 17050 Basic Measurement and Control 1 : 31 Instrumentation Materials and Methods 17050_Sup1 CWS Instrumentation Calibration 1 : 1 Sheet - Sample 17050_Sup2 Operational Readiness Testing 1 : 1 (ORT— Part 1) - Example 17050_Sup3 Operational Readiness Testing 1 : 1 (ORT — Part 2) - Example Performance Acceptance Test 1 : 2 17050_Sup4 Sheet - Example 17101-01 Control Loop Description: Aeration Basin 1 : 6 5 Mixed Liquor Return Pumps 17101-02 Control Loop Description: Aeration Basin 1 : 6 5 WAS Pumps III 17101-03 Control Loop Description: Aeration Basin 1 : 5 5 RAS Pumps 17101-04 Control Loop Description: Aeration Basin 1 : 9 5 Mixer and Aeration Control 17101-05 Control Loop Description: Nitrogen 1 : 4 Reduction Diversion Pumps 17101-06 Control Loop Description: Secondary 1 : 6 Clarifier 5 17101-07 Control Loop Description: Secondary 1 : 5 Effluent Collection Structure 17101-08 Control Loop Description: AB5 Side 1 : 4 Stream RAS Pumps 17101-09 Control Loop Description: AB5 Drainage 1 : 3 Pumps 17101-10 Control Loop Description: Gallery Air 1 : 4 Supply 17101-11 Control Loop Description: ABS Biofilter 1 : 5 Odor Controls 17101-12 Control Loop Description: AB5 PEPS 1 : 8 17101-13 Control Loop Description: AB5 Tunnel 1 : 3 III Sumps Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) • Number Title Page Count 17101-14 Control Loop Description: Electrical 1 : 2 Room Hvac 17201 Level Measurement - Switches and Floats 1 : 4 17203 Level Measurement - Submersible 1 : 4 17204 Level Measurement - Laser 1 : 4 17302 Flow Measurement - Magnetic Flow Meters 1 : 7 17305 Flow Measurement - Thermal Mass 1 : 7 17316 Rotameters (Variable Area Flow Meters) 1 : 4 17401 PressureNacuum Measurement: 1 : 6 Diaphragm and Annular Seals 17402 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement - 1 : 6 Instrument Valves 17403 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement-Switches 1 : 5 17404 PressureNacuum Measurement-Gauges 1 : 5 17505 Ammonium Analyzers 1 : 7 • 17506 Dissolved Oxygen Analyzer 1 : 6 17507 Total Suspended Solids Analyzers 1 : 7 17508 On-line Process Nutrient Analyzer System 1 : 6 17509 Nutrient Analyzers 1 : 7 17710 Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and 1 : 27 Panel Components 17901 Instrument List 1 : 2 17901-1 Supplement: Instrument Schedule 1 : 1 17903 Input/Output List 1 : 2 17903-1 Supplement: Input/Output Schedule 1 : 4 • Clean Water Services TOC Table of Contents Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all Electrical Work. 2. General requirements for electrical submittals. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty • of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders b. Section 00700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. c. Section 01140, Work Restrictions. d. Section 01292, Schedule of Values. e. Section 01324, Construction Schedule. f. Section 01329, Safety Plan. g. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. h. Section 01410, Regulatory Requirements. i. Section 01450, Quality Control. j. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities and Controls k. Section 01610, General Equipment Stipulations. I. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. m. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. n. Section 01770, Closeout Procedures. o. Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data. p. Division 16 • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 C. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components: • 1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems. 2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other electrical hardware to the Work, which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished: a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer's wiring requirements. 3. Submit all such changes and additions to the Engineer for acceptance as specified in Document 00700. 4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on the Drawings or in the Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work: 5. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, • refer conflict to the Engineer as soon as possible for resolution. D. All electrical equipment and systems for the entire Project must comply with the requirements of the Electrical Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not: 1. The requirements of the Electrical Specifications apply to all Electrical Work specified in other sections, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc. 2. Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the requirements of the Electrical Specifications. 3. The Owner is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the Contractor to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Electrical Specifications requirements. E. Special subcontractor requirements: 1. As specified elsewhere in this Section, provide the Work specified in the Electrical Specifications by a qualified electrical subcontractor. F. Contract Documents: 1. General: a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used together in order to fully describe the Work. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2. Specifications: a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents govern the Work. b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements. 3. Contract Drawings: a. The Electrical Drawings show desired locations, arrangements, and components of the Electrical Work in a diagrammatic manner. b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximate only; exercise professional judgment in executing the Work to ensure the best possible installation: 1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all electrical equipment is compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions. 2) The Contractor has the freedom to select any of the named manufacturers as identified in the individual • specification sections; however, the Engineer has designed the spatial equipment layout based upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named manufacturer's equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space. c. Installation details: 1) The Contract Drawings include typical installation details the Contractor is to use to complete the Electrical Work. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, develop installation details that may be necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the Engineer. 2) Not all typical installation details are referenced within the Drawing set. Apply and use typical details where appropriate. d. Schematic diagrams: 1) All controls are shown de-energized. 2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all 1111 necessary contacts for the control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system voltage drop considerations. 4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or indicated. 5) Schematic diagrams are to be used in conjunction with the descriptive operating sequences in the Contract Documents. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional control system. G. Alternates/Alternatives: 1. Coordinate with Document 00700 for substitute item provisions. H. Changes and change orders: 1. As specified in Document 00700. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Code compliance: 1. As specified in Section 01410, Regulatory Requirements. 2. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic • designation only. The latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced publications in effect at the time of the bid governs. 3. The standards listed are hereby incorporated into this Section. a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1) ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. c. ASTM International (ASTM). d. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). e. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). f. International Code Council (ICC). 1) International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES). a) AC 156 —Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake Table Testing of Non- Structural Components (ICC-ES AC 156). g. International Society of Automation (ISA). h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 i. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): • 1) 70 - National Electric Code (NEC). j. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). k. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). B. Compliance with laws and regulations: 1. As specified in Document 00700. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth by: 1. IEEE. 2. NETA. 3. IES. 4. ISA. 5. NEC. 6. NEMA. 7. NFPA. 8. NIST. B. Specific definitions: 1. FAT: Factory Acceptance Test. • 2. LCP: Local Control Panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO. 3. PCM: Process Control Module: An enclosure containing any of the following 4. devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO. 5. LCS: Local Control Station: Operator interface panel that may contain pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, etc. 6. PCIS: Process Control and Instrumentation System. 7. Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e., provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space. 8. Spare: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that physically contains a device with no load connections to be made. 9. Unequipped space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General requirements: • 1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and completing the Electrical Work indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications and reasonably inferable there from: a. The Electrical Drawings are schematic in nature; use the Structural, Architectural, Mechanical, and Civil Drawings for all dimensions and scaling purposes. 2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power, instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of equipment furnished by others as well as equipment furnished by the Contractor, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are necessary for successful operation. 3. Provide all Electrical Work, including conduit, field wiring, and connections by the electrical subcontractor under the provisions of the Electrical Specifications for all aspects of the Work, including heating, ventilating, and air conditioning. 4. Coordinate all aspects of the Work with the electrical subcontractor and other subcontractors before bidding in order to • ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The Owner is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the Contractor, the electrical subcontractor, the other subcontractors or suppliers. 5. Demolition: a. Where demolition is specified or indicated on the Drawings, disconnect all associated electrical equipment and render the equipment safe. b. Remove and dispose of all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls, etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished as indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated. c. Salvage electrical equipment as indicated on the Drawings. d. For each piece of equipment to be removed, remove all ancillary components (e.g. instruments, solenoid valves, disconnect switches, etc.). • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • e. Conduit: 1) Where conduit removal, other than associated with equipment to be removed, is indicated on the Drawings: a) Remove exposed conduit to the point of encasement or burial. b) Cut conduit flush and plug or cap encased or buried conduit. 2) Where conduits are to remain in place and removal is not indicated on the Drawings: a) Cap conduit open ends. b) Re-label empty conduits as spare. f. Remove all wire back to the source for all conduits to be removed or abandoned in place. g. Provide new nameplates for modified electrical distribution equipment, motor control centers etc. to identify equipment and circuits that are no longer used as spares. h. Provide new typewritten schedules for all modified panelboards. 6. Portions of this Project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment: a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions (circuits, power systems, • controls, equipment, etc.) before starting any Work. Determine all information necessary to document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. b. Provide and document interface with, modifications to, upgrades, or replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. 7. Provide all trenching, forming, rebar, concrete, back filling, hard surface removal and replacement, for all items associated with the Electrical Work and installation: a. As specified in the Contract Documents. 8. Defective work: a. As specified in Document 00700. B. Operating facility: 1. As specified in Section 01140, Work Restrictions. 2. The Durham AWWTF is an operating facility. Portions of this facility must remain fully functional throughout the entire construction period. In consideration of this requirement, comply with the following guidelines: a. All outages must be of minimal duration and fully coordinated and agreed to by the Owner. Adjust the construction schedule to meet the requirements of the Owner. All Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 changes in schedule and any needs to reschedule are • included in the Work. b. As weather and water demand conditions dictate, re-adjust the construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon Owner by its users. c. Coordinate the construction and power renovation, bear all costs, so that all existing facilities can continue operation throughout construction. 3. According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings, extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations. 4. The standards of documentation, instrument tagging, cable and conductor ferruling, terminal identification and labeling that apply to the new installation apply equally to the existing installation which forms part of the modified system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and this Section. B. General: 1. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance manuals of the requirements in this Section. 1111 2. Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Electrical Specifications. 3. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification throughout the Project: a. Uniquely number each wire. b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings. 4. Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all submittals. 5. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. C. Seismic requirements: 1. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E or F, prepare and submit the following: a. Statement of seismic qualification, and special seismic certification: 1) "Statement of seismic qualification:" Provide manufacturer's statement that the equipment satisfies the seismic design requirements of the building code • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • indicated in Section 01410, Regulatory Requirements, including the requirements of ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 2) "Special seismic certification:" Provide manufacturer's certification that the equipment, when subjected to shake table testing in accordance with ICC-ES AC 156, meets the "Post-Test Functional Compliance Verification" requirements of ICC-ES AC 156 for "Components with Ip = 1.5." Compliance shall include both operability and containment of hazardous materials as appropriate to the unit being tested. b. Substantiating test data: With seismic qualification and special seismic certification statements, submit results of testing in accordance with ICC-ES AC 156. c. Anchoring design calculations and details: 1) Submit project-specific drawings and supporting calculations, prepared and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed, and showing details for anchoring electrical equipment to its supports and for anchoring supports provided with the equipment to the structure. Prepare calculations in accordance with the requirements of Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design • Criteria. 3. Exemptions: A "statement of seismic qualification" and a "special seismic certification" are not required for the following equipment: a. Temporary or moveable equipment. b. Equipment anchored to the structure and having a total weight of 20 pounds or less. c. Distribution equipment anchored to the structure and having a total unit weight of 5 pounds per linear foot, or less. D. Submittal organization: 1. First page: a. Specification section reference. b. Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before delivery to Engineer. c. Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for the development of the submittal. d. Place for Contractor's review stamp and comments. 2. Next pages: a. Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub-paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and • offers alternative means for compliance. Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 b. Include a response in writing to each of the Engineer's • comments or questions for submittal packages which are re- submitted: 1) In the order that the comments or questions were presented throughout the submittal. 2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the comment appeared. 3) Acceptable responses to Engineer's comments are either: a) Engineer's comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made. b) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. c) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by Engineer. 4) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the Engineer's previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Re-submittal. 5) No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received. 3. Remaining pages: a. Actual submittal data: 1) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the • items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section. For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used. E. Submittal requirements: 1. Furnish submittals that are fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component. 2. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals and operation and maintenance manuals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review. 3. Edit all submittals and operation and maintenance manuals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. a. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 4. Submit copies of shop drawings, and product data: a. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details. 5. Where submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each specification section. In order to expedite construction, the Contractor may make more than 1 submittal per specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more than 1 specification section: a. The only exception to this requirement is when 1 specification section covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section. (For example, circuit breakers are a component of switchgear. The switchgear submittal must also contain data for the associated circuit breakers, even though they are covered in a different specification section.) 6. Exceptions to Specifications and Drawings: a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings along with a detailed explanation of each. b. If there is insufficient explanation for the exception or deviation, the submittal will be returned requiring revision and re-submittal. • c. Acceptance of any exception is at the sole discretion of the Engineer. 1) Provide all items (materials, features, functions, performance, etc.) required by the Contract Documents that are not accepted as exceptions. d. Replace all items that do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, which were not previously accepted as exceptions, even if the submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the requirements. 7. Specific submittal requirements: a. Shop drawings: 1) Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other sections. 2) Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications. 3) Shop drawings requirements: a) Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. b) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c) Component layout and identification. d) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal identification. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 e) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal • wiring diagrams, conductor size, etc. f) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer's recommendations for the Project site seismic criteria. g) Weight. h) Finish. i) Nameplates: (1) As specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. j) Temperature limitations, as applicable. b. Product data: 1) Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings. 2) Include: a) Catalog cuts. b) Bulletins. c) Brochures. d) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. e) Identify on the data sheets the Project name, applicable specification section, and paragraph. f) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being furnished. • g) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be supplied. c. Detailed sequence of operation for all equipment or systems. F. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. As specified in Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Furnish the Engineer with a complete set of written operation and maintenance manuals 4 weeks before energization start-up and/or commissioning. 3. Additional operation and maintenance manual requirements: a. Completely index manuals with a tab for each section: 1) Each section containing applicable data for each piece of equipment, system, or topic covered. 2) Assemble manuals using the approved shop drawings, and include, the following types of data: a) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment. b) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control system. c) Complete set of control schematics. d) Complete parts list for all equipment being provided. e) Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • G. Material and equipment schedules: 1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use: a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. H. Schedule of values: 1. In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values, Section 01292, Schedule of Values, submit per unit material and labor costs used in developing the final bid for the electrical system, for the express purpose of pricing and cost justification for any proposed change orders. In addition to the items shown on the schedule of values, provide per unit material and labor costs for conduit and wire installation for specific types, sizes, and locations as indicated on the Drawings and Conduit Schedule. It is the responsibility of the electrical subcontractor to prove to the Engineer's satisfaction that said per unit costs were used in the development of the final Bid amount. I. Roof penetrations: 1. Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the sealing means to be utilized. • J. Record Documents: 1. Furnish as specified in Section 01770, Closeout Procedures. 2. Provide Record Documents of all Electrical Drawings. 3. Record Drawing requirements: a. Update Record Drawings weekly. b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly progress payments. c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review. d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following: 1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures encountered or uncovered during construction. 4. Shop drawings: a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems: 1) Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11-inch by 17-inch using Bond paper. 2) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD- ROM disks in AutoCad Version 2016 by Autodesk and PDF. Size all drawings to be readable and legible on • 11-inch by 17-inch media. Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 b. Furnish written information prepared specifically for this • Project using Microsoft Word 2010 and PDF and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper: 1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD- ROM disks. 5. Review and corrections: a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for correction. K. Test reports: 1. As specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Include the following: a. A description of the test. b. List of equipment used. c. Name of the person conducting the test. d. Date and time the test was conducted. e. All raw data collected. f. Calculated results. g. Each report signed by the person responsible for the test. 3. Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are specified in Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. • L. Calculations: 1. Where required by specific Electrical Specifications: a. Because these calculations are being provided by a registered professional engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means. M. Factory Acceptance Test: 1. As specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during test. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. No spare parts are required. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -14- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. System supplier responsibilities: 1. Requirements as specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications. 2. System supplier: a. Due to the critical and complex technical requirements of this Project, all Work (materials, equipment, products, submittals, labor, services, etc.) specified in the Electrical, and Instrumentation and Control Specifications, and shown on the Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings is to be furnished by a single system supplier who has single source responsibility for both the process control and instrumentation systems and the electrical power system. 3. Contractual relationship: a. Form a contractual relationship between the electrical subcontractor and the PCIS subcontractor. b. Requirements for the first tier subcontractor: 1) Contract directly with the Contractor. • 2) Be either the electrical subcontractor or the PCIS subcontractor. c. Requirements for the second tier subcontractor: 1) A division of the first tier subcontractor, or 2) A joint venture with the first tier subcontractor, or 3) A subcontractor to the first tier subcontractor. d. The system supplier manages, directs, and supervises all of the Work of its second tier subcontractor. The system supplier is solely responsible for the entire electrical and instrumentation system, including, but not limited to, all Electrical, Instrumentation, and Process Contract Drawings, Electrical Specifications, and Instrumentation and Control Specifications: 1) Provide any additional conduit, wire, etc. 2) Any additional I/O, programming, screens, interface devices needed by the system supplier are to be provided by the electrical subcontractor or the PCIS subcontractor, under the above outlined working agreement. 3) Ensure compatibility between the PCIS system and the electrical system being installed. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -15- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION • A. Shipping precautions: 1. After completion of shop assembly and successful factory testing, pack all equipment in protective crates, and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture. 2. Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings. 3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport. 4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering. 5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the job site. B. Delivery and inspection: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label. C. Special instructions: 1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment. 111 1.09 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Site conditions: 1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all equipment, raceways, and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below. 2. Seismic and Wind load resistance: a. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 3. Altitude, temperature and humidity: a. As specified in Section 01610, General Equipment Stipulations. b. Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous operation at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied. c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -16- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturer's guidelines: 1) Provide all power conduits wiring for these devices (e.g. heaters, fans, etc.) whether indicated on the Drawings or not. 4. Site security: a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site, as specified in Section 01329, Safety Plan. 5. Outdoor installations: a. Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located. b. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices incorporated into and included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels to maintain the enclosures within the rated environmental operating ranges as specified in this Section for the equipment: 1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices. B. Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment, regardless of supplier or subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements outlined in NEMA Standard 111 250 for the following types of enclosures: 1. NEMA Type 1: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment. 2. NEMA Type 4: Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing. 3. NEMA Type 4X: Made from corrosion resistant materials (316 stainless steel or approved equal) and are intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and corrosion. 4. NEMA Type 12: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non- corrosive liquids. C. Plant area Electrical Work requirements: 1. Provide all Electrical Work in accordance with the following table, unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings: 2. Provide stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosures and supports, and PCS conduit type for all Electrical work not included in the following table unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Conduit type definitions • are listed under Section 16130, Conduit, 1.03.B. Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -17- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 ENVIRONMENT • NEMA EXPOSED W WET PLANT AREA ENCLOSURE CONDUIT D = DAMP SUPPORT TYPE TYPE C = CLEAN/DRY MATERIALS X= CORROSIVE H = HAZARDOUS Outdoor-Area within 3' of fans, dampers, flexible connections, flanges, NEMA 7 PCS W,H PCS ductwork, and odor control vessels Outdoor-Other NEMA 4X PCS W SST Secondary Effluent NEMA 4X PCS W SST Collection Structure Electrical Room NEMA 12 RAC C Hot Dip GALV ST Tunnel Gallery NEMA 4X RAC D SST Aeration Basin 5 NEMA 4X PCS W SST Secondary Clarifier NEMA 4X PCS W SST RAS/WAS Pumping NEMA 4X RAC D SST 3. Modify conduit runs as specified in Section 16130, Conduits. • 1.10 SCHEDULING A. General: 1. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 2. Testing requirements are specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup, Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests and other sections. 3. General scheduling requirements are specified in Section 01324, Construction Schedule. 4. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in Section 01140, Work Restrictions. 5. Testing and process Start-up requirements as specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. B. Pre-submittal conference: 1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre-submittal conference for the purposes of reviewing the entire Project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules, and submittal requirements. 2. The Contractor, instrumentation and control subcontractor, electrical subcontractor, all suppliers, and individual equipment 1111 Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -18- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • manufacturers furnishing major pieces of equipment must attend, including but not limited to: a. Vendor control panels. b. Motor control centers. c. Switchgear. d. Lighting. C. Factory Acceptance Testing: 1. Where factory acceptance testing is required for equipment covered by these Specifications, notify the Engineer in writing when the equipment is completed and ready for factory inspection and testing: a. Indicate the desired dates for inspection and testing. b. Schedule the FAT after approval of the FAT procedures submittal: 1) Submit a copy of the test procedures including all forms at least 21 days before any scheduled test date. 2) Notify the Engineer of the scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days before the date of the test. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Electrical Work as specified in Document 00700: 411 1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Electrical Specifications. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements: 1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer. 1.13 MAINTENANCE A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments, component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems in service. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -19- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide similar items of same manufacturer throughout the electrical and instrumentation portion of the Project. B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual Electrical Specifications. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in Document 00700. C. Stainless steel: 1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the Electrical Work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 304 or 316, satin finish, as specified. • 2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys. 3. Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges. 4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals. 5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical areas or areas requiring NEMA Type 4X construction. 6. Do not use stainless steel in any area containing chlorine, gas or solution, chlorine products or ferric chloride. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products. B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the electrical equipment, to allow the Owner and Engineer to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication: 1. Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and other pertinent systems and devices. C. Factory testing is specified in the individual sections of the Electrical Specifications. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -20- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The electrical subcontractor is required to examine the premises completely before bidding. B. It is the electrical contractor or subcontractor's responsibility to be fully familiar with the existing conditions and local requirements and regulations. C. Review the site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all wiring and cables. D. Provide a complete electrical system: 1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to provide a complete and operating electrical, PCIS, and HVAC system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Equipment locations shown on Electrical Drawings may change due • to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions indicated on the Drawings: a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels. 2. Review all Contract Documents and approved equipment shop drawings and coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes. 3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by the Owner or Engineer. 4. Provide a complete electrical system: a. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to provide a complete and operating electrical system. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -21- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 C. Cutting and patching: • 1. Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for the Electrical Work, except as otherwise directed: a. Secure the permission of the Engineer before performing any operation likely to affect the strength of a structural member such as drilling, cutting or piercing: 1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that no penetration of any other systems will be made: a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cables, piping, ductwork, post-tensioning cables, etc. b) Use tone-locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of obstructions. b. Review the complete Drawing set to ensure that there are no conflicts or coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface. 2. Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original work. Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all locations with a fire stop material, typically: a. 3M CP 25WB+ Caulk. b. 3M Fire Barrier Putty. • 3. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a waterproof, non-shrink, non-metallic grout, unless otherwise indicated on the typical installation details: a. Use the installation details indicated on the Drawings as a guide for acceptable sealing methods. D. Install all conduits and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear: 1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space requirements as outlined in the NEC. a. This includes any panel, disconnect switch or other equipment that can be energized while open exposing live parts regardless of whether it is likely to require examination or has serviceable parts. 2. Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install equipment in the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. a. Adjust equipment locations as necessary to avoid any obstruction or interferences. 3. Where an obstruction interferes with equipment operation or safe access, relocate the equipment. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -22- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 4. Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting method to be used, use materials and methods similar to the mounting details indicated on the Drawings. E. Earthwork and concrete: 1. Install all trenching, shoring, concrete, backfilling, grading and resurfacing associated with the Electrical Work: a. Requirements as specified in the Contract Documents. F. Roof penetrations: 1. Seal conduit penetrations in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions. G. Terminations: 1. Provide and terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls, instruments, panels, and all other equipment. H. Miscellaneous installation requirements: 1. In case of interference between electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings and the other equipment, notify the Engineer as specified in Document 00700. 2. Location of manholes and pullboxes indicated on the Drawings are approximate. Coordinate exact location of manholes and • pullboxes with Mechanical and Civil Work. 3. Provide additional manholes or pullboxes to those shown where they are required to make a workable installation. I. Labeling: 1. Provide all nameplates and labels as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. J. Equipment tie-downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply with seismic and wind bracing criteria, which apply to the Site. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, LCSs, etc., must be permanently mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with the Project seismic criteria. • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -23- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.03 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP • A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. B. For Owner and Engineer witnessed FAT: 1. The Contractor is responsible for the Owner's and Engineer's costs associated with FAT as specified in individual equipment Sections. C. Owner Training: 1. As specified in individual equipment Sections. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Allow for inspection of electrical system installation as specified in Section 01450, Quality Control. 2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 3. Engineer inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation for compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. • c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage, and assembly. e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design requirements. f. Inspect raceway installation for quality workmanship and adequate support. g. Inspect cable terminations. h. Schedule inspection of all mounting of electrical devices and all penetration and connections to structures. 4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection or testing requirements specified in Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. B. Field Acceptance Testing (Functional Testing): 1. Notify the Engineer when the Electrical Work is ready for field acceptance testing. 2. Perform the acceptance tests as specified in Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 3. Record results of the required tests along with the date of test: a. Use conduit identification numbers to indicate portion of • circuit tested. Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -24- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 . C. Workmanship: 1. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and organized: a. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths. b. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive used as well as spare wire and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer. 3.05 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 01770, Closeout Procedures. B. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. C. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation and any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the equipment or system start-up: 1. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable. D. Clean and re-lamp all new and existing luminaires that were used in the areas affected by the construction, and return all used lamps to the Owner. • E. As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Furnish all personnel and equipment necessary to conduct the demonstration and training requirements as specified in the individual sections. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until Substantial Completion. B. Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16050 Common Work Results Durham AWWTF Secondary -25- For Electrical Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16052 HAZARDOUS CLASSIFIED AREA CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Executing and completing Work in hazardous and/or classified areas as defined by the NEC Articles 500 through 516, NFPA 820, and as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 16130, Conduits. 5. Section 16134, Boxes. 6. Section 16140, Wiring Devices. 7. Section 16150, Low Voltage Wire Connections. • 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions: 1. For the purposes of these Specifications, the terms "Hazardous" and "Classified" will be considered synonymous. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16052 Hazardous Classified Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Area Construction Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 B. Regulatory requirements: 9 Y q 1. All wiring in hazardous and/or classified locations shall comply • with all applicable articles of the NEC, in particular Articles 500 through 516. 2. Except as modified in Articles 500 through 516, all other applicable rules contained in the NEC shall apply to electric equipment and wiring installed in hazardous and/or classified locations. 3. All devices used in Class I Division 1 or Division 2 areas must have visible manufacturer installed nameplates specifically stating the Class, Division, and Group for which the device is approved. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. A list of hazardous areas is specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical and indicated on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Conduit and sealing fittings: 1. As specified in Section 16130, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Conduit boxes and bodies: 1. As specified in Section 16134, Boxes. C. Wiring devices: 1. As specified in Section 16140, Wiring Devices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Conduit installation: 1. As specified in Section 16130, Conduits. 2. Wrench tighten all conduit joints to minimize sparking when fault current flows through the conduit system. • Clean Water Services 16052 Hazardous Classified Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Area Construction Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3. Make all conduit connections so that there are a minimum of 5 threads fully engaged in the connection. 4. Flexible conduit: a. Class I Division 1 hazardous areas: 1) Approved and marked suitable for Class I Division 1. 2) Listed for compatibility with the group type atmosphere where used. b. Class I Division 2 areas: 1) Liquidtight metal conduit with approved fittings. c. Maximum length as specified in Section 16130, Conduits. C. Sealing fittings: 1. Provide an approved seal, no more than 12 inches from the enclosure, for all conduits entering an enclosure containing switches, circuit breakers, fuses, relays, resistors, or any other apparatus which may produce arcs, sparks, or high temperatures: a. Only explosion proof unions, couplings, elbows, capped elbows, and conduit bodies similar to "L", "T", and "X" may be installed between the sealing fitting and the enclosure. 2. Provide entire assemblies approved for Class I locations for self- sealing or factory sealed assemblies where the equipment that may produce arcs, sparks, or high temperatures is located in a • compartment separate from the compartment containing splices or taps, and an integral seal is provided where conductors pass from one compartment to the other: a. Seals are required in all conduit connections to the compartment containing splices and must be within 12 inches of the enclosure. 3. Install a conduit seal within 12 inches of the boundary in each conduit run entering or leaving a classified location. No union, coupling, box, or fitting is allowed in the conduit between the sealing fitting and the point at which the conduit leaves the classified location. 4. For underground conduits entering or leaving a classified location or between Class I Division 1 and Division 2 locations: a. Provide a conduit seal at both points where the conduit emerges from the ground: 1) Place the conduit seal within 18 inches of finished grade. 2) No union, coupling, box, or fitting is allowed in the conduit system between the seal fitting and the point at which the conduit enters the ground. • Clean Water Services 16052 Hazardous Classified Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Area Construction Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 5. Separate all conductors within the conduit system and seal using • an approved packing dam installed to both hold the sealing compound and to maintain the separation between the wires: a. Remove the outer jacket of multi-conductor non-shielded cables in the area of the sealing fitting and separate each conductor from the cable and seal individually. 6. Install seals with drains in all electrical control stations, low points of conduit or any place where moisture may condense and accumulate. 7. Install the sealing compound with a minimum thickness of 5/8 inch or the trade size of the conduit, whichever is greater. D. Boxes and fittings: 1. Class I Division 1 areas: a. Utilize threaded connections for all metallic boxes, fittings, and joints to the conduit system. 2. Class I Division 2 areas: a. Provide approved grounding bushings on conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes to bond the conduits together. E. Outlet boxes and bodies: 1. Provide conduits bodies and boxes suitable for the conduit system as specified in Section 16130, Conduits. 2. Class I Division 2 areas: • a. Boxes not containing arcing parts: 1) Material and NEMA ratings as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2) Pressed metal boxes are not allowed. b. Provide heavy duty cast construction type conduit fittings and joints: 1) Explosion proof rated fittings and joints are not necessary. c. Any enclosure containing arcing parts, etc. shall have all construction associated with the enclosure, conduit system, etc. conforming to Class I Division 1 construction. F. Motor connections: 1. Conduit installation in Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations for motors that contain arcing parts, shall proceed as follows: a. First - Conduit. b. Second - Explosion proof flexible coupling. c. Third - Sealing fitting. d. Fourth - Explosion proof union. e. Fifth - Connection to the motor terminal box. 2. Wiring connections to motor leads shall be as specified in • Section 16150, Low Voltage Wire Connections. Clean Water Services 16052 Hazardous Classified Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Area Construction Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3. Bond the non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways and other enclosures as required by the NEC to ensure electrical continuity. 3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Obtain inspection and approval from the Engineer before and after each seal is poured. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 16052 Hazardous Classified Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Area Construction Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 s • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Grounding materials and requirements. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies • accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System. 2. 837 — IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): • 1. 467 - Ground and Bonding Equipment. Clean Water Services 16060 Grounding and Bonding Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.03 DEFINITIONS • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground equipment and raceway systems so that the completed installation conforms to all applicable code requirements. B. Provide a complete electrical grounding system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified including but not limited to: 1. Grounding electrodes. 2. Bonding jumpers. 3. Ground connections. C. Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances required for complete grounding system to bond equipment and raceways to equipment grounding conductors. D. The ground system resistance (electrode to ground) of the completed installation, as determined by tests specified in Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests, shall be: 1. 5 ohms or less for industrial systems. 2. 1 ohm or less for electrical buildings and outdoor substations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. All grounding components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16060 Grounding and Bonding Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.09 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Compression connectors: One of the following or equal: 1. FCI Burndy. 2. Thomas & Betts. B. Ground rods: One of the following or equal: 1. Erico. 2. Harger. 3. Conex. C. Ground cable: One of the following or equal: 1. Nehring. 2. Harger. 3. Southwire. • D. Precast ground well boxes: One of the following or equal: 1. Brooks Products, 3-RT Valve Box. 2. Christy Concrete Products, G12 Valve Box. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Ground rod: 1. Minimum: 3/4-inch diameter, 10 feet long. 2. Uniform 10 mil covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid steel core: a. The copper-to-steel bond shall be corrosion resistant. 3. In accordance with UL 467. 4. Sectional type joined by threaded copper alloy couplings. 5. Fit the top of the rod with a threaded coupling and steel-driving stud. B. Ground cable: 1. Requirements: a. Soft drawn (annealed). b. Concentric lay, coarse stranded in accordance with ASTM B 8. c. Bare copper in accordance with ASTM B 3. d. Tin plated copper ground wire shall be used on aluminum • cable tray. Clean Water Services 16060 Grounding and Bonding Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2. Size is as indicated on the Drawings, but not less than required • by the NEC. C. Compression connectors: 1. Manufactured of high copper alloy specifically for the particular grounding application. 2. Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete. 3. Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on compression fitting. D. Equipment grounding conductors: 1. Conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the load circuit conductors: a. Use 600-volt insulation for the equipment grounding conductors for medium voltage systems. 2. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC. E. Grounding electrode conductors: 1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC. F. Main bonding jumpers and bonding jumpers: 1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC. 2.03 ACCESSORIES • A. Precast ground well boxes: 1. Minimum 10 inch interior diameter. 2. Traffic-rated cast iron cover. 3. Permanent "GROUND" marking on cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Provide a separate, green insulated, grounding conductor in each raceway independent of raceway material: 1. Multi-conductor power and control cables shall include an integral green insulated grounding conductor. 2. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel feeders. • Clean Water Services 16060 Grounding and Bonding Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect • at motor terminal box. Do not use bolts securing motor box to frame or cover for grounding connectors: 1. When grounding motors driven by variable frequency drives (VFD) comply with the requirements of the VFD manufacturer. D. Provide a grounding type bushing with lug for connection of grounding conductor for conduits that originate from each motor control center section, switchboard, or panelboard: 1. Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus in the equipment. E. Provide grounding type bushings with lugs for connection of grounding conductor at both ends of metallic conduit runs. Bond ground bushings to the grounding system. F. Provide a green insulated wire-grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw and, for grounding type devices, to equipment grounding conductor. G. Interconnect the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard neutral bus to the ground bus in the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard compartment, only at service entrance • point or after a transformer. H. Duct bank ground system: 1. Provide a bare copper grounding conductor the entire length of each duct bank, embedded in the concrete of the duct bank as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. 2. Bond duct bank ground conductors together where duct banks join, merge, intersect, or split. I. Grounding at service (600 V or Less): 1. Connect the neutral to ground only at one point within the enclosure of the first disconnecting means on the load side of the service transformer. J. Ground connections: 1. All connections to the ground grid system, the duct bank grounding system, equipment, ground rods, etc., shall be made using compression type grounding connectors as indicated on the Drawings, UL listed, and labeled for the application. 2. Make ground connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Do not conceal or cover any ground connections until the Engineer or authorized representative has established and Clean Water Services 16060 Grounding and Bonding Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project provided written confirmation that every grounding connection is • as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. K. Grounding electrode system: 1. Ground ring: a. Provide all trenching and materials necessary to install the ground ring as indicated on the Drawings. b. Ground ring conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth, or where embedded, concrete, of the size as indicated on the Drawings. c. Minimum burial depth 36 inches or as indicated on the Drawings. d. Re-compact disturbed soils to original density in 6-inch lifts. 2. Ground rods: a. Locations as indicated on the Drawings. b. Length of rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length. c. Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors before construction of concrete slabs and duct banks. d. Pre-crimp all ground rods, as recommended by the manufacturer, before crimping connector to ground rod. 3. Metal underground water pipe: a. Bond metal underground domestic water pipe to grounding electrode system. • 4. Metal frame of building or structure: a. Bond metal frame of building or structure to grounding electrode system. 5. Extend grounding conductors through concrete to accessible points for grounding equipment and electrical enclosures. 6. Install grounding system at each structure where switchgear, motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, panels, or other electrical equipment are installed. L. Shield grounding: 1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only unless shop drawings indicate otherwise: a. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the power source end of the signal carried by the cable. 2. Terminate the shield drain wire on a dedicated terminal block. 3. Use manufacturer's terminal block jumpers to interconnect ground terminals. 4. Connection to the panel main ground bus shall be via a green No. 12 conductor to the main ground bus for the panel. M. Where indicated on the Drawings, install ground rods in precast ground wells. • Clean Water Services 16060 Grounding and Bonding Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Measure grounding electrode system resistance to ground in accordance with IEEE 81. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Under the direction of the Engineer, add additional parallel connected ground rods and/or deeper driven rods until the ground resistance measurement meets the specified resistance requirements: 1. Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the specified ground resistance is not acceptable. 3.04 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16060 Grounding and Bonding Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies • accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01410, Regulatory Requirements. c. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup d. Section 05550, Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry. e. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. A 240 — Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16070 Hangers and Supports Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • A. Design requirements: 1. Conform to the requirements of the Building Code as specified in Section 01410, Regulatory Requirements. 2. Demonstrate the following using generally accepted engineering methods: a. That the anchors to the structure are adequate to resist the loads generated in accordance with the Building Code and equipment requirements. b. That the required load capacity of the anchors can be fully developed in the structural materials to which they are attached. 3. Design loading and anchoring requirements: a. As indicated in the Building Code unless otherwise specified. b. Seismic loading requirements: 1) Freestanding or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will satisfy the requirements for the seismic design specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. c. Wind loading requirements: 1) All exterior freestanding equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will satisfy the requirements for wind design specified in Section 16050, Common Work • Results for Electrical. d. Minimum safety factor against overturning: 1.5. e. The foundation and structures to which hangers and supports are attached shall be capable of withstanding all anchor loads. B. Performance requirements: 1. Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist all weights and code-required forces without deflections and deformations that would damage the supporting elements, the equipment supported, or the surrounding construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Supports: a. Materials. b. Geometry. c. Manufacturer. • Clean Water Services 16070 Hangers and Supports Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2. Hardware: • a. Materials. b. Manufacturer. C. Shop drawings: 1. Complete dimensioned and scalable shop drawings of all supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports, etc. 2. Complete anchoring details for equipment, lighting and raceway, supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports for all equipment in excess of 200 pounds, and all freestanding supports: a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed. b. Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a registered engineer, will be reviewed for general consistency with the requirements specified in the Contract Documents, but not for context, accuracy, or method of calculation. 3. Include data on attachment hardware and construction methods that will satisfy the design loading and anchoring criteria. D. Installation instructions: 1. Furnish anchorage instructions and requirements based on the seismic and wind conditions of the Site: • a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 111 Clean Water Services 16070 Hangers and Supports Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project PART 2 PRODUCTS 110 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Thomas & Betts. 2. Power-Strut. 3. Unistrut. 4. Cooper B-Line. 5. Robroy. 6. Aickinstrut. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Use materials appropriate for the area as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Hot dip galvanized steel: 1. Supports: a. In accordance with ASTM A123 or A153. b. Minimum zinc coating thickness of 2.5 mils. 2. Hardware: a. Electro-galvanized. b. In accordance with ASTM A153. • C. Stainless steel: 1. Supports: a. In accordance with ASTM A 240. b. ANSI Type 304 material. 2. Hardware: a. ANSI Type 304 material. D. PVC coated galvanized steel: 1. Supports: a. Hot dip galvanized steel as specified in this Section. b. PVC coating thickness of 10 to 20 mils. 2. Hardware: a. ANSI Type 304 material. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor bolts: 1. As specified in Section 05550, Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry. • Clean Water Services 16070 Hangers and Supports Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Mount all raceways, cabinets, boxes, fixtures, instruments, and devices on Contractor-fabricated racks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep trapeze type structures from swaying. C. Brace and anchor freestanding equipment supports using methods that provide structural support based on the seismic loads and wind loads: 1. Lateral deflection at top of supports not to exceed support height divided by 240 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. D. Provide fabricated steel support pedestals for wall mounted panels that weigh more than 200 pounds: 1. Fabricate pedestals out of welded angle, tube sections, or preformed channel. 2. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet, match the • supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions. 3. Provide auxiliary floor supports for transformers hung from stud walls and weighing more than 200 pounds. 4. Mount all equipment, cabinets, boxes, instruments, and devices in damp or wet locations on minimum of 7/8-inch preformed mounting channel. a. Mount channel vertically along the length of the device so that water or moisture may run freely behind the device. E. Corrosion protection: 1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except where required for electrical continuity. a. Use neoprene washers, 9-mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets for isolation. F. Raceway: 1. Furnish all conduit racks and trapeze structures needed to support the raceway from the structure. a. Group conduits and position on racks to minimize crossovers. b. Provide the necessary bracing to keep trapeze type structures from swaying under loads from cable installation, seismic forces, or wind forces. • Clean Water Services 16070 Hangers and Supports Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project G. Anchoring methods: • 1. Solid concrete: Anchor bolts, anchor rods or post-installed anchors as specified in Section 05550, Anchorage In Concrete and Masonry . 2. Metal surfaces: Machine screws or bolts. 3. Hollow masonry units: Post-installed anchors as specified in Section 05550, Anchorage In Concrete and Masonry . H. When supporting devices on metal or wood stud construction, bridge studs with preformed channel, and mount the devices to the channel. I. Re-coat all scratches, cuts, and drilled holes in galvanized surfaces with CRC "Zinc-It" or similar product. J. Re-coat all drilled holes and cut surfaces on PVC-coated materials. K. Seal all drilled holes and cut surfaces on fiberglass materials. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.03 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16070 Hangers and Supports Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. Identifying electrical, instrumentation, HVAC, plumbing and process equipment and components. 2. Material, manufacturing, and installation requirements for identification devices. B. Related Specifications: 1. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Division 11. 3. Division 13. 4. Division 15. • 5. Division 16. 6. Division 17. • 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of mechanical equipment, process equipment, valve, pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air-handling unit, motor, switch, receptacle, controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply, solenoid, motor control center, starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually mounted or plug-in type circuit protector or motor controller, disconnect switch, bus duct tap switch, time switch, relay and for any other control device or major item of electrical equipment, either located in the field or within panels. 2. Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the facility. 110 3. Provide new nameplates for all existing equipment worked on in this project. Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. Wire Numbers: • 1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system: a. Control and Instrumentation wires and cables shall be assigned a unique identification number following OWNER. b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel. c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number. d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations beneath freestanding equipment. All multi- conductor and instrumentation cables shall be identified at pull points as described above: 1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number following the requirements for conduit markers in Section 16130, Conduits. e. Spare wiring and terminals shall be tagged as spares. 2. Power cables and wires shall be assigned a unique identification number as specified by OWNER. 1.05 SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product Data: 1. Nameplates: a. Color. b. Size: 1) Outside dimensions. 2) Lettering. c. Material. d. Mounting means. 2. Equipment Nameplate Schedule: a. Show exact wording for each nameplate. b. Include nameplate and letter sizes. c. Schedule format shall match equipment nameplate schedule attached at the end of this section. d. Submit equipment nameplate schedule for approval before engraving nameplates. 3. Wire Numbers: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for wire labels and label printer. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall submit samples for each type of Electrical Identification device intended to be provided for this • project for review and approval. Samples of the materials and Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • colors proposed for the WORK and application instructions shall be included. Devices shall indicate proposed text sizes, lettering and background coloring and related information. C. Record Documents: 1. Update the circuit/raceway block diagrams to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers including spares and destination points for all wires. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Schedule a pre-installation conference in accordance with Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical in order to clearly define the requirements specified for equipment identification: 1. Representatives of the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and ENGINEER shall convene before any major purchases of cable or conductors and before the installation or termination of any cables or conductors. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 WARRANTY • A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 SYSTEM START UP A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nameplates, labels and Signs: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Brady. b. Seton. B. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Heat-Shrinkable Tubing: a. One of the following or equal: 1) Raychem. 2) Brady. 3) Thomas & Betts. • 4) Kroy. Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2. Marker Printer: • a. One of the following or equal: 1) Brady XC Plus. C. Conduit and Raceway Markers: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Panduit. b. Almetek. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: 1. General: a. Identification tags shall utilize the OWNER standard numbering system for equipment supplied and installed as part of this project. Identification tags installed for outdoor equipment shall be rated for weatherproof type. b. When identifying a power source for equipment, the tag shall include the source name and circuit or compartment number (i.e., "100MCC0101-4F" or"100IP0101, CKT. #1"). c. For all equipment, identification shall include the descriptive name on the first line, the CWS standard tag number on the second line and the power source on the third line (e.g., Secondary Clarifier 7 RAS Pump #1 • 46P1801 Power Source 100MCC0101-4F). d. Text shall be centered on all nameplates and identification devices. 2. Electrical Equipment: a. Disconnect Switches: Each local power disconnect switch and circuit breaker for motors, instrument transmitters, controllers, and other equipment shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate. The nameplate shall identify the load served by equipment name and tag number, and the power source. Nameplates shall be not less than 1 inch high, and shall be laminated black-over-white plastic with lettering not smaller than 1/4 inch. Nameplates shall be attached using self-tapping S.S. screws. b. Switchgear and MCC: Each switchgear/MCC shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate (e.g. "100SWGRO101" or "100MCC0101"). Each switchgear/MCC compartment/bucket shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate (e.g., "1A" or "4F"). The nameplate shall identify the load served by name and tag number. Stand-alone starters, drives, and similar equipment shall also identify the power source for the starter, drive, etc. Nameplates shall be • attached using S.S. self-tapping screws. Nameplates shall Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project be not less than 2.25 inches high, , and shall be laminated black-over-white plastic with 1 inch high lettering and 1/2 inch high tag number lettering. c. Switchgear/MCC compartments/buckets, VFDs, enclosed starter panels, and similar electrical equipment: Each compartment/bucket shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate for the load it serves (e.g., "Secondary Clarifier 7 RAS Pump #1, 46P1801"). Stand-alone starters, drives, and similar equipment shall also identify the power source for the starter, drive, etc. Nameplates shall be attached using S.S. self-tapping screws. Nameplates shall be not less than 2 inches high, and shall be laminated black-over-white plastic with 1/2 inch high lettering and 1/2 inch high tag number lettering. d. Local Control Panels (LCP), Control Stations (CS), and field instruments: Each LCP/CS/Field instrument shall include a nameplate on the enclosure face identifying the panel name and tag number. Include the power source for each panel. Each panel-mounted device (internal and external) shall be identified. Pilot devices shall utilize collar-type, oversize nameplates provided with the pilot devices. Non-pilot devices shall have phenolic nameplates, attached using permanent • adhesive. Internal panel devices shall have phenolic identification plates (hand markings not permitted), , shall be laminated black-over-white plastic and shall be attached using permanent adhesive. Wiring and terminal blocks 1) LCP/CS/Field instrument master nameplate shall be not less than 1 inch high with not less than 1/2 inch lettering. 2) External and internal panel devices shall have nameplates not less than 1/2 inch high, with not less than 3/16 inch lettering. 3) Where field instruments do not permit installation of phenolic nameplates, provide a round, stamped, stainless steel nameplate using not less than 1/4 inch high lettering, neatly fastened by means of stainless steel wire. B. Signs: 1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs: a. Suitable for exterior use. b. In accordance with OSHA regulations. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Machine printed black characters on white tubing. 2. 10 point type or larger. • Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project D. Conduit and Raceway Markers: 1. 12 GA stainless steel, 3/4-inch by 2-inch minimum. 2. Stamped or engraved lettering. 3. Minimum 1/4-inch high letters. E. Field Instrument Identification: 1. Nametags: Attach instrument tags to all field instrument devices such as pressure switch, flow switch, instrument elements/sensors/transducers, etc. 2. Materials: 12-gauge stainless steel. 3. Fastening: Neatly secure to instrument with Type 316 stainless steel wire. 4. Size: Minimum 3—to 4 Inch high plate by 2-inches wide. 5. Text: Laser etch text on face of nametag. a. Descriptive Tag: Minimum 3-inch high lettering. F. Equipment Labels: 1. Provide identifying nameplate and nametag on new and reused panels and equipment as shown in Supplement Signage for Existing Panels and Equipment, or as listed elsewhere. Enclosure identification shall be located on the enclosure surface of PLC control panel, motors, pumps, local control stations, instrument transmitters, analytical controllers, etc. 2. Equipment Nameplates and Nametags: Pumps, valves, gates, and equipment shall be labeled as follows: a. Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face • with rectangular screw-on nameplates. b. Materials: Laminated phenolic plastic nameplates with white background and engraved black enamel filled lettering. c. Fastening: Secure with self-tapping Type 316 stainless steel screws. d. Size: 2 1/4 inch high plate. e. Text: 1) Descriptive Name: 1 inch high block lettering. 2) Descriptive Tag: 1/2 inch high block lettering. f. For the same piece of equipment, descriptive nameplate shall be consistently provided at various locations for all associated equipment with that piece. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Nameplates: 1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (i.e., pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc.): a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and coordinated system. • Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Nameplates: 1. Attach nameplates to equipment with self-tapping stainless steel screws, approved waterproof epoxy-based cement, or install in metal holders welded to the equipment as specified for each equipment. 2. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the entire length: a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or provide new enclosures at the discretion of the ENGINEER. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination. 2. Non Heat-Shrinkable Tubing: a. Tubing shall be sized for the wire and insulation on which it is to be placed. b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire. c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left • to right or top to bottom. d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point. e. Identification labels shall be installed at each conductor termination. 3. Conductor numbers shall be named based on the equipment tag of the field device utilizing the electrical power source. The form of the tag shall be 406P1205C2 where '406P1205' represents the equipment designation; 'C' indicated a control cable and 2 is a sequential number developed as part of the circuit design. Cable type designations shall follow the designations listed below: a. C — Control. b. S - Signal (below 80 volts AC or DC). c. P — Power. d. N - Network (Ethernet, Profibus ...). • Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project D. Conduit Markers: • 1. Furnish and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system or part of the process system. Conduits shall be identified as indicated on the circuit/raceway block diagrams a. Conduit markings shall match the circuit/raceway block diagrams. b. For conduits not shown on circuit/raceway block diagrams, provide conduit markings as described below: 1) Start with a prefix letter that designates its purpose ("C" for control, "P" for power, "S" for Signal, and "PC" for combined power and control), followed by a facility code, followed by a sequence number. e.g., C-100P0101 is a control conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. P- 100P0101 is a power conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. S-100P0101 is a signal conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. PC-340FV1301 is a combined power and control conduit in PEPS facility for control valve (Combined circuit allowed per OWNER approval only). 2) If the conduit is a continuation or branch of another conduit, the last space is a letter, such as A,B,C, etc. 3) When a single loop network circuit is utilized among equipment, conduit number for coming and leaving the equipment shall be assigned a prefix from and to. e.g. • NFR: 100P0101 is a communication network from IPS Facility Pump 1. NTO:100P0102 is a communication network to IPS Facility Pump 2. 2. Mark Conduits at the Following Locations: a. Each end and every 50 feet for conduits greater than 10 feet in length. b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure. c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc. d. The middle of conduits that are 10 feet or less in length. 3. Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted. 4. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor. 5. 12-gauge stainless steel tags 3/4-inch by 2-inch minimum - conduit tags shall be attached to the raceway with Type 316 stainless steel wires. 6. Mark conduits before construction review by ENGINEER for punch list purposes. 7. Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). • Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • E. Labeling: 1. Furnish and install permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically or from remote locations: a. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. b. Locate and mount in a manner to be clearly legible to Operations Personnel. 2. Furnish and install permanent and conspicuous warning signs on equipment (front and back), doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, and where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. 3. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has more than one source of power. Use warning signs to identify every panel and circuit number of the disconnecting means all external power sources: a. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking. b. Identify panel and circuit number or conductor tag for control voltage source disconnecting means. 4. Each switch, receptacle and similar device shall include a nameplate indicating the power source and circuit number providing power to the switch or receptacle. For circuits other than 120V, identify the voltage and phase (e.g. 277V, 10 or • 480V, 30). 5. Each panelboard shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate. The nameplate shall include the panel name and tag number, voltage, phase, ampere rating and power source. Nameplate shall be 2.25 inches high with 1/2 inch high lettering, shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, and attached using self- tapping stainless steel screws. 6. Each manhole, handhole, or underground pull box lid shall be clearly identified as "Electric." In addition, include a 2-inch by 6- inch stainless steel identification tag utilizing 1/2 inch lettering. The tag shall include the identification number shown on the drawings, and shall further identify the manhole, handhole or pull box as "Medium Voltage Power," "Low Voltage Power", "Control", "Signal" or "Communication", as applicable. 7. Aboveground pull boxes, junction boxes, and terminal boxes shall be identified using a stainless steel tag attached to the enclosure using S.S. self-tapping screws. Identify the box as "Power," "Control," "Signal" or "Fiber Optic" as applicable. Assign unique box numbers in accordance with OWNER standards. 8. Each exterior and pole-mounted luminaire shall include a nameplate that includes information for the lamp type, wattage, voltage rating, and power source for the luminaire. Nameplates • shall be readable standing at grade, 2-inch high with 1/2-inch Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project high lettering. Nameplates shall be stainless steel with stamped • or engraved lettering. 9. Provide arc flash labeling in accordance with NEC. 10. Provide labeling indicating short circuit ratings for all power distribution equipment and control panels in accordance with the NEC and UL requirements. F. Signs: 1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs: a. Mount permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically from remote locations. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. Locate and mount warning signs in a suitable manner that is acceptable to the ENGINEER. b. Mount permanent and conspicuous warning signs on the front and back of equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, and manholes where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. c. Place warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power: 1) Warning sign to identify every power source. d. Place warning signs on equipment that has a 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking. 2. Provide room signage at Electrical room entrances indicating • "Warning-High-Voltage." 3. Provide additional signage in accordance with applicable NEC requirements. 4. Provide 20 placard-style signs (7 inch by 10 inch) with warnings to be selected by the OWNER during construction. Placard signs shall be W.H. Brady B-302 style, or approved equal. G. Equipment Labels: 1. Locate and install on equipment or concrete equipment base. 2. Anchor to equipment or base for easy removal and replacement with ordinary hand tools. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers, or raceway labels that in the sole opinion of the ENGINEER do not meet the ENGINEER's aesthetic requirements. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Submit nameplate schedules on 11 by 17 inch sheets. END OF SECTION 1111 Clean Water Services 16075 Electrical Identification Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 410 Sched111ri6075 • Equipment Nameplate LOCAL LCS PHENOLIC VFD PHENOLIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL MOTOR PHENOLIC LABEL DISCONNECT LABEL LABEL MCC BUCKET LABEL PHENOLIC LABEL ABS PE INFLUENT MODULATING FLOW AB5 PE INFLUENT MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VALVE 320FCV1305-DIS NA NA NA 320FCV1305 320FCV1305 POWER SOURCE:XXX AB5 PE INFLUENT FLOW AB5 PE INFLUENT FLOW 320FIT1305 320FIT1305 320FIT1305-DIS NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:XXX AB5 MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 1 2F AB5 MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 1 410P1401 410P1401-DIS 410P1401-LCS 410P1401-VFD AB5 MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE 410P1401 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 2F PUMP 1 410P1401 AB5 MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 2 12F AB5 MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 2 410P1402 410P14012-DIS 410P1202-LCS 410P1402-VFD ABS MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE 410P1402 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 12F PUMP 2 410P1402 AB5 MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 1 ABS MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 1 MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE 410FCV1401-DIS NA NA NA 410FCV1401 410FCV1401 POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT.20,22,24 AB5 MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 1 ABS MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE PUMP 1 MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE 410FCV1402-DIS NA NA NA 410FCV1402 410FCV1402 POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT.26,28,30 ABS PE INFLUENT TO CELL 1 (ANAEROBIC) ABS PE INFLUENT TO CELL 1 (ANAEROBIC) FLOW FLOW 410FIT1305-DIS NA NA NA 410FIT1305 410FIT1305 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 1 ABS VFAD INFLUENT TO ANAEROBIC MIXING ABS VFAD INFLUENT TO ANAEROBIC MIXING CHIMNEY FLOW CHIMNEY FLOW 410FIT1550-DIS NA NA NA 410FIT1550 410FIT1550 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT 2 AB5 PE INFLUENT TO CELL 6C(OXIC) AB5 PE INFLUENT TO CELL 6C(OXIC) MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE 410FCV1550-DIS NA NA NA 410FCV1550 410FCV1550 POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT. 19,21,23 AB5 PE INFLUENT TO INFLUENT COLLECTION AB5 PE INFLUENT TO INFLUENT COLLECTION BOX MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE BOX MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE 410FCV1551-DIS NA NA NA 410FCV1551 410FCV1551 POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT.25,27,29 Clean Water Services Electrical Identification- Durham AWWTF Secondary 16075-SOl Equipment Nameplate Schedule Treatment System Expansion Project 1 March 2018 Schedule 16075 Equipment Nameplate LOCAL LCS PHENOLIC VFD PHENOLIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL MOTOR PHENOLIC LABEL DISCONNECT LABEL LABEL MCC BUCKET LABEL PHENOLIC LABEL AB5 RAS INFLUENT TO ANOXIC MIXING AB5 RAS INFLUENT TO ANOXIC MIXING CHIMNEY MODULATING FLOW CONTROL CHIMNEY MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE VALVE 410FCV1552-DIS NA NA NA 410FCV1552 410FCV1552 POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT.31,33,35 AB5 RAS INFLUENT TO ANOXIC MIXING AB5 RAS INFLUENT TO ANOXIC MIXING CHIMNEY MODULATING FLOW CONTROL CHIMNEY MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE VALVE 410FCV1553-DIS NA NA NA 410FCV1553 410FCV1553 POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT.37,39,41 AB5 VFAD INFLUENT TO ANAEROBIC MIXING ABS VFAD INFLUENT TO ANAEROBIC MIXING CHIMNEY MODULATING FLOW CONTROL CHIMNEY MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE VALVE 410FCV1554-DIS NA NA NA 410FCV1554 410FCV1554 POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT. 14 AB5 CELL 5(ANOXIC)TOTAL SUSPENDED AB5 CELL 5(ANOXIC)TOTAL SUSPENDED SOLIDS SOLIDS 410AIT1652-DIS NA NA NA 410AIT1652 410AIT1652 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.4 ABS CELL 6D(OXIC)AMMONIA ABS CELL 6D(OXIC)AMMONIA 410AIT1656 410AIT1656 410AIT1656-DIS NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.3 AB5 CELL 1 (ANAEROBIC)MIXER 1C AB5 CELL 1 (ANAEROBIC)MIXER AB5 CELL 1 (ANAEROBIC) 410MX1750 410MX1750-DIS 410MX1750-LCS NA 410MX1750 MIXER POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 1C 410MX1750 AB5 CELL 2(ANAEROBIC)MIXER 10J AB5 CELL 2(ANAEROBIC)MIXER AB5 CELL 2(ANAEROBIC) 410MX1751 410MX1751-DIS 410MX1751-LCS NA 410MX1751 MIXER POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 10J 410MX1751 AB5 CELL 3(ANAEROBIC)MIXER 11C AB5 CELL 3(ANAEROBIC)MIXER AB5 CELL 3(ANAEROBIC) 410MX1752 410MX1752-DIS 410MX1752-LCS NA 410MX1752 MIXER POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 11C 410MX1752 ABS CELL 4(ANOXIC)MIXER ABS CELL 4(ANOXIC)MIXER 1F 410(ANOXI 410MX1753 410MX1753-DIS 410MX1753-LCS NA AB5 CELL 4(ANOXIC)MIXER POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 1F 410MX1753 ABS CELL 4(ANOXIC)MIXER ABS CELL 4(ANOXIC)MIXER 11F 410(ANOXI 410MX1754 410MX1754-DIS 410MX1754-LCS NA AB5 CELL 4(ANOXIC)MIXER POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTIONN 11F 410MX1754 ABS CELL 6A(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED ABS CELL 6A(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED OXYGEN OXYGEN 410AIT1658-DIS NA NA NA 410AIT1658 410AIT1658 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.5 Clean Water Services Electrical Identification- Durhamry 16 1 Equipment Nam Schedule Expansion Expansion Project rch 2018 • Sche2.1L111r16075 • Equipment Nameplate LOCAL LCS PHENOLIC VFD PHENOLIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL MOTOR PHENOLIC LABEL DISCONNECT LABEL LABEL MCC BUCKET LABEL PHENOLIC LABEL AB5 CELL 6A(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW AB5 CELL 6A(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW 410FIT1658 410FIT1658 410FIT1658-DIS NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.6 AB5 CELL 6A(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING VALVE NA NA NA NA NA 410FCVI658 AB5 CELL 6B(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED AB5 CELL 6B(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED OXYGEN OXYGEN 410AIT1659-DIS NA NA NA 410A1T1659 410AIT1659 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.7 AB5 CELL 6B(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING AB5 CELL 6B(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING VALVE FLOW 410FIT1659-DIS NA NA NA VALVE FLOW 410FIT1659 410FIT1659 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.8 AB5 CELL 6B(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING VALVE NA NA NA NA 410FCV1659 NA AB5 CELL 6C(OXIC)DISSOLVED OXYGEN AB5 CELL 6C(OXIC)DISSOLVED OXYGEN 410AIT1660 410AIT1660-DIS NA NA NA 410AIT1660 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 9 AB5 CELL 6C(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW AB5 CELL 6C(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW 410FIT1660 410FIT1660-DIS NA NA NA 410FIT1660 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 10 AB5 CELL 6C(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING VALVE NA NA NA NA 410FCV1660 NA AB5 CELL 6D(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED AB5 CELL 6D(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED OXYGEN 410AIT1661-DIS NA NA NA OXYGEN 410AIT1661 410AIT1661 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 11 AB5 CELL 6D(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW AB5 CELL 6D(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW 410FIT1661 410FIT1661-DIS NA NA NA 410FIT1661 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 12 AB5 CELL 6D(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING VALVE NA NA NA NA 410FCV1661 NA AB5 CELL 6E(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED AB5 CELL 6E(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED OXYGEN 410AIT1662-DIS NA NA NA OXYGEN 410AIT1662 410AIT1662 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 13 AB5 CELL 6E(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW AB5 CELL 6E(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW 410FIT1662 410FIT1662-DIS NA NA NA 410FIT1662 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 14 AB5 CELL 6E(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING VALVE NA NA NA NA 410FCV1662 NA Clean Water Services Electrical Identification- Durham AWWTF Secondary 16075-S01 Equipment Nameplate Schedule Treatment System Expansion Project 3 March 2018 a Schedule 16075 Equipment Nameplate LOCAL LCS PHENOLIC VFD PHENOLIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL MOTOR PHENOLIC LABEL DISCONNECT LABEL LABEL MCC BUCKET LABEL PHENOLIC LABEL AB5 CELL 6F(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED AB5 CELL 6F(OXIC)INFLUENT DISSOLVED OXYGEN 410AIT1663-DIS NA NA NA OXYGEN 410AIT1663 410AIT1663 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 15 AB5 CELL 6F(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW AB5 CELL 6F(OXIC)INFLUENT FLOW 410FIT1663 410FIT1663-DIS NA NA NA 410FIT1663 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 16 AB5 CELL 6F(OXIC)INFLUENT MODULATING VALVE NA NA NA NA 410FCV1663 NA AB5 CELL 5(ANOXIC)NITRATE AB5 CELL 5(ANOXIC)NITRATE 410AIT1664 410AIT1664-DIS NA NA NA 410AIT1664 POWER SOURCE 960LP3402:CKT.22 NRD PUMPS EFFLUENT TO AB5 FLOW NRD PUMPS EFFLUENT TO AB5 FLOW 410FIT1410 410FIT1410-DIS NA NA NA 410FIT1410 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT. 17 • NRD PUMP 1 3F NRD PUMP 1 410P1411 410P1411-DIS 410P1411-LCS 410P1411-VFD NRD PUMP 1 410P1411 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 3F 410P1411 NRD PUMP 2 13F NRD PUMP 2 410P1412 410P1412-DIS 410P1412-LCS 410P1412-VFD NRD PUMP 2 410P1412 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 13F 410P1412 SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 EFFLUENT SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 EFFLUENT 420AIT1805 NA NA NA NA 420AIT1805 POWER SOURCE: - SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 15J SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 420CD1805 420CD1805-DIS 420CD1805-LCS NA SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 420CD1805 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 15J 420CD1805 4J SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 SCUM PUMP 1 SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 465P2101-DIS 465P2101-LCS NA SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 SCUM PUMP 1 465P2101 SCUM PUMP 1 465P2101 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 4J _ 465P2101 10M SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 SCUM PUMP 2 SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 465P2102-DIS 465P2102-LCS NA SECONDARY CLARIFIER 5 SCUM PUMP 2 465P2102 SCUM PUMP 2 465P2102 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 10M 465P2102 RAS PUMPS 24"EFFLUENT TO AB5 FLOW RAS PUMPS 24"EFFLUENT TO AB5 FLOW 465FIT1900 465FIT1900-DIS NA NA NA 465FIT1900 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.20 3M RAS PUMP 1 465P1901-DIS 465P1901-LCS 465P1901-VFD RAS PUMP 1 RAS PUMP 1 465P1901 465P1901 465P1901 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 3M Clean Water Services Electrical Identification- Durham F Secondary 1S 01 Equipment Na Schedule Treatme m Expansion Project rch 2018 • Sch.6075 5 Equipment Nameplate LOCAL LCS PHENOLIC VFD PHENOLIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL MOTOR PHENOLIC LABEL DISCONNECT LABEL LABEL MCC BUCKET LABEL PHENOLIC LABEL RAS PUMP 2 13M RAS PUMP 2 465P1902 465P1902-DIS 465P1902-LCS 465P1902-VFD RAS PUMP 2 465P1902 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 13M 465P1902 WAS PUMPS 8"EFFLUENT TO SLUDGE WAS PUMPS 8"EFFLUENT TO SLUDGE THICKENERS/DIGESTERS THICKENERS/DIGESTERS 465AIT2000-DIS NA NA NA 465AIT2000 465AIT2000 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.22 WAS PUMPS 8"EFFLUENT TO SLUDGE WAS PUMPS 8"EFFLUENT TO SLUDGE THICKENERS/DIGESTERS THICKENERS/DIGESTERS 465FIT2000-DIS NA NA NA 465FIT2000 465FIT2000 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.22 1 WAS PUMP 1 WAS PUMP 1 4F 465P2001 465P2001 465P2001-DIS 465P2001-LCS 465P2001-VFD WAS PUMP 1 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 4F 465P2001 WAS PUMP 2 WAS PUMP 2 14F 465P2001 465P2002 465P2002-DIS 465P2002-LCS 465P2002-VFD WAS PUMP 2 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 14F 465P2002 SIDESTREAM RAS PUMP 1 SIDESTREAM RAS PUMP 1 5F 465P1903 465P1903 465P1903-DIS 465P1903-LCS 465P1903-VFD SIDESTREAM RAS PUMP 1 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 5F 465P1903 SIDESTREAM RAS PUMP 2 SIDESTREAM RAS PUMP 2 5F 465P1904 465P1904 465P1904-DIS 465P1904-LCS 465P1904-VFD SIDESTREAM RAS PUMP 2 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 5F 465P1904 SIDESTREAM RAS 8"PUMPS EFFLUENT TO SIDESTREAM RAS 8"PUMPS EFFLUENT TO AB5 FLOW AB5 FLOW 465FIT1905-DIS NA NA NA 465FIT1905 465FIT1905 POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.26 SE COLLECTION STRUCTURE WATER LEVEL SE COLLECTION STRUCTURE WATER LEVEL 425LIT1810 425LIT1810 425LIT1810-DIS NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.28 SE COLLECTION STRUCTURE GATE LEVEL SE COLLECTION STRUCTURE GATE LEVEL 425LIT1811 425LIT1811 425LIT1811-DIS NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.42 SE COLLECTION STRUCTURE MODULATING SE COLLECTION STRUCTURE MODULATING FLOW CONTROL VALVE FLOW CONTROL VALVE 425FCV1810-DIS NA NA NA 425FCV1810 425FCV1810 POWER SOURCE:960PP340 CKT.32,34,36 DRAINAGE PUMP 1 DRAINAGE PUMP 1 2K 470P8101 470P8101 470P8101-DIS 470P8101-LCS NA DRAINAGE PUMP 1 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 2K 470P8101 Clean Water Services Electrical Identification- Durham AWWTF Secondary 16075-S01 Equipment Nameplate Schedule Treatment System Expansion Project 5 March 2018 Schedule 16075 Equipment Nameplate LOCAL LCS PHENOLIC VFD PHENOLIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL MOTOR PHENOLIC LABEL DISCONNECT LABEL LABEL MCC BUCKET LABEL PHENOLIC LABEL DRAINAGE PUMP 2 DRAINAGE PUMP 2 11M 470P8102 470P8102 470P8102-DIS 470P8102-LCS NA DRAINAGE PUMP 2 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 11M 470P8102 TUNNEL SUMP PUMP 1 TUNNEL SUMP PUMP 1 470P8104 470P8104 NA 470P8104-LCS NA NA POWER SOURCE: TUNNEL SUMP PUMP 2 TUNNEL SUMP PUMP 2 960PP3401 CKT. 470P8104 470P8104 NA 1,3,5 NA NA GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 1 GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 1 5J 465EF5001 465EF5001 465EF5001-DIS NA NA GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 1 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 5J 465EF5001 GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 2 GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 2 15M 465EF5002 465EF5002 465EF5002-DIS NA NA GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 2 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 15M 465EF5002 GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 3 GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 3 12M 465EF5003 465EF5003 465EF5003-DIS NA NA GALLERY EXHAUST FAN 3 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 12M 465EF5003 ODOR CONTROL FAN 1 ODOR CONTROL FAN 1 6M 480EF4101 480EF4101 480EF4101-DIS 480EF4101-LCS 480EF4101-VFD ODOR CONTROL FAN 1 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 6M 480EF4101 ODOR CONTROL FAN 2 ODOR CONTROL FAN 2 14M 480EF4102 480EF4102 480EF4102-DIS 480EF4102-LCS 480EF4102-VFD ODOR CONTROL FAN 2 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 14M 480EF4102 BIOFILTER ODOR CONTROL INFLUENT NA PRESSURE GAUGE NA NA NA NA 480PIT4103 BIOFILTER ODOR CONTROL INFLUENT NA DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE NA NA NA NA 480PDIT4104 WATER PANEL WATER PANEL 480LCP4601 480LCP4601 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.31 ELECTRICAL ROOM HVAC SYSTEM ELECTRICAL ROOM HVAC SYSTEM 960ACU5001 960ACU5001 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960MCCPP3401 CKT.8,10,12 MAKEUP AIR UNIT MAKEUP AIR UNIT 465MAU5001 465MAU5001 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960MCCPP3402 CKT. 1,3,5 Clean Water Services Electrical Identification- DurhamSecondary 1 1 Equipment Na Schedule Treatme m Expansion Project rch 2018 • Sche•075 4110 Equipment Nameplate LOCAL LCS PHENOLIC VFD PHENOLIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LABEL MOTOR PHENOLIC LABEL DISCONNECT LABEL LABEL MCC BUCKET LABEL PHENOLIC LABEL ELECTRICAL BUILDING FAN ELECTRICAL BUILDING FAN 960EF5001 960EF5001 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.21 TAP PRIMER 1 TAP PRIMER 1 TPP-1 TPP-1 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.34 TAP PRIMER 2 TAP PRIMER 2 TPP-2 TPP-2 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.36 TAP PRIMER 3 TAP PRIMER 3 TPP-3 TPP-3 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.40 MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH 960MTS3401 960MTS3401 PRIMARY POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 NA NA NA NA SECTION 6F ALTERNATE POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 1OF ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER 1 960AHF3401 ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER 1 960AHF3401 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION 6C NA NA NA NA ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER 2 960AHF3402 ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER 2 960AHF3402 POWER SOURCE:960MCC3401 SECTION10C NA NA NA NA POWER PANEL 90PP3401 POWER PANEL 90PP3401 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960MTS3401 POWER PANEL 90PP3402 POWER PANEL 90PP3402 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT.2.4.6 LIGHTING PANEL 960LP3401 LIGHTING PANEL 960LP3401 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960XFMR3401 LIGHTING PANEL 960LP3402 LIGHTING PANEL 960LP3402 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3401 CKT.37,39,41 LIGHTING CONTACTOR 960LP3403 LIGHTING CONTACTOR 960LP3403 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960LP3402 CKT.25 TRANSFORMER 960XFMR3401 TRANSFORMER 960XFMR3401 NA NA NA NA POWER SOURCE:960PP3401 CKT.7,9,11 Clean Water Services Electrical Identification- Durham AWWTF Secondary 16075-S01 Equipment Nameplate Schedule Treatment System Expansion Project 7 March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank S • • SECTION 16123 600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. 600-volt class wire and cable. 2. Instrumentation class wire and cable. 3. Network cable. 4. Telephone wire and cable. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this • Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding. e. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. f. Section 16150, Low Voltage Wire Connections 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B 8 - Specification for Concentric-Lay—Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 3. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 4. B263 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Cross- Sectional Area of Stranded Conductors. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): • 1. IPCEA S-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. 2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. 3. T-29-520 - Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests and a Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour. 4. S-58-679 - Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. Article 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Article 72 - National Fire Alarm Code. 3. Article 101 - Life Safety Code. 4. Article 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. E. Federal Specification J-C 30A. F. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL): 1. UL 1277 Subject - Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-fiber Members. 2. UL 1063 - Machine-Tool Wires and Cables. 3. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. • 4. UL-2196 - Tests for Fire Resistive Cables. 5. UL-1424 - Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits. 6. UL-1569 - Metal-Clad Cables. 7. UL-2225 - Metal-Clad Cables and Cable-Sealing Fittings For Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 8. 13 - Standard for Safety Power-Limited Circuit Cables. 9. 44 - Standard for Safety Thermoset - Insulated Wires and Cables. 10. 62 - Standard for Safety Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. 11. 486A - Standard for Safety; Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. 12. 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors. 13. 510 - Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape. 14. 854 - Standard for Safety Service-Entrance Cables. G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 1. 48 - Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating- Current Cable Terminations. H. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): 1. CC 1 - Electric Power Connectors for Substations. • 2. WC 55 - Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire. Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3. WC 57- Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and Instrumentation Cables. 4. WC 70 - Standard for Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2,000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. Insulated Cable Engineering Association.(ICEA). 2. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product Data: • 1. Manufacturer of Wire and Cable. 2. Insulation: a. Type. b. Voltage class. 3. American Wire Gauge size. 4. Conductor material. 5. Pulling compounds. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show splice locations. a. For each proposed splice location provide written justification describing why the splice is necessary. Splices are not allowed unless approved by the ENGINEER. D. Test Reports: 1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests. E. Calculations: 1. Submit cable pulling calculations for all cables larger than 2/0 AWG and pulling lengths longer than 200 feet. 2. Submit cable pulling calculations for all conductor sizes for pulling lengths longer than 500 feet. 3. Submit the calculations to the ENGINEER a minimum of 2 weeks • before the cable pull. Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 SYSTEM START-UP A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the Following or Equal: 1. 600 Volt Class Wire and Cable: • a. General Cable. b. Okonite Company. c. Southwire Company. 2. Instrumentation Class Wire and Cable: a. Alpha Wire Company. b. Belden CDT. c. General Cable BICC Brand. d. Okonite Company. e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation. 3. Network Cables: a. Belden CDT. b. Siemens. c. Lucent. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Copper per ASTM B 3. 2. Minimum 97 percent conductivity. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 4111 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Conductors, include grounding conductors, shall be stranded copper. Solid conductors shall not be permitted. Aluminum conductor wire and cable will not be permitted. 2. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to the site. 3. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24 inch intervals: a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size. b. Voltage rating. c. Insulation type. d. UL symbol. e. Month and year of manufacture. f. Manufacturer's name. 4. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification: a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire. b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG. B. 600 Volt Class Wire and Cable: • 1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the Drawings: a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows: 1) In accordance with the National Electrical Code: a) Use 75 degree Celsius ampacity ratings. b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater then rating of the overcurrent device. 2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors. 3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors. The only exception to #14 gauge wire is that wiring to Autodialer shall be #16 gauge wire as called out on the contract drawing. b. Provide tin plated copper ground wire to be used on aluminum cable tray. 2. Provide Class B stranding per ASTM B 8: a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required. 3. Insulation: a. XHHW-2. b. 90-degree Celsius rating in wet or dry locations. 4. Conductors for feeders shall be sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heating, and • lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 maximum total voltage drop on the both feeders and branch 11111 circuits to farthest connected load does not exceed 5 percent. 5. Multiconductor Cables: a. Type 1 - Multiconductor Control Cable: 1) Conductors: a) No. 14 AWG, seven -strand copper, tray cable rated. b) Insulation: 30-mil PVC. c) UL 1581 listed as Type XHHW-2 rated VW-1. d) Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier type. e) Tray cable rated. f) Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 2. 2) Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test. 3) Cable Sizes: Max. Outside Jacket No. of Diameter Thickness Conductors (Inches) (Mils) 3 0.41 45 5 0.50 45 6 0.53 45 411 9 0.64 60 12 0.72 60 19 0.83 60 25 1.00 60 37 1.15 80 b. Type 2, Multiconductor Power Cable: 1) Conductors: a) Class B stranded, coated copper. b) Insulation: Chemically cross-linked ethylene- propylene with Hypalon jacket. c) UL 1581 listed as Type EPR, rated VW-1. d) Color Code: (1) Conductors, size No. 8 AWG and smaller, colored conductors, ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 1. (2) Conductors, size No. 6 AWG and larger, ICEA S-58-679, Method Y. 2) Cable pass the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 0 3) Cable Sizes: Minimum No. of Max Nominal Conductor Conductors Outside Jacket Size Ground Wire Size (not including Diameter Thickness around) (Inches) (Mils) 12 12 2 0.42 45 3 0.45 45 4 0.49 45 10 10 2 0.54 60 3 0.58 60 4 0.63 60 8 10 2 0.62 60 3 0.66 60 4 0.72 60 6 8 3 0.74 60 4 0.81 60 4 6 3 0.88 60 4 0.97 80 110 2 6 3 1.01 80 4 1.11 80 1/0 6 3 1.22 80 4 1.35 80 2/0 4 3 1.32 80 4 1.46 80 4/0 4 3 1.56 80 4 1.78 110 250 4 3 1.76 80 350 3 3 1.98 110 500 2 3 2.26 110 c. Type 6, Multiconductor VFD Power Cable 1) Power cable to equipment controlled by a variable frequency drive operating at 600 volts or less, shall be rated 2000 volt. 2) Conductors: a) Stranded, uncoated copper. b) Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene. c) Ground: Copper conductor sized per NEC with IIIgreen insulation. Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 d) Shield: Cable assembly: Copper tape or aluminum foil-polyester tape, shield applied to achieve II 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. e) Jacket: Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable core. 3) Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-95-658, UL1277 and IEEE Standard 1202 ribbon burner flame test. 4) Cable Sizes: Conductor Number *Conductor **Assembly Maximum Size Insulation Outside (AWG or of Thickness Jacket Diameter kcmil) Strands (in.) Thickness (in.) (in.) 12 7 0.060 0.060 0.66 10 7 0.060 0.060 0.71 8 7 0.070 0.060 0.93 6 7 0.070 0.080 1.04 4 7 0.070 0.080 1.21 2 7 0.070 0.080 1.35 1 7 0.070 0.080 1.35 III 1/0 19 0.090 0.080 1.70 2/0 19 0.090 0.080 1.77 4/0 19 0.090 0.110 2.02 250 37 0.105 0.110 2.30 350 37 0.105 0.110 2.63 500 37 0.105 0.110 3.12 6. Instrumentation Cables: a. Type 3, No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log application is meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 1) Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness. 2) Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3) Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD. III Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 4) Conductors: a) Tinned copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b) 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. c) Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d) Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon. e) Color Code: Pair conductors black and white. b. Type 4, No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, design for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 1) Outer Jacket: 45-min nominal. 2) Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3) Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD. 4) Conductors: a) Tinned copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b) 20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire. c) Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d) Jacket: 4-mil nylon. • e) Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and white. c. Type 5, No. 16 AWG, Multi-Twisted, with a Common, Overall Shield Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer cable, meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 1) Conductors: a) Tinned copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in Accordance with ASTM B8. b) Tinned copper drain wires. c) Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18. d) Insulation: 15-mil PVC. e) Jacket: 4-mil nylon. f) Color Code: Pair conductors black and red with red conductor numerically printed for group identification. 2) Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped for 100 percent coverage. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3) Cable Sizes: • Number of Nominal Outside Nominal Jacket Pairs Diameter Thickness (Inches) (inches) 4 0.56 0.063 8 0.68 0.063 12 0.82 0.063 16 0.95 0.063 24 1.16 0.063 36 1.33 0.063 50 1.56 0.063 C. Network Cables: 1. Type 10, Profibus Cable: a. Provide Profibus cables in the following cable types in accordance with the drawings and specifications: 1) Profibus DP. b. Profibus DP 1 pair: 1) Tinned, copper conductors with 7 by 30 stranding (minimum). • 2) Polyolefin insulation. 3) Aluminum foil-polyester shield. 4) 100 percent coverage of outer shield. 5) 1 pair AWG #22. 6) Tinned copper drain wire. 7) Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) outer jacket. 8) 300-volt insulation level. 9) Nominal OD 0.335 inch. c. Meet NEC/UL specification for direct burial or wet locations. d. Meet all Profibus specifications. e. Be certified by Profibus when applicable. 2. Type 11, Shielded Category 6 (CAT 6) a. Conductors: 1) 24 AWG solid bare copper conductors. 2) Shielded cable with shielded connectors. 3) Provide strain relief on connectors. b. Insulation: 1) Polyolefin. 2) 4 non-bonded twisted pair cables formed into a cable core. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • c. Color Code: 1) Pair 1: White/Blue Stripe and Blue 2) Pair 2: White/Orange Stripe and Orange 3) Pair 3: White/Green Stripe and Green 4) Pair 4: White/Brown Stripe and Brown d. Outer Jacket: 1) Oil and sunlight resistant PVC with ripcord. 2) Color red. e. Electrical Characteristics: 1) Frequency Range: 0.772-100 MHz. 2) Attenuation: 32.1 dB/100m. 3) Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT): 39.3 dB. 4) Power Sum NEXT: 37.3 dB. 5) Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio: 7.2 dB. 6) Power Sum Attenuation for Crosstalk Ratio: 5.3 dB/100m. 7) Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (ELFEXT): 22.8 dB. 8) Power-Sum ELFEXT: 19.8 dB/100m. 9) Return Loss: 17.3 dB. 10) Propagation Delay: 537 ns/100m. 11) Delay Skew: 45 ns/100m. 12) Propagation Delay (Skew), max: 2.5 ns/100m f. Terminate CAT 6 cables in an 8P8C T568B fashion. • 2. Type 12: RS-485: a. Two-wire: 1) Shielded twisted pair. 2) Tinned, copper conductors minimum with 7 by 30 stranding. 3) AWG #22. 4) Insulation: a) FHDPE: Foam high-density polyethylene. b) 300-volt insulation level. 5) Outer shield: a) 100 percent coverage. b) Tape/braid. c) Aluminum foil-polyester tape. d) Tinned copper braid. 6) Outer shield drain wire: a) Tinned, copper conductor minimum with 7 by 30 stranding. b) AWG #22. 7) Outer jacket PVC: a) Sunlight resistant. 8) UL/CSA flame tested. 9) Minimum bending radius 2.5 inches. 1111 10) Nominal OD 0.284 inch. Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.04 ACCESSORIES • A. Tape: 1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510. 2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88. B. Connectors and Terminations: 1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO. 2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO. 3. Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector: a. Two piece compression type with setscrew in brass barrel. b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel. 1111 c. Manufacturer: 3M Co. C. Cable Lugs: 1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1. 2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 3. Insulated, Locking-Fork, Compression Lugs: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees Celsius wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees Celsius ampacity. b. Seamless. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) ILSCO; ILSCONS. 4. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees Celsius ampacity. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. 2) Burndy, Hydent. 3) ILSCO. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 5. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 2) Burndy; Quiklug. 3) ILSCO. D. Cable Ties: 1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts: TY-RAP. 3. Cable ties installed outdoors shall be UV resistant and rated for use in direct sunlight. E. Heat Shrinkable Insulation: 1. Thermally stabilized, cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON. F. Pulling Compound: 1. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, wax- based lubricant; UL listed. 2. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-covered wire and cable. 3. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways. • 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Polywater, Inc. b. Cable Grip Co. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirement of ICEA Publication No. S-68-516. B. Test in accordance with the requirements of UL 44 and 854 Standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 B. Color Coding: • 1. Color coding shall be consistent throughout the facility. 2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and 208/120 Volt systems: a. Phase A - black. b. Phase B - red. c. Phase C - blue. d. Single Phase System - black for one hot leg, red for the other. e. Neutral - white. f. High Phase or Wild Leg - orange. g. Equipment Ground - green. 3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 Volt systems: a. Phase A - brown. b. Phase - orange. c. Phase C - yellow. d. Neutral - gray. e. Equipment Ground - green. 4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring: a. Power - red. b. Neutral - white. 5. The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose • DC control circuits: a. Negative — white/blue stripe. b. Positive - blue. 6. The following color code shall be followed for all signal (4-20mA or 1-5VDC) circuits: a. Negative - black. b. Positive - white. 7. Switch legs shall be violet. 3-way switch runners shall be pink. 8. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue. 9. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods: a. Wires manufactured of the desired color. b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination point with colored tape: 1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -14- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 C. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and • all enclosures have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean and dry: 1. Install wires only in approved raceways. 2. Do not Install wire: a. In incomplete conduit runs. b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed. D. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits and prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation: 1. For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while cable is being installed in conduit: a. Ideal Products. b. Polywater Products. c. 3M Products. d. Greenlee Products. e. Or equal as recommended by cable manufacturer. f. Do not use oil, grease, or similar substances. E. Cable Pulling: 1. For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand. 2. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches • may be used if they have cable tension monitoring equipment. 3. Provide documentation that maximum cable pulling tension was no more than 75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable manufacturer. If exceeded, the ENGINEER may, at his discretion, require replacement of the cable. 4. Ensure cable pulling crews have all calculations and cable pulling limitations while pulling cable. 5. Make splices or add a junction box or pullbox where required to prevent cable pulling tension or sidewall pressure from exceeding 75 percent of manufacturer's recommendation for the specified cable size: a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only. b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections. F. Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep pulling tension and bending radius within manufacturer's recommendations. G. Install and terminate all wire in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -15- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 H. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, • pull boxes, and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties: 1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel. 2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool: a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting. 3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties. I. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with the conductor tightly wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head: 1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is tightened. 2. Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire. J. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor strands are confined within the lug: 1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment. K. Splices: 1. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible. a. Obtain ENGINEER's approval prior to making any splices. 2. Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors may be spliced without prior approval from the ENGINEER. 411 3. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths that exceed standard manufactured lengths: a. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical for box NEMA rating requirements. b. Make splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductors. c. Make splices for control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes: 1) Provide terminal boards with setscrew pressure connectors, with spade or ring lug connectors. 4. Splices not permitted for power and control conductors. 5. Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word "SPLICE." 6. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits. 7. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a heat-shrink sleeve: a. In NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible applications. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -16- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 8. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet areas shall be made waterproof using: a) A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications. b) Or an epoxy resin splicing kit. L. Apply circuit and wire markers to all wires as described below: 1. Circuit Identification Location: Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductor circuits, using circuit name as described below, at each termination and in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, panels, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, and terminal boxes. 2. Circuit Name: a. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit as indicated on the Drawings and as described in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods article 3.01. b. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique. 3. Method: a. Conductors No. 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond markers. • b. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted. c. Cables and Conductors No. 2 and Larger: 1) Identify with marker plates; or 2) Tie-on cable marker tags. 3) Attach with nylon tie cord. M. Instrumentation Class Cable: 1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power cables: a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non- dedicated manholes or pull boxes. b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices and instrument enclosures or panels. 2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical for shield grounding requirements. N. Signal Cable: 1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and power cables by minimum 12 inches. • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -17- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 a Submersible cable in wet wells: • 1. Provide Kellem's grip or stainless steel wire mesh to support cable weight and avoid stress on insulation. P. Wiring Allowances: 1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. Locations for pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and related materials to provide conductors to all pull boxes, manholes and duct banks within 20 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. LAN Cable Testing: 1. Test plan and witnessing: a. Obtain ENGINEER'S approval for the test procedures as part of the submittal process. • b. Arrange for the ENGINEER to witness all testing. 2. Submit a request for witness 15 days (minimum) before the proposed test date. 3. Pre-Testing: a. Test individual cables before installation: 1) Before physical placement of the cable, test each cable while on the spool with a LAN certification test device. 2) Before the cable is installed, verify that the cable conforms to the Manufacturer's attenuation specification and that no damage has been done to the cable during shipping or handling. 3) The test shall be fully documented and the results submitted to the ENGINEER, including a hard copy of all traces, before placement of the cable. 4) The ENGINEER shall be notified if a cable fails to meet specification and the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. 5) Installation of shielded connectors, RJ45 modular, shall be by experienced personnel to ensure proper conductor sequence and that outer jacket is inside the plug. 6) Contractor shall provide testing per EIA/TIA standards • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -18- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 4. Test Equipment: a. LAN Certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing Category 6 shielded cable installation to EIA/TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests performed shall include: 1) Near End Cross Talk. 2) Attenuation. 3) Equal Level Far End Cross Talk. 4) Return Loss. 5) Ambient Noise. 6) Effective Cable Length. 7) Propagation Delay. 8) Continuity/Loop Resistance. b. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots of the test results. c. Installed CAT 6 shielded cable with connectors shall be certified for CAT 6 performance. d. Manufacturers: One of the following: 1) Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350. 2) Approved equal. C. Grounding: 1. Refer to Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding. • 3.03 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16123 600 Volt or Less Durham AWWTF Secondary -19- Wires and Cables Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16130 CONDUITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Metallic conduits. 2. Nonmetallic conduits. 3. Conduit bodies. 4. Conduit fittings and accessories. 5. Conduit installation. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. • 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16070, Hangers and Supports. e. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. f. Section 16133, Duct Banks. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 - Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit. 2. C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing. 3. C80.5 - Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 4. C80.6 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): • 1. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit. 2. TC2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. 3. TC3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 4. TC7 - Smooth-Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit. 5. TC13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. 6. TC14 - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1 - Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. 6 - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. 3. 6A - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel. 4. 360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 5. 651 - Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. 6. 651 B - Standard for Continuous Length HDPE Conduit. 7. 797 - Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel. 8. 1242 - Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel. 9. 1653 - Standard for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. • 10. 1660 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 11. 1684 - Standard for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. Conduit bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to: shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc. 2. Conduit fitting: An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc. 3. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 4. PCS: PVC coated rigid steel conduit. 5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride rigid nonmetallic conduit. 6. SLT: Sealtight— liquid-tight flexible conduit. 7. EFLX: Explosionproof flexible conduit. 8. FLX: Flexible metallic conduit. • 9. NFC: Nonmetallic flexible conduit Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 10. RAC: Rigid aluminum conduit. • 11. NPT: National pipe thread. . 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete electrical raceway system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Furnish complete manufacturer's catalog sheets for every type and size of conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the Project. 2. Furnish complete manufacturer's recommended special tools to be used for installation if required. 3. Certified test results for PVC-coated metallic conduit showing the adhesive bond is stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC. 4. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. • C. Certifications: 1. Furnish PVC-coated conduit manufacturer's certification for each installer. D. Record Documents: 1. Incorporate all changes in conduit routing on electrical plan drawings. 2. Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines. 3. Furnish hard copy drawings and electronic files in AutoCAD format Version 2010. E. Installation drawings: Installation drawings, including individual conduit numbers, routing, sizes, cable sizes, and circuit numbers for each conduit. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. No spare parts are required. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled. C. Every installer of PCA or PCS conduits shall be certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Do not expose type PVC, FRD, NFC and ENT to direct sunlight. C. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground. 1.09 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box: • 1. Examine the complete set of Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable shop drawings. 2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades. 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1111 Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Western Tube and Conduit. b. Allied Tube and Conduit. c. Wheatland Tube Co. B. Polyvinyl chloride coated rigid steel conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal, Inc. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC). 1. One of the following or equal: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Patriot Aluminium Products. c. Republic Conduit. d. Wheatland Tube Co. D. Flexible metallic conduit: • 1. One of the following or equal: a. AFC Cable Systems. b. Southwire. c. Electri-flex Company. E. Sealtight liquid-tight flexible conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Southwire. b. AFC Cable Systems. c. Electriflex. d. Anaconda. F. Explosionproof flexible conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Appleton. b. Crouse Hinds. c. Hubbell Killark. G. Conduit bodies: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z/ Gedney. • d. Ocal. Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project e. Robroy. • f. Carlon. H. Galvanized rigid steel conduit expansion fittings: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z / Gedney. I. Conduit sleeve: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z / Gedney. J. Conduit seals: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Appleton. b. Crouse-Hinds. c. O-Z / Gedney. K. Conduit hangers and supports: 1. As specified in Section 16070, Hangers and Supports. L. Conduit through wall and floor seals: • 1. The following or equal: a. O-Z/Gedney: 1) Type "WSK". 2) Type "CSM". 2.02 COMPONENTS A. GRC: 1. All threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot: a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable. 2. Hot-dip galvanized inside and out: a. Ensures complete coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc alloys with the steel over the entire surface. b. Electro-galvanizing is not acceptable. 3. Manufactured in accordance with: a. UL-6. b. ANSI C80.1. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. PCS: • 1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip galvanized material, conforming to the requirements for type GRC. 2. Coated conduit NEMA Standard RN-1: a. The galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and preparatory process. 3. Factory bonded PVC jacket: a. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating. b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except where part configuration or application of the piece, dictate otherwise. c. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sags, blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and free of holes and holidays. d. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating: 1) Confirm bond with certified test results. 4. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings: a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch. b. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating, are not • acceptable. c. All threads shall be coated with urethane. 5. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit. 6. PCS conduit bodies and fittings: a. Malleable iron. b. The conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and shall conform to appropriate UL standards. c. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040 inch thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool damage during installation. d. 0.002 inch interior urethane coating. e. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design. f. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to assure corrosion protection. g. A PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at each female conduit opening. 1) The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used. 2) The sleeve shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every connection. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. RAC: • 1. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be manufactured of 6063-T1 alloy. 2. Manufactured in accordance with: a. ANSI C80.5 b. UL 6A D. FLX: 1. Materials: a. Single strip aluminum alloy. b. Single strip steel hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication. 2. Interlocking design formed from continuous metal strip for integrity and flexibility. 3. Manufactured in accordance with: a. UL-1. E. SLT: 1. Temperature rated for use in the ambient temperature at the installed location but not less than the following: a. General purpose: 1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. b. Oil resistant: 1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to 4111 +60 degrees Celsius. 2. Sunlight resistant, weatherproof, and watertight. 3. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication. 4. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for easy wire pulling. 5. Overall polyvinyl chloride jacket. 6. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes 1/2 inch through 1-1/4 inch. F. EFLX: 1. Suitable for the hazardous Class and Group where installed: a. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Metallic braid shall provide continuous electrical path. 3. Stainless steel construction. 4. Provide fittings and unions as required for the installation. G. PVC: 1. Extruded from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound: a. Schedule 40 unless otherwise specified. b. Schedule 80 extra heavy wall where specified. 111 2. Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable. Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3. Rated for use in direct sunlight. Conduit bodies: 4. Material consistent with conduit type: a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type GRC conduit. b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with type RAC. c. PVC bodies and covers when used with type PVC. d. PVC-coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type PCS. e. PVC-coated copper-free cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with type PCA. f. Malleable iron or aluminum bodies with pressed steel or aluminum covers when used with EMT conduit. 5. Conduit bodies to conform to Form 7, Mark 9, or Mogul design: a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space. 6. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to threaded holes in conduit body. H. Conduit Bodies: 1. Material consistent with conduit type: a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with Type GRC. • b. PVC bodies and covers when used with Type PVC. c. PVC-coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with Type PCS. d. Aluminum bodies and covers when used with Type RAC 2. Conduit bodies to conform to Form 7, Mark 9, or Mogul design: a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire-bending space. 3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to threaded holes in conduit body. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Connectors and fittings: 1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit. B. Insulated throat metallic bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit. • b. Aluminum when used with aluminum conduit. c. Positive metallic conduit end stop. Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project d. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated • surfaces rated 150 degrees Celsius. e. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non- combustible thermosetting phenolic. C. Insulated grounding bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop. b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150 degrees Celsius. c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum conductors. D. Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings): 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit. b. Aluminum for use with aluminum conduit. c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction. d. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas. E. FLX fittings: 1. Provide insulated die-cast connectors with ridges that thread into • the inside of the conduit to achieve a force fit. 2. Binding screw connectors are not acceptable. F. SLT fittings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron. b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring. c. Liquid-tight, rain-tight, oil-tight. d. Insulated throat. e. Furnish as straight, 45-degree elbows and 90-degree elbows. f. Designed to prevent sleeving: 1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket seal. g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of raceway core construction. Grounding device, if inserted into raceway and directly in contact with conductors, shall have rolled over edges for sizes under 5 inches. h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided between the outside of the box or • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • enclosure and the fitting shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a metallic retainer. 2. Corrosion resistant and outdoor SLT fittings: a. Construction: 1) PVC-coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.040-inch thick PVC coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduit. 2) Insulated throat and an integral sealing ring. G. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures: 1. Construction: a. Insulated throat. b. PVC coated when used in corrosive areas. c. Bonding locknut. d. Recessed neoprene 0-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector. e. One half (1/2)-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated. f. One and one half (1-1/2)-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated. g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. 2. Usage: • a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures. H. Sealing fittings: 1. Construction: a. 40 percent wire fill capacity. b. PVC-coated when used in corrosive areas. c. Malleable ductile iron with steel conduit. d. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. e. Crouse-Hinds Type EYD where drains are required. f. Crouse-Hinds Type EYS where drains are not required. g. UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Divisions 1 and 2; Groups E, F, and G. 2. Sealing compound: a. Fiber filler and cement as recommended by the sealing fitting manufacturer. b. Approved for the conditions and use. 1) Not affected by surrounding atmosphere or liquids. c. Melting point shall be 200 degrees Fahrenheit minimum. 1111 Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project I. PVC fittings: • 1. Shall include the following: a. Couplings. b. Terminal adapters. c. Female adapters. d. Caps. e. Reducer bushings. f. Duct couplings. g. End bells. h. Expansion couplings. i. Duct couplings 5 degree. j. C - pull fittings. k. E - pull fittings. I. LB - pull fittings. m. LL - pull fittings. n. LR - pull fittings. o. T - pull fittings. p. X - pull fittings. q. Service entrance caps. 2. Materials: a. All devices shall be made of PVC, using the same materials as used for Type PVC conduit. b. All metal hardware shall be stainless steel. • J. Through wall and floor seals: 1. Materials: a. Body: casting of malleable or ductile iron with a hot-dip galvanized finish. b. Grommet: neoprene. c. Pressure rings: PVC coated steel. d. Disc material: PVC coated steel. e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC. K. Expansion/deflection couplings: 1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends that they connect. 2. Shall allow movement of 3/4 inch from the normal in all directions. 3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in any direction. 4. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system. 5. Materials: a. End couplings: Bronze or galvanized ductile iron. b. Sleeve: Neoprene. c. Bands: Stainless steel. d. Bonding jumper: Tinned copper braid. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • L. Expansion couplings: 1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit: a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction. 2. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system. 3. Materials: a. Head: Malleable or ductile iron. b. Sleeve: Steel. c. Insulating bushing: Phenolic. d. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized. e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC. M. Conduit markers: 1. As specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. General: 1. Conduit routing: a. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in nature: 1) Install conduit runs as specified with schematic representation indicated on the Drawings and as specified. 2) Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the Engineer: a) Make changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to bypass obstructions. b) Make changes in conduit routing due to the relocation of equipment. 3) The Electrical Drawings do not indicate all required junction boxes and pull boxes: a) Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate wire pulling as required: (1) To meet cable manufacturer's pulling tension requirements. (2) To limit total conduit bends between pull locations. b) Install junction boxes and pull boxes at locations acceptable to the Engineer. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project b. The Contractor is responsible for any deviations in general location,.conduit size, routing, or changes to the • circuit/raceway block diagrams without the express written approval or direction by the Engineer: 1) The Engineer is the sole source in determining whether the change is constituted as a deviation: 2) Perform any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work from such deviations. 3) Incorporate any deviations on the Record Documents. c. Owner reserves the right to deduct the amount of applicable reimbursement, equivalent to the cost of the engineering effort required to show those unauthorized changes on Record Drawings. 2. Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling conduit system. 3. Provide adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all conduit runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows: a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and 12 inches from fuel lines and gas 411 lines. d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high- temperature surfaces, provide a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the surface. 4. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 7/8- inch away from wall on an accepted preformed channel: a. Do not run conduit within water-bearing walls unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 5. Do not install 1 inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless approved by the Engineer. 6. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of the building: a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies. 7. Install conduit with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or equal to 270 degrees. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -14- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 8. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space • and work space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems: a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and do not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches. b. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate conduit as required. 9. Conduit may be run in concrete members or slabs with permission of the Engineer or as indicated on the Drawings: a. Refer to the typical details for conduit spacing and size requirements. 10. When installing conduit through existing slabs or walls make provisions for locating any possible conflicting items where conduit is to penetrate. Use tone signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into existing conduit, piping, cables, post-tensioning cables, etc. 11. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture. 12. Install conduit through wall and floor seals where indicated on the Drawings. 13. For existing and new 2-inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel • of a diameter not less than 85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit: a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass. 14. Provide all sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically indicated on the Drawings. 15. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed. 16. Provide metallic conduits terminating in transformer, switchgear, motor control center or other equipment conduit windows with grounding bushings and ground with a minimum No. 6 AWG ground wire. 17. Underground and embedded conduits: a. Install underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade in concrete-reinforced duct bank construction: 1) As specified in Section 16133, Duct Boxes. b. Make underground conduit size transitions at handholes and manholes. c. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter underground manholes and handholes. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -15- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Lighting and receptacle conduits: • 1. Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated on the Drawings: a. Minimum conduit size: 1) 3/4 inch for exposed conduits. 2) , 1 inch for underground or in slab conduits. 2. Provide conduit materials for the installed location as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. D. Hazardous areas: 1. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical for hazardous areas and specific Class and Division. E. Conduit usage: 1. Exposed conduits: a. Rigid conduit: 1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch. b. Flexible conduit: 1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or where required for equipment • servicing: a) Use type SLT with rigid metallic conduit. b) Use type NFC with PVC conduit. c) Use type EFLX in Class I Division 1 locations. d) Use type FLX in finished areas. 2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch: a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments. 3) Maximum length: a) Fixed equipment: Conduit Flexible Trade Size Conduit Length (in) 3/4 18 1 18 1-1/4 18 1-1/2 18 2 36 2-1/2 36 3 36 • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -16- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • Conduit Flexible Trade Size Conduit Length (in) 3-1/2 38 4 40 a) Removable instruments or hinged equipment: b) As required to allow complete removal or full movement without disconnecting or stressing the conduit. 2. Concrete Encased and Concrete Capped Embedded Conduits: a. Type PVC Schedule 40 and PVC coated rigid metallic conduit as specified below: 1) Use Type PCS in underground and embedded installation as follows: a) Stub-up and risers to grade floor or equipment from nonmetallic conduits. b) Entering and exiting underground or embedded conduit runs a minimum 12 inches above and below grade or finished floor. c) For any and all bends where the total deflection is greater than 45 degrees. • b. Minimum size: 1) 2 inches in duct banks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2) 1 inch for in slab conduits unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Direct buried and sand bedded ductbank conduits: a. Type PCS. b. Minimum size: 1 inch. 4. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit: a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer's specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket. 5. GRC: a. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading. 6. PVC: a. Conduit terminations shall be via threaded adapters into threaded hubs on the junction boxes or conduit bodies. b. Conduit terminations into boxes without threaded hubs shall utilize a threaded adapter and a flat neoprene washer on the outside of the box. 1) Use a locknut on the inside of the box to tighten the adapter to the box. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -17- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project c. Route conduit to afford it the maximum physical protection. • 1) If necessary, cover conduit to afford additional protection when it cannot be shielded by the structure or machinery frames. a) Use Schedule 80 where exposed runs may be subject to physical damage. F. Conduit joints and bends: 1. General: a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the weather or in NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X locations, make joints liquid-tight. b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. c. All bends shall be symmetrical. d. For all types of high-voltage conductors, provide bends as required for lead-covered conductors of equivalent outside diameter. e. The following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows: 1) Underground conduits. 2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables. 3) Conduits containing shielded cables. 4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables. • f. Provide large radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or larger. g. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in the NEC: 1) The minimum bending radius of the cable must be less than the radius of the conduit bend. 2) Make all field bends with power bending equipment or manual benders specifically intended for the purpose: a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively reduced. b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements. h. Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit. 2. Threaded conduit: a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit cutting die that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that all joints become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point where the conduit ends would butt together in ID Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -18- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project couplings or where conduit ends would butt into the ends or • shoulders of other fittings. b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations. d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing "Galvabar" or CRC "Zinc It." e. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation: 1) Use KOPR-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of ferrous conduit. 2) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. 3) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly. f. Securely tighten all threaded connections. g. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized protective coating. 3. PVC: a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the purpose. Spray type cement is not • allowed. b. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a spring mandrel as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends: 1) Utilize a heater specifically for PVC conduit as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. G. Conduit sealing and drainage: 1. Conduit drainage and sealing other than required for hazardous and classified areas: a. Provide sealing and drainage in vertical drops of long (in excess of 20 feet), exterior, above grade conduit runs at the points at which the conduit enter buildings, switchgear, control panels, lighting panelboards, and other similar enclosures. b. Provide seal fittings with drains in vertical drops directly above grade for exterior, above grade conduit runs that are extended below grade. c. Provide conduit seals with drains in areas of high humidity and rapidly changing temperatures: 1) Where portions of an interior raceway pass through walls, ceilings or floors that separate adjacent areas • having widely different temperatures. Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -19- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project d. Provide conduit seals similar to O/Z Gedney (Type CSM) on • all conduits between corrosive and non-corrosive areas. e. Seal one end only of all underground conduits at highest point with O/Z Gedney sealing (non-hazardous) filling, or equal. 2. Install seals with drains at any location along conduit runs where moisture may condense or accumulate. This requirement includes, but is not limited to, the following locations: control panels, junction boxes, pullboxes, or low points of conduit. H. Conduit supports: 1. General: a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit applications: 1) As specified in Section 16070, Hangers and Supports. 2) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being installed as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the NEC. c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit supports. 2. Finished Areas: a. Above suspended ceilings: 1) Support conduit on or from the structure, do not support • conduit from hanging wires or suspended ceiling grid. b. Concealed conduit on wood: 1) Use 2-hole galvanized steel straps screwed or nailed to the wood or hammer-driven stamped galvanized type supports having serrated or sawtooth edges on the driven portion and designed specifically for the size and type of conduit being supported. Drive these latter supports so that the conduit is tightly and rigidly supported. Replace any dented or damaged conduit. c. In steel stud construction: 1) Tie conduit at maximum 4-foot intervals with No. 16 gauge double annealed galvanized wire or conduit clips so that conduit cannot move from vibration or other causes. 3. Conduit on concrete or masonry: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion anchors and screws or support from preset inserts. b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible. c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations. d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -20- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 4. Conduit on metal decking: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium- plated Type A panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable. 5. Suspended conduit: a. Use malleable iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch diameter), Kindorf, or equal. b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long, provide rigid sway bracing. 6. Supports at structural steel members: a. Use beam clamps. b. Drilling or welding may be used only as specified or with approval of the Engineer. 7. PCS systems: a. Provide right angle beam clamps and "U" bolts specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Provide "U" bolts with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads. b. Securely fasten exposed conduits with Type 304 stainless steel clamps or straps. • I. Expansion or expansion/deflection fittings: 1. General: a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding. b. Follow manufacturer's instructions to set the piston opening. c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical expansion and contraction. d. Furnish fittings of the same material as the conduit system. 2. For metallic conduit (PCS, PCA, GRC and RAC) provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where: a. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit runs. 3. For PVC provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches: a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move. b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the conduit to move as the temperature changes. • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -21- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project J. Empty conduits: • 1. Provide a polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty conduit more than 10 feet in length. 2. Provide one empty 3/4-inch conduit for each four spare unused circuits or spaces of each flush mounted branch circuit panelboard. Terminate empty 3/4-inch conduits in individual junction boxes that are accessible to enable extension of future branch circuits. 3. Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps or plugs immediately after installation: a. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors. K. Miscellaneous: 1. Seal roof penetrations for raceways and other items that penetrate the roof in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit systems that cannot otherwise be coupled: a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed. 3. Replace any conduit installed that the Engineer determines does not meet the requirements of this Specification. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.03 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16130 Conduits Durham AWWTF Secondary -22- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16131 CABLE TRAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Aluminum cable tray systems as indicated on the Drawings for the following: a. Power and control circuit cables. b. Instrumentation cables. c. Fiber optic and network cables. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in • this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.2 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. Standard VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems. 2. Standard VE 2 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • A. System includes horizontal and/or vertical straight trays, fittings, covers, splices, barriers, and related accessory and supports for the following systems: 1. Power and control circuit cable system: a. For support of alternating current power and control circuit cable. 2. Instrumentation cable system: a. For support of direct current control (24 V or less), alarm, instrumentation circuits, fiber optics, and communications cable. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Technical information: a. Tray types. b. Material specifications. c. NEMA load/span class designation. 2. Dimensions: a. Section width. b. Outside depth. c. Loading depth. d. Curve radii. 3. Weight of cable tray sections and fittings. 4. Complete bill of materials. 5. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 6. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. 7. Verification that the product meets the Quality Assurance requirements. C. Shop drawings: 1. Provide complete details and scaled drawings for the layout of the installed cable tray system showing all components and proposed mounting details. 2. Rigging plans and details for cable installation in cable trays: a. Indicate location and anchoring methods for sheaves supports and all pulling accessories. 1) Indicate reaction forces (magnitude and direction) on the rigging plan. b. It is strongly recommended that the cable pulling reaction points be determined before the 'concrete at those points is placed in order to allow for embedment of anchors or Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • additional reinforcement that may be recommended to address rigging loads. c. Reactions imposed on the structure at any location shall not exceed 2,000 pounds: 1) This requirement does not warrant that the structure can resist such loads at the Contractor's desired points of application. The Engineer may require submittal of additional analysis to confirm adequacy of the structure at those locations for the loads to be imposed. d. The Engineer's review of rigging plan and supporting calculations shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the system and for the responsibility to protect the structure and its appurtenances from damage due to pulling operations. D. Calculations: 1. Provide calculations to confirm compliance with the NEC and the requirements of this Specification with respect to cross sectional area and fill requirements. 2. Provide the following structural calculations Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed: • a. Calculations to ensure the installed system will withstand all cable installation forces without deformation or damage. b. Calculations to ensure that the installed system meets all structural, seismic requirements at the project site with respect to support and mounting as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical: 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. No spare parts are required. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Member of NEMA for the manufacturer of cable tray system and fittings of types and capacities required. C. Cable trays shall be UL classified for use as an equipment grounding • conductor. Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • 1.9 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. The Drawings indicate the general route of the cable tray systems. Data presented on these Drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. B. Specifications and Drawings are for assistance and guidance, but exact routing, locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Make field surveys as part of the Work before ordering material. • 1.12 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.13 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Cable trays: 1. One of the following or equal: a. B Line Systems, Inc. b. Chalfant. c. PW Industries Inc. d. Thomas & Betts. e. T. J. Cope. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum. • Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Power and control cable trays: 1. Ladder type: a. Rungs: Double or box type rungs, free of sharp edges and corners. b. Rungs located at 9 inches on center and provide adequate cable bearing surface. c. No portion of the rung shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. d. Flanged out. e. Sides: Minimum 5-inch interior cable loading depth. f. Minimum width: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Instrumentation cable trays: 1. Corrugated solid bottom type: a. Sides: Minimum 4-inch interior cable loading depth. b. Flanged out unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. c. Minimum width: As indicated on the Drawings. d, Drainage holes: 1/4-inch diameter spaced at 5 feet on center, ground smooth. C. Cable tray load capacity: 1. Capable of supporting the following weight without exceeding • the NEMA load/span class or manufacturer's recommendations based on 150 percent factor of safety, and without deflection exceeding 1/100 of the support span. Calculations for capacity and deflection shall be based on tray supported as a simple beam: a. For ladder trays, each rung must be capable of supporting the maximum cable load, and a 200-pound concentrated load when tested in accordance with NEMA VE 1. b. The tray system must be capable of supporting the maximum cable load, and a 200-pound concentrated load at mid-point of span when tested in accordance with NEMA VE 1. 2. The load and sizing calculations shall include cables to be installed in the tray plus 25 percent capacity for future expansion. • Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2.4 COMPONENTS 411 A. Elbows, tees, and crossings: 1. Of the same materials and construction as the tray. 2. Wide radius, not to be less than twice the bending radius for the largest cable to be installed. B. Connectors: 1. Same manufacturer and materials as the tray. 2. Straight connectors: a. Provide ground continuity across the joint. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Covers: 1. Furnish only where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Solid ventilated or raised as indicated. 3. Same manufacturer and material as the tray. 4. Use peaked covers in outdoor locations. 5. Secure covers with manufacturer's approved clamps. 6. Clamp spacing per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Dividers: 1. Manufactured by the cable tray manufacturer of the same 111 material as the tray. C. Mounting hardware: 1. Tray bolts, nuts, washers, and fasteners: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. D. Ground wire and bonding jumpers: Number 2/0 bare copper. E. Cable ties: UV resistant cable ties. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacture cable tray in compliance with NEMA VE 1. • Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify all dimensions and route before ordering cable tray: 1. Make all necessary field measurements. 2. Coordinate with all subcontractors and suppliers to determine structural dimensions and equipment dimensions, and to avoid all potential conflicts with other systems. 3. Examine existing site conditions to determine any additional material required to avoid interferences with existing equipment, piping, conduits, cable tray, HVAC, etc. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify all cable tray surfaces and accessories are smooth, free from burrs or sharp edges before cable installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical: 1. In accordance with NEMA VE 2 and NEC for cable tray installation. B. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of attachment points before installing anchors and before pulling cables. C. Install the cable tray per the manufacturer's guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet the seismic requirements at the Project Site. 1. Do not use cable trays or tray supports to resist pulling forces unless approved in writing by the cable tray manufacturer. D. Grounding: 1. Bond metallic cable tray to the facility ground system using tin plated copper ground wire. 2. Bonding jumpers: a. On metallic tray, provide manufacturer-approved bonding jumpers on each side rail to maintain ground continuity across all: 1) Expansion joints. 2) Discontinuities. 3) Other connections that do not provide path continuity. 3. Use only plated lugs specifically designated for bonding cable and tray materials. 4. Provide all multi-conductor cables and all circuit groups of single conductor cables with an equipment-grounding conductor, size in accordance with Article 250 of NEC. Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project E. Expansion fittings: 1. Install at minimum 90 feet interval of straight runs oras • recommended by the manufacturer to accommodate thermal expansion. 2. Install where cable tray crosses building expansion joints. F. Fittings: 1. Not all fittings are indicated on the Drawings: a. Provide all fittings and supports required to suit the conditions. G. Cable tray supports: 1. Support cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2, manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Support bracket spacing to meet the requirements of NEMA VE 2 and the tray manufacturer: a. Maximum bracket spacing: 12 feet on center. 3. Length of individual tray sections shall be longer than the supportspan. 4. Trays may be suspended from the ceiling or cantilevered from walls. 5. Provide tray supports with channels under the entire width of tray. 6. Secure tray to supports with manufacturer-approved fittings. Do not weld tray to support. H. Install trays with minimum clearances of 2 inches from wall • surfaces and 12 inches from tray top to ceilings. I. Minimum vertical distance between stacked trays: 12 inches. J. Provide insulating bushings where cables drop out of solid bottom or trough-type trays. K. Provide curved dropouts where large cables drop out of ladder-type trays to prevent the bending radius from being less than the cable manufacturer's recommendations: 1. Same material and by the same manufacturer as the tray system. L. Other equipment supported from tray: 1. Use approved mounting accessories. 2. Support junction boxes and conduit systems for continuation of tray cables from cable tray: a. Provide insulated bushings. b. Provide conduit seals in exterior locations and where indicated on the Drawings. 3. Do not support other conduits or equipment from cable tray unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. • Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • M. Cable installation: 1. In accordance with the NEC. 2. Begin cable installation only after the complete cable tray system is installed. 3. Only install cables that are UL listed for cable tray use. 4. Tie cable to tray on vertical sections or where otherwise required: a. Use UV resistant nylon cable ties. b. Tie cables at intervals required by the NEC or recommended by cable manufacturer or as specified by this Specification. c. Put sharp ends of ties under cable tray rungs or where ties will not damage cable insulation. d. Group cables in tray by circuit type. e. Tie grouped cables with cable ties at approximately 3- foot intervals for vertical runs and at approximately 6- foot intervals for horizontal runs. f. Label cable groups to identify the circuit or control group by plan designation. 5. Single conductor power cables: a. 1/0 AWG and larger, listed for tray use and installed in a single layer as required by the NEC. b. Tie the phase conductors, neutral conductor (where • required), and equipment ground conductor for each parallel run of each circuit into a bundle at 3-foot intervals. c. Install bundles in a single layer and tie to tray at intervals not exceeding 6 feet for horizontal runs or 3 feet for vertical runs. 6. Multi-conductor power cables: a. Install cables with 4/0 and larger conductors in a single layer and tie to tray at intervals not exceeding 6 feet for horizontal runs or 3 feet for vertical runs. b. Smaller cables may be stacked, provided all requirements of the NEC are met: 1) Do not stack smaller cables on top of larger cables that are required to be installed in a single layer. Provide dividers, if necessary to keep them separate. N. Seal all open spaces inside and around cable tray where it penetrates building exterior walls or any fire-rated walls: 1. Provide sealing material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and all applicable codes and regulations. 2. As an alternative, terminate tray on both sides of penetration, and provide sleeves for cable to penetrate: a. Seal around cables in each sleeve. b. Provide at least 25 percent spare sleeves: • 1) Fill spare sleeves with sealing compound. Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project c. Provide manufacturer-approved bonding jumpers on • each side of wall, bonding the tray side rails through the penetration. O. Provide tray covers in exterior locations, under stairs and gratings, and where indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND CONSTRUCTION A. Special technique: 1. Install cable tray in a straight run as much as possible, minimizing the number of bends. 2. Maintain adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all cable tray runs to prevent exceeding the ambient rating of the cables. Provide minimum clearances as follows: a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Keep cable tray at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings, and 12 inches from fuel lines 111 and gas lines. d. Where it is necessary to route cable tray close to high- temperature surfaces, install a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the cable tray and the surface. B. Interface with other Work: 1. Coordinate routing of cable tray with piping, HVAC and structural tradesto avoid interferences. 2. Route cable tray around existing piping, HVAC, conduits, etc. to provide a complete installation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Inspect entire cable tray system for the following: 1. Secured anchoring. 2. Smooth surfaces and joints. 3. Burrs or sharp edges. 4. Proper supports. 5. Sufficient clearance from ducts, and piping, especially hot pipes. Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3.6 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.7 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 16131 Cable Trays Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16133 DUCT BANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Electrical underground duct banks. 2. Duct bank installation requirements. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty • of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup c. Section 02202, Trenching and Backfill. d. Section 02522, Concrete Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter. e. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. f. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. g. Section 03350, Concrete Finishing. h. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. i. Section 16130, Conduits. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide trenching, forming, rebar, spacers, conduit, concrete, backfill, • and compaction necessary for the complete installation of the duct banks. Clean Water Services 16133 Duct Banks Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. Provide reinforced concrete duct banks for all conduits installed below • grade, on the site, below structures, or in contact with the earth, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. PVC conduit spacers. 2. Detectable underground marking tape. 3. Pull line. C. Provide applicable submittal documents as specified in: 1. Section 02202, Trenching and Backfilling. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. D. Shop drawings: 1. Submit site plan drawings of duct banks including underground profiles indicating all underground utilities. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Field conditions and related requirements: 1. Underground water table may be near or above the location of new duct banks. 2. Include cost for necessary dewatering, and cleaning equipment to perform work in underground duct banks, pull boxes and manholes, before installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16133 Duct Banks Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.10 SYSTEM START-UP • A. As specified in Section p 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Conduit spacers: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Carlon Snap-Loc. b. Cantex. c. Osburn Associates, Inc. B. Detectable underground marking tape: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Blackburn Manufacturing Company. b. Pro-Line Safety Products. c. Panduit. C. Pull line: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Arnco. 411 b. Greenlee. c. Osburn Associates, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide conduit as specified in Section 16130, Conduits: 1. Use duct suitable for use with 90-degree Celsius rated conductors. B. Provide reinforcing steel as specified in Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement: 1. Provide minimum Number 4 reinforcing steel. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Conduit spacers: 1. Provide conduit spacers recommended by the conduit manufacturer or specified above. 2. Saddle type. 3. Non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-conductive. 4. Interlocking type: a. Vertical interlocking. • b. Horizontal interlocking. 5. Suitable for concrete encasement. Clean Water Services 16133 Duct Banks Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 6. Molded-in rebar holder. • 7. Accommodates 2-inch through 6-inch conduit sizes. 8. Relieves the conduit from both horizontal and vertical stresses. B. Pull line: 1. Minimum 1/4-inch wide, flat design. 2. Polyester. 3. Minimum pulling strength 1,200 pounds. 4. Sequential footage markings. C. Detectable marking tape: 1. Provide a detectable tape, locatable by a cable or metal detector from above the undisturbed grade. 2. Aluminum core laminated between polyethylene film. 3. Six-inch wide red tape imprinted with black lettering "CAUTION - BURIED ELECTRIC UTILITIES." 2.04 MIXES A. Concrete mix requirements as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in- Place Concrete. B. Provide a red-oxide conduit encasement coloring agent as specified in Section 03350, Concrete Finishing. • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Duct banks: 1. Install duct banks encased in concrete to ensure the top of the ductbank is at least 24 inches below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Damage minimization: a. Conduit should not be left exposed in an open trench longer than is necessary. b. Protect all underground duct banks against damage during pouring of concrete or backfilling. 3. All plastic conduit fittings to be joined should be exposed to the same temperature conditions for a reasonable length of time before assembly. 4. Provide No. 4/0 American Wire Gauge bare copper ground wire the entire length of duct bank and bond to the grounding system and every 20 feet to steel reinforcing bar. • Clean Water Services 16133 Duct Banks Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 5. Install underground ducts to be self-draining: a. Slope duct banks away from buildings to manholes. b. Slope duct banks uniformly from manholes to pull boxes or both ways from high points between manholes. c. Slope a minimum of 1/4 inch per 10 feet. 6. Where new duct banks join to existing manholes make the proper fittings and fabricate the concrete envelopes to ensure smooth durable transitions, as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Install pull line in spare conduits: a. Provide adequate pull line at both ends of conduits to facilitate conductor pulling. b. Cap above ground spare conduit risers at each end with screw-on conduit caps. C. Trenching: 1. Perform trenching as specified in Section 02202, Trenching and Backfilling. 2. Trench must be uniformly graded with the bottom, rock free and covered with select material. 3. Whenever possible, use the walls of the trench as forms for concrete encasement: a. Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting. 4. Avoid damaging existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other 41) utilities. D. Duct spacing: 1. Separate conduits with manufactured plastic spacers using a minimum space between the outside surfaces of adjacent conduits of 1.5 inches: a. Separate medium voltage ducts a minimum of 7.5 inches on center. 2. Install spacers to maintain uniform spacing of duct assembly a minimum of 4 inches above the bottom of the trench during concrete pour. Install spacers on 8-foot maximum intervals: a. Due to some distortion of conduit from heat, and other means, it may be necessary to install extra spacers within the duct bank: 1) Install the intermediate set of spacers within normal required spacing to maintain the proper horizontal clearance: a) Clearance is required to allow the proper amount of concrete to infiltrate vertically among the duct to ensure proper protection. 3. Spacers shall not be located at the center of a bend: a. Locate spacer in the tangent, free of the coupling on IIIfabricated bends. Clean Water Services 16133 Duct Banks Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project b. Locate spacers midway between the tangent and the center • bend on trench formed sweeps. E. Terminating: 1. Use bell ends in duct at entrances into cable vaults. 2. Make conduit entrances into cable vaults tangential to walls of cable vault. 3. Form trapezoidal transitions between duct bank and cable vaults as needed in order to ensure adequate cable bending radius for the duct bank-to-vault transition. 4. New manhole or handhole applications, provide a single opening or "window" per duct bank, sized to accommodate the duct bank envelope. F. Concrete: 1. Install concrete as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Provide nonferrous tie wires to prevent displacement of the conduits during pouring of concrete: a. Tie wire shall not act as a substitute for spacers. 3. Install minimum 3-inch cover around conduit and rebar. 4. Consolidation of encasement concrete around duct banks shall be by hand pudding, with no mechanical vibration. 5. Conduit is subject to temperature rise. As concrete cures, allow • the free end to expand by pouring the concrete from the center of the run or from one tie in point. G. Marking tape: 1. Install a detectable marking tape 12 inches above the duct bank the entire length of the duct bank. H. For conduit installations beneath building slabs: 1. Install steel reinforced concrete duct banks under all building slabs as indicated on the Drawings: a. Concrete for encasement under building slabs need not be colored red. b. For duct banks crossing under building footers or foundations, install the top of the duct bank a minimum of 12 inches below the footer. c. Where duct banks enter through building walls, foundation walls, stem walls, etc. make connections as indicated on the Drawings. d. Where duct banks terminate with conduit risers entering building walls, install an expansion/deflection fitting or a flat- wise elbow (elbow parallel to building wall) in order to accommodate differential movement between the conduits • and structure. Clean Water Services 16133 Duct Banks Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • I. Restore all surfaces to their original condition as specified in Section 02522, Concrete Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter, unless otherwise specified. J. Marking piers: 1. Provide permanent concrete cylinder marking piers, on grade, centered on duct bank and located at every bend in duct bank or wherever duct bank enters a building, vault, or other structure: a. Provide a cylinder, 6 inches in diameter: 1) Top of cylinder 1/2 inch below the top of finished grade. b. Provide a 3-inch high "E" embossed in top of cylinder: 1) Minimum of 2 inches deep. c. Provide 2-inch arrows embossed in top of cylinder showing the direction of the duct bank: 1) Minimum of 2 inches deep. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean conduits of dirt and debris by use of an appropriately sized steel mandrel no less than 1/2 inch smaller than the inside diameter of the • conduit. 3.04 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Provide shoring and pumping to protect the excavation and safety of workers. C. Protect excavations with barricades as required by applicable safety regulations. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16133 Duct Banks Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16134 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Device boxes. 2. Raceway system boxes. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies • accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. D 149 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. 3. D 495 - Standard Test Method for High-Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation. 4. D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 5. D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. 6. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 7. D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Joint Industry Conference (JIC). • D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions: 1. Arcing parts: Circuit breakers, motor controllers, switches, fuses, or any device intended to interrupt current during its operation. 2. Raceway system boxes: Boxes that are used for wire and cable pullboxes, conduit junction boxes, or terminal boxes. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide outlet boxes for devices such as switches, receptacles, telephone and computer jacks, security systems, junction, and pullboxes for use in the raceway systems, etc. B. Provide boxes and conduit bodies as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to complete the raceway installation. • 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Materials. 3. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. d. Weight. e. NEMA rating. 4. Conduit entry locations. 5. Catalog cut sheets. 6. Installation instructions. C. Shop drawings: 1. Include identification and sizes of pull boxes. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Outlet boxes shall comply with all applicable standards of: a. JIC. b. NEC. c. NEMA. d. UL. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 WARRANTY • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.11 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Pressed steel boxes: a. Steel City. b. Appleton. c. Crouse - Hinds. d. Thomas & Betts. 2. Plastic coated steel boxes: a. Rob Roy. b. OCAL. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 3. Formed steel enclosures: • a. Hoffman. b. Thomas and Betts. c. Stahlin. d. Rittal. 4. Stainless steel enclosures: a. Hoffman. b. Stahlin. c. Rittal. 5. Pressed steel boxes and concrete boxes: a. Appleton. b. Steel City. c. Cooper/Crouse Hinds. d. OZ Gedney. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Pressed steel boxes: 1. One-piece galvanized pressed steel. 2. Knockout type boxes. 3. Minimum size 4-inch square by 2-1/8-inch deep. B. Concrete boxes: 1. For outlets and pull boxes in concrete construction. • 2. Pressed steel or cast construction, concrete tight. 3. Knockout sizes range from 1/2 inch to 1 inch. 4. Depth as needed. 5. Types: a. Four-inch octagon. b. Four-inch octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars. c. Gangable masonry boxes: 1) 3-1/2-inch deep, 3-3/4-inch high, length as required: 2) With partitions as needed. C. Cast device boxes: 1. Construction: a. With internal green ground screw. b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch. e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing. 2. Malleable iron boxes: a. Conforming to ASTM A 47 Grade 32510. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • D. Plastic coated device boxes: 1. Construction: a. With internal green ground screw. b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch. e. Double coated with a nominal 0.002-inch (2 mil) urethane on both the interior and exterior before application of PVC coating. f. With a minimum 0.040-inch (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior. g. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit. E. Class I Division 1 areas: 1. Provide boxes designed and listed for Class I Division 1 locations and group type atmosphere in which they will be used: a. The approval ratings must be permanently marked on each item. F. Class I, Division 2 areas: 1. For boxes not containing arcing parts: a. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for • Electrical. b. Pressed metal boxes are not allowed. 2. For boxes containing arching parts provide: a. Boxes designed and listed for Class I Division 1 locations and group type atmosphere in which they will be used: 1) The approval ratings must be permanently marked on each item. 3. Cast iron box and cover. 4. Precision machined flame path between box and cover with neoprene 0-ring. 5. Bolt-on stainless steel slotted mounting feet for horizontal or vertical mounting. 6. For applications requiring hinged cover, provide flexible hinge mounting either left or right side. 7. External flange. 8. Provisions for mounting pan. 9. Ground lug. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project G. Formed steel enclosures: • 1. Steel: a. NEMA Type 12. b. Fabricated from 14-gauge steel, minimum. c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth. d. Door: 1) Rolled lip around 3 sides. 2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin. e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight, dusttight, oiltight seal: 1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip. f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from zinc-plated heavy gauge steel: 1) With a three-point latching system for padlocking. g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. h. No holes or knockouts. i. Finish: 1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and out over cleaned and primed surfaces. • 2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate. j. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted. 2. Stainless steel: a. NEMA Type 4X: 1) Boxes in locations subject to flooding or temporary submersion: a) NEMA Type 6. b. Fabricated from 14-gauge Type 316 stainless steel. c. All seams continuously welded. d. Door: 1) Rolled lip around 3 sides. 2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin. e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal: 1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip. f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from heavy gauge stainless steel: 1) With a three-point latching system for padlocking. g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project h. No holes or knockouts. • i. Finish: 1) Brushed. j. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted. H. Cast iron junction boxes: 1. NEMA Type 4. 2. Recessed cover boxes. 3. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water. 4. Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors: a. Can be surface mounted using mounting lugs. 5. Construction: a. Cast iron box. b. Covers: 1) Checkered plate covers suitable for foot traffic. 2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading. c. Hot dip galvanized. d. Neoprene gasket. e. Stainless steel screw covers. • 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices. 2. Screws, nuts, bolts, and other threaded fasteners: a. Stainless steel. B. Provide breather and drain fittings where appropriate. C. Internal panels: 1. Provide internal panels where required for mounting of terminal strips or other equipment. 2. With plated steel shoulder studs. 3. Steel with white polyester powder finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. General: • 1. Provide materials and construction suitable for environmental conditions at the location of the box as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Provide outlet box materials to match the conduit system: a. GRC - Cast ferrous boxes. b. PCS - PVC coated cast ferrous boxes. c. PVC - PVC boxes. 3. Solid type gang boxes: a. For more than 2 devices. b. For barriered outlets. 4. Support all wall mounted NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X boxes to maintain a minimum of 7/8-inch free air space between the back of the enclosure and the wall: a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not acceptable. b. Use stainless steel or nylon materials for spacers. 5. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices. 6. Boxes serving luminaires or devices: a. Use as pull boxes wherever possible. 7. In finished areas: a. Provide specific pull or junction boxes only as indicated on • the Drawings or as directed. 8. Fit all cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush mounting in concrete with cast, malleable box covers and gaskets. 9. In terminal boxes, furnish terminals as indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum of 50 percent spare terminals: a. Furnish wireways for discrete and analog/DC wiring. b. Separate analog wiring from 120 V discrete or power wiring. 10. Size boxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for the future components and cables indicated on the Drawings. 11. For fire-rated construction, provide materials and installation for use in accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction. • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • C. Outlet boxes: 1. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings: a. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other trades. 2. Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes: a. In hazardous areas. b. Where exposed to the weather. c. In unheated areas. d. Where subject to mechanical damage: 1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor. e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system. f. Accommodate wiring devices. 3. Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and NEMA Type 4X area and when the conduit system is PVC coated steel. 4. Outlet boxes may be used as junction boxes wherever possible. D. Pull boxes and junction boxes: 1. Size pull boxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for any future conduits and cables as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted. • E. For boxes not indicated: 1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be consistent with the conduit system and environmental conditions as indicated in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose locations: a. One-piece, galvanized, pressed steel. 3. Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete: a. Deep, galvanized, pressed steel. 4. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed locations: a. Cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc, or cadmium plating finish. 5. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive locations: a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic coated steel to match the conduit system. b. Furnished with mounting lugs. 6. Other fire rated construction: Use materials and methods to comply with the listing requirements for the classified construction. Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project F. Hazardous locations: 1. All metallic boxes, fittings, and joints shall utilize threaded • connections to the conduit system. 2. All threaded connections shall be wrench tightened so that at least 5 threads are fully engaged. 3. Conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes in Class I Division 2 areas shall utilize approved grounding bushings to bond the conduits together. 4. Provide the following types of conduit bodies and boxes: a. Malleable iron bodies and boxes with GRC or IMC conduit systems. b. PVC coated conduit bodies and boxes with PCS conduit systems. c. Aluminum conduit bodies and boxes with ARC conduit systems. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.03 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.04 PROTECTION • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16134 Boxes Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Plates. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section.This list of related sections is provided for convenience • only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01756, Testing and Facility Startup. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. W-C 596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification. 2. W-S 896/2 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification). C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems, Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 3. OS1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. 4. WD6 -Wiring Devices Dimensional Specifications. • Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): • 1. 20 - General Use Snap Switches. 2. 498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 3. 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices. 4. 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. 5. 1472 - Solid State Dimming Controls. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions: 1. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupter. 2. P-S: Pass and Seymour. 3. Cooper: Cooper Wiring Devices, a division of Cooper Industries. 4. T&B: Thomas and Betts. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Switches, receptacles, and plates as indicated on the Drawings wired and operable to form a complete system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal • Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. C. Shop drawings: 1. Engraving schedule: a. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Wiring devices shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.09 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Switches: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Hubbell. b. Leviton. c. Cooper. 2. Switches for hazardous areas: One of the following or equal: a. Appleton. b. Crouse-Hinds. 3. Occupancy Sensor Switches: The following or equal: a. WattStopper. II! b. Cooper. 4. Dimmer switches: The following or equal: a. Lutron. b. Cooper. B. Receptacles: 1. General purpose receptacles: One of the following or equal: a. Hubbell. b. Leviton. c. Cooper. 2. Receptacles for hazardous areas: One of the following or equal: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. 3. 480-Volt, 3-phase receptacles: One of the following or equal: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Hubbell. c. RussellstolTM • Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Plates: • 1. General location: The following or equal: a. Pass and Seymour. b. Cooper Wiring Devices. 2. Wet or corrosive areas: One of the following or equal: a. Hubbell. b. Cooper Wiring Devices. c. Thomas & Betts. d. Pass and Seymour. 3. In-use covers: One of the following or equal: a. TayMac. b. Cooper Wiring Devices. c. Pass and Seymour. d. Thomas & Betts. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Switches: 1. General: a. 120-277 VAC. b. 20 ampere. c. Listed in accordance with UL 20. d. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-S- 896/2. e. Back and side wired unless otherwise indicated. f. Integral grounding terminal. g. Totally enclosed: 1) Color-coded body with color corresponding to ampere rating. h. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper operation. i. Color: 1) Ivory in finished areas. 2) Brown in all other areas. 2. General purpose switches: a. Toggle type. 3. Switches for office areas: a. Rocker type. b. Rectangular. 4. Switches for use with photocell: a. Maintained contact. b. Two circuit. c. Three position: 1) Center off. • Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 5. Switches for hazardous areas: a. Suitable for use in Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations. b. Factory sealed. c. Through-feed or dead-end as required. 6. Occupancy sensor switches: a. Wall switch with dual-technology passive infrared and ultrasonic sensor. 1) Configured such that lights turn on only when both infrared and ultrasonic sensors detect activity, but do not turn off as long as either sensor detects activity. b. Selectable "automatic-on" mode activated by sensors or "manual-on" mode activated by pushbutton. c. Adjustable 5-30 minute time delay. d. Selectable audible alert as a warning before lights turn off. e. Rated for fluorescent lighting loads of up to 800W. f. True multi-way switching allowing identical controls at any location for multi-way switching applications. 7. Dimmer switches: a. Shall be rectangular design with LED light level indicators. b. Suitable for use with type of lamp switched. B. Receptacles: 1. General purpose receptacles: • a. Single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings. b. 125 VAC. c. 20 ampere or as indicated on the Drawings. d. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration for 20 ampere receptacles. e. Other NEMA configurations as indicated on the Drawings. f. Listed in accordance with UL 498. g. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-C-596. h. Back and side wired. i. One-piece, rivet-less mounting strap. j. Color: 1) Ivory in finished areas. 2) Brown in all other areas. 3) Orange when powered by a UPS. 2. Ground fault interrupter receptacles (GFCI): a. 125 VAC. b. 20 ampere. c. Trip level 4-6 milliampere. d. Individual and feed through protection. e. UL 943 and UL 498 listed. f. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration. g. For damp or wet locations: 1) Weather resistant, in accordance with UL 498. • Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Plates: • 1. General location: a. Type 302 or 304 stainless steel. b. Brushed satin finish. c. Minimum thickness: 0.032 inches. d. Rectangular or square shape. e. Engraving: 1) Engrave each switch plate with the following: a) Area served. b) Circuit number. 2) Engrave each receptacle plate with the following: a) Circuit number. 3) Treat engraving to improve visibility and, except for stainless steel plates, to prevent corrosion. 4) Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a minimum character height of 1/8-inch. f. Coordinate the number of gangs, number, and type of openings with the specific location. 2. Outdoor and wet areas requiring NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X enclosures: a. General: 1) UL listed for wet locations. 2) Gasketed. • 3) Die cast metal: a) Match material to box material. b. Switches: 1) Lever operated: a) Provide toggle switch. c. Receptacles: 1) Weather proof in-use cover: a) Die cast metal construction with electrostatic powder coating for corrosion resistance. b) Gasketed. c) Lockable. d) UL listed and in accordance with NEC. 3. Corrosive areas: a. Neoprene. b. Gasketed. c. Weatherproof. D. Data and communications jacks: 1. Process network jacks - panel/enclosure mounted: a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA Type 4 rating (with closure cap). b. Mounting of network jacks in control panels shall be accomplished using bulkhead connectors and environmental • Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • enclosure caps, which are permanently attached to the bulkhead fitting. c. Network jacks shall have RJ-45 connections on both sides of connector (bulkhead pass through) allowing for direct connection to the network switch and computer with standard patch cords. No punch down PC board connections shall be allowed. d. Manufactured by Woodhead Connectivity RJLNXX. 2. Process network jacks - conduit body mounted: a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA Type 4 rating (with closure cap). b. Mounting of network jacks in conduit bodies adapter (with minifast connector) shall be accomplished using conduit body insert and environmental enclosure caps. c. PC board connections are not to be allowed. d. Furnish 10 RJ-45 to minifast connector patch cable 3 feet in length. e. Manufactured by InterlinkBT RSS series. 3. Network/phone jacks: a. Network jacks located in computer rooms shall be installed per the installation details indicated on the Drawings. b. Standard Decora wall plates shall be used with QuickPort • modules and inserts. c. Plugs shall be color coded as indicated in the installation details indicated on the Drawings. E. Manufactured by Leviton Quickport series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Mounting heights: 1. Process and production areas: a. Switches and receptacles 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate. 2. Offices and finished areas: a. Switches: 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate. b. Receptacles: 18 inches from finished floor to center of plate. 411/ Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Receptacles: 1. Provide GFCI receptacles as indicated on the Drawings. • a. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles in all wet or damp areas. 1) As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Mount non-weatherproof receptacles vertically: a. Ground slot down. 3. Mount weatherproof receptacles horizontally: a. Neutral slot up. 4. 3-phase receptacles shall be consistent with respect to phase connection at the receptacle terminals. Correct errors in phasing at the source and not the receptacle. D. Ensure all plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices: 1. Outside edges of plates parallel with building lines. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • B. Demonstrate the following to the Engineer and Owner: 1. All circuits conform to the panel schedules. 2. All ground fault receptacles operate at levels below or equal to OSHA maximum allowable fault levels. 3.04 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16140 Wiring Devices Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16150 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Wire connecting devices. 2. Terminations. 3. Splices. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01756, Testing and Facility Startup. 3. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 16123, 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D3005 — Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape. C. CSA International (CSA): 1. C22.2 - No.197-M1983 (R2208) - PVC Insulating Tape. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 510 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a complete wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used. • Clean Water Services 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal • Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Installation instructions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. All materials shall be UL listed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • 1.10 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers for each type of technology are specified with the equipment in this Section. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Control connections: 1. Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals: a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry. b. Deep internal serrations. c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased insulator-barrel surface area to ensure that the • insulator remains in contact with the barrel. Clean Water Services 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project d. Electroplated-tin copper conductor. • e. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) Thomas and Betts, Stakon. 2. For process equipment connections work from manufacturer's drawings. B. Joints, splices, taps, and connections: 1. 600-volt conductors: a. Use solderless connectors. b. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs: 1) Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors. c. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be specifically designed for that purpose. d. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller use compression splice caps, with insulating caps: 1) Manufacturer: The following or equal: a) Ideal: Winged wire connectors e. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression connectors: 1) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: • a) Burndy. b) Thomas and Betts. f. Heat shrink tubing: 1) Suitable for indoors, outdoors, overhead, direct burial or submerged applications. 2) Minimum shrink ratio: 4 to 1. 3) Continuous operating temperature: -55 degrees Celsius to 110 degrees Celsius. 4) Internally applied adhesive sealant. 5) Cross-linked polyolefin: a) Manufacturers, one of the following or equal: (1) 3M ITCSN. (2) Thomas & Betts Shrink-Kon. g. Splices shall not be permitted for 600 volt circuits. 2. 120-volt conductors a. Splices shall be permitted in 120 volt light and receptacle circuits. 3. Instrumentation class cable splices: a. Splices shall not be permitted for control circuits. b. Suitable for indoor, outdoors, weather exposed, direct buried, or submersed applications. c. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re-enterable compounds. Clean Water Services 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project d. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber- • jacketed, signal, control, and power cables rated up to 1 kilovolt. e. Two-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer webbing. f. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) 3M - Scotchcast 72-N. C. Insulating tape: 1. General purpose insulating tape: a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application in an ambient of-18 degrees Celsius (0 degrees Fahrenheit). c. Operating range up to 105 degrees Celsius (220 degrees Fahrenheit). d. Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant. e. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC. f. Meeting and complying with: 1) ASTM D3005 Type I. 2) UL 510. 3) CSA C22.2. g. Manufacturer: The following or equal: • 1) 3M - Scotch Number Super 33+. 2. General-purpose color-coding tape: a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables. c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures. d. Available with the following colors: 1) Red. 2) Yellow. 3) Blue. 4) Brown. 5) Gray. 6) White. 7) Green. 8) Orange. 9) Violet. e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing. f. Meeting and complying with: 1) UL 510. 2) CSA C22.2. Clean Water Services 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • g. Manufacturer the following or equal: 1) 3M - Scotch Number 35. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Load connections: 1. Connect loads to the circuits as indicated. Color-code all branch circuits as specified in Section 16123, 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables. C. Zero to 600-volt systems: 1. Make all connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device manufacturer. 2. Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer. 3. Insulate all connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or pre-molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps. • 4. Number all power and control wires before termination. D. Motor connections (600 volts and below): 1. Terminate wires with compression type ring lugs at motors. 2. Connection at both the motor leads and the machine wires shall have ring type compression lugs. 3. Cover bolted connectors with a heat shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin material formed as a single opening boot: a. In damp and wet locations, use a complete kit containing mastic that shall seal out moisture and contamination. b. Shrink cap with low heat as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Wire markers shall be readable after boot installation. 5. Manufacturer: The following or equal: a. Raychem MCK. 3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 3.04 PROTECTION • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 16150 Low Voltage Wire Connections Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16222 LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage motors up to 500 horsepower: a. Furnished separately. b. Part of driven equipment specified in other sections. c. Other electric motors required for a complete installation. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this • Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. c. Section 01612, Anchorage and Bracing. d. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. e. Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 670 - Vibration, Axial Position, and Bearing Temperature Monitoring Systems. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 D. ASTM International (ASTM). • 1. B-117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 2. 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 3. 114 - Standard Test Procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors. 4. 303 - Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Rotating Electrical Machines in Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 Locations. 5. 841 - Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry-Premium- Efficiency, Severe Duty, Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 370 kW (500 hp). 6. 1349 - Guide for Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. F. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): 1. MG-1 - Motors and Generators. 2. MG-2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Use of Electric Motors and Generators. • G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 674 - Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install electric motors and accessories as specified in this Section and the Sections specifying driven equipment to provide a complete and operable installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Submit completed motor data sheets for each motor supplied: 1. Conform to data sheet in the appendix of this Section. 2. Manufacturer's or other data sheets are not acceptable. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • C. Product data: 1. Descriptive bulletins. 2. Machine tag and loop number as indicated on the Drawings and in the specification section number of the driven machine. 3. Complete electrical data. a. Rated size of motor, hp and service factor b. Efficiency at full, % and 1/2 load. c. Full load current d. Locked rotor current 4. Temperature rise and insulation rating 5. Type of bearing and method of lubrication 6. Torque, current, and power factor vs. speed curves: a. At 100 percent rated voltage for all full voltage started and VFD driven motors. b. For motors on reduced voltage start at 70, 80, 90, and 100 percent rated voltage. 7. Additional data for motors installed in classified areas: a. Temperature code. b. Hazardous area approval indicating Class, Division and Group: 1) For motors driven by variable frequency drives, provide manufacturer's certification that the motor is suitable for operation in the hazardous area when driven by a • variable frequency drive. 8. Accessories data: a. Motor winding heaters: 1) Voltage. 2) Watts. 9. Mechanical data: a. Bearing design and bearing life calculations. b. Resonant frequencies for all VFD-driven motors 50 horsepower or greater. 10. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. D. Shop drawings: 1. Motor weight. 2. Frame size. 3. Conduit box(es), size(s), and location(s). 4. Outline drawings with dimensions. 5. Installation details for the project seismic criteria. E. Test reports: 1. Factory test reports with test reference standard identified. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 F. Certification: • 1. When motors are driven by variable speed drive systems, submit certification that selected motor: a. Is capable of satisfactory performance under the intended load. b. Meets the requirements of the latest edition of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. c. Is matched to the type of variable frequency drive specified. G. Calculations: 1. Where site conditions specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical exceed manufacturer's ratings, provide derating calculations for each motor. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. No spare parts are required. 1.07 SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. • 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Motors 200 hp and larger: 1. Rotate shaft 90 degrees once per month. 1.10 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Baldor-Reliance 2. Marathon 3. WEG 4. US Motors. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. 3-phase induction motors - general: 1. Voltage: a. All motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be rated 460 V, 3 phase unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Dual voltage motors rated 230/460 V, 3 phase are acceptable provided all leads are brought to the conduit box. 2. Motors driving identical machines shall be identical. 3. All motors greater than 1 hp and up to 500 hp shall meet the "NEMA Premium Efficiency" percent listed in NEMA MG-1. 4. Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings: a. Horsepower ratings indicated on the Drawings are based on • vendor's estimates. Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment furnished without operating in the service factor. 5. Service factor: a. 1.15 service factor on sine wave power. b. 1.0 when driven by VFD. 6. Torque: a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed at voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating. b. When started using reduced voltage starters: 1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed. c. NEMA Design B except where driven load characteristics require other than normal starting torque: 1) In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the values specified in NEMA MG-1. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 7. Enclosures: • a. As specified in the individual equipment Specifications or in this Section. b. Totally enclosed fan cooled: 1) Cast iron conduit box. 2) Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames 286 and smaller, and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324 and larger. c. Explosion-proof: 1) Tapped drain holes with corrosion resistant plugs for frames 286 and smaller and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324 and larger. d. Lifting devices: All motors weighing 265 pounds (120 kilograms) or more shall have suitable lifting devices for installation and removal. 8. Manufactured with cast iron frames in accordance with NEMA MG-1 or manufacturer's standard material for the specified rating. 9. Nameplates: a. Provide all motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly stamped or engraved with: 1) NEMA standard motor data. a) Indicate compliance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors. • 2) AFBMA bearing numbers and lubrication instructions. 10. Hardware: a. Type 316 stainless steel. 11. Conduit boxes: a. Cast iron or stamped steel. b. Split from top to bottom. c. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces: 1) Frames and conduit boxes. 2) Conduit boxes and box covers. d. Rotatable through 360 degrees in 90-degree increments. 1) Where available based on the size of the conduit box. e. Exceeding the dimensions defined in NEMA MG-1. The main conduit box shall be oversized at least one size larger than NEMA standard. The main conduit box shall be sized for all indicated accessory leads. Motors furnished in NEMA 320 frame series and larger shall have conduit boxes designed and constructed to permit motor removal after installation without disconnecting raceways. f. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding. 111 Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 12. Motor bearings: a. Antifriction. b. Oil-mist lubrication type for all applicable motors above 10 hp. Bearing mounting shall be designed to prevent entrance of lubricant into the motor enclosure. c. Where oil-mist lubrication is not possible, regreasable type lubrication and initially filled with grease for horizontal motors, vertical motors per manufacturer's standard design. 1) Provide permanently sealed bearings for motors 10 hp and below. d. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and temperature rise. e. Suitable for intended application and have ABMA L-10 rating life of 60,000 hours or more. f. Fit bearings with easily accessible lubricant supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings using extension tubes where necessary. g. Where specified in the equipment Specifications, provide split-sleeve type hydrodynamic radial bearings. Provide a bearing isolator to protect bearings from contaminants. 13. Insulation systems: a. Motors installed in ambient temperatures 40 degrees Celsius or less: • 1) Provide Class F insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed. b. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 40 degrees Celsius and 50 degrees Celsius: 1) Provide Class F insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 50 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed. c. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 50 degrees Celsius and 65 degrees Celsius: 1) Provide Class H insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class F insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 65 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motors will be installed. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 14. Motor leads: • a. Insulated leads with non-wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F insulation. b. All motors rated 100 horsepower and larger, and all vertical motors shall have the direction of rotation marked by an arrow mounted visibly on the stator frame near the terminal housing, or on the nameplate, and the leads marked for phase sequence T1, T2, T3, to correspond to the direction of rotation and supply voltage sequence. Leads for dual-voltage rated or for multispeed motors shall be easily connected or reconnected in the main conduit box for the operating voltage or for the specified speeds. Permanent instructions for making these connections shall be furnished inside the main conduit box or on the motor frame or nameplate. 15. Noise: a. Maximum operating noise level in accordance with NEMA MG-1. B. Vertical motors: 1. Enclosures: a. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) for motors 200 horsepower and less installed outdoors. b. Weather protected Type II (WPII) for motors greater than 200 horsepower installed outdoors. • c. Weather protected Type I (WPI) where installed indoors. 2. Thrust bearings: a. Selected for combined rotor and driven equipment loads. b. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier for maximum vertical thrust of driven equipment. 3. Anti-reverse ratchet. C. Motors driven by variable frequency drives: 1. Compatible with the variable frequency drives specified. 2. Inverter duty rated and labeled. 3. Meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. 4. Winding insulation meets the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.4.4.2. 5. Capable of running continuously at 1/10th of full speed, with no harmful effects or overheating. 6. Shaft grounding ring: a. Provide a shaft grounding ring for each VFD driven motor. b. Aluminum frame and internal components. c. Conductive microfiber brushes. d. Maintenance free design. e. Aegis Bearing Protection ring as manufactured by Electro Static Technology or equal. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 7. On motors over 100 HP, provide insulated bearings on bearings • on both ends of the motor or on the end opposite of the shaft ground ring as recommended by the motor manufacturer. 8. In addition to the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, motors shall be designed to be continually pulsed at the motor terminals with a voltage of 1600 volts ac. D. Motors installed in hazardous locations: 1. Class I, Division 1 or Class II, Division 1 areas: a. Enclosures: 1) Explosion proof for 3-phase motors. 2) UL listed in conformance with UL-674. 3) UL approval with nameplate and serial number. 2. Other hazardous areas: a. Enclosures: 1) TEFC for motors in Class I, Division 2 areas. 2) Vertical motors as specified herein. 3) Hazardous area and temperature code approval stamped on nameplate. 3. Single phase motors: Explosion proof motor enclosure. E. Motors installed in corrosive environments: 1. Nameplate indicating conformance to IEEE 841. • 2. Stator double dipped in varnish and baked. 3. Stator and rotor coated with corrosion resistant epoxy. 4. Frame, brackets, fan guard and conduit box coated with minimum of 2 coats of epoxy paint. 5. Withstand salt spray tests in accordance with ASTM B-117. 6. Suitable for hose down areas. F. Single phase motors: 1. Capacitor start type rated for operation at 115 volts, 60 hertz, unless otherwise specified or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors manufactured in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Ball bearings: Sealed. 4. 1/2 horsepower or less fan motors: a. Split-phase or shaded pole type when standard for the equipment. b. Open type when suitably protected from moisture, dripping water, and lint accumulation. 5. Wound rotor or commutator type single-phase motors only when their specific characteristics are necessary for application and their use is acceptable to the Engineer. 6. Integral overload protection. • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.03 ACCESSORIES • A. Motor winding heaters: 1. Outdoor motors only. 2. Provide all 3 phase motors with belted or cartridge space heaters mounted within the motor enclosure. 3. Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 4. Power leads for heaters wired into conduit box. 5. Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory testing: 1. Motors less than 250 horsepower: a. Perform manufacturer's standard production tests including but not limited to: 1) No load current. 2) High potential test. 3) Winding resistance. b. Furnish copies of standard test reports on prototype or identical units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Before start-up, perform insulation resistance test on each motor furnished or installed on this project: 1. Windings energized to 1,000 volts DC for 1 minute. 2. Resistance measured at the end of the test, recorded, and submitted to the Engineer for review. 3. Inform the Engineer of any unusual or unacceptable test results. 4. This test is in addition to the acceptance tests in Section 16950, Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 3.03 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16222 Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • MOTOR DATA SHEET MOTOR/EQUIPMENT TAG MOTOR NUMBER SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA MANUFACTURER MODEL/SERIES MODEL NO. FRAME ENCLOSURE NEMA DESIGN HP SERVICE FACTOR RPM INSULATION CLASS VOLTS FULL LOAD AMPS AMBIENT TEMP PHASE NO LOAD AMPS DESIGN TEMP RISE HERTZ LOCK ROTOR AMPS INRUSH CODE LETTER 100%LOAD 75%LOAD 50%LOAD GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES: GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER FACTOR: MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: KVAR • ACCESSORIES MOTOR WINDING HEATER VOLTS WATTS WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION WINDING TEMP SWITCHES(YES/NO) RTD: TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE #OF WIRES NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT RECOMMENDED DEGREES RECOMMENDED DEGREES ALARM CELSIUS TRIP CELSIUS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS INVERTER DUTY*(YES/NO) PART WINDING(YES/NO) WYE-DELTA(YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING(YES/NO) 2 SPEED,2 WINDING(YES/NO) AREA CLASSIFICATION: CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE *Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31. • Clean Water Services 16222-Data Sheet Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16262 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 0.50 — 50 HORSEPOWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Variable frequency drives (VFD) 0.5 to 50 horsepower for control of NEMA Design B squirrel cage induction motors installed in: a. Standalone enclosures. b. Motor control centers. c. Vendor furnished equipment. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in • this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16282, Active Harmonic Filter Equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. 9001 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements. C. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. 508C - Power Conversion Equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions: 1111 1. Point of common coupling: the point of common coupling for all harmonic calculation and field Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 measurements for both voltage and current distortions • is defined as the closest directly connected panelboard or motor control center bus supplying power to the VFD. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Each VFD system consists of all components required to meet the performance, protection, safety, testing, and certification criteria of this Section. 2. The VFD system: a. Is a fully integrated package. b. Includes all material necessary to interconnect all VFD system elements, even if shipped separately. B. Any modifications to a standard product necessary to meet this Section shall be made only by the VFD manufacturer: 1. Each VFD shall be completely factory pre-wired, assembled, and then tested as a complete system by the VFD manufacturer to ensure a properly coordinated, fully integrated drive system. 2. The VFD shall be capable of operating standard NEMA Design B motors. It is the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the drive will not damage motor insulation due to • high carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt or other drive electrical characteristics based upon the installed conditions: a. Provide equipment necessary to mitigate potential damage to motor insulation. C. Performance: 1. Operating envelope: a. Speed and torque requirements: 1) Provide a constant torque VFD regardless of the driven load. 2) The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable alternating voltage/frequency output to provide continuous operation over the 40 to 200 percent (25 to 120 hertz) speed range. b. Current requirements: 1) Full rated current output on a continuous basis. 2) Constant torque VFD: a) Minimum 150 percent current overload for 1 minute. b) Minimum continuous rating of 1.16% of motor nameplate full load current. • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2. Minimum VFD system efficiency: a. Ninety-six percent. b. VFD system efficiency shall be calculated as follows: Power (Load) Efficiency (%) = x 100 Power (Supply) Power (Load) is the total power measured at the output terminals of the drive system, including VFD, output filters or transformers. Power(Supply) is the total power measured at the input terminals of the VFD including input filters, line reactors, isolation transformers, harmonic distortion attenuation equipment and auxiliary equipment (e.g., controls, fans) for complete system operation. 3. Total power factor: a. Minimum of 0.96 lagging across the entire speed range. b. At no speed shall the VFD have a leading power factor. 4. Frequency accuracy: a. Minimum of within 0.01 percent. 5. Speed regulation: a. Minimum of within 0.5 percent across the entire speed range. 6. VFD shall be compatible with and operate seamlessly with • Active Harmonic Filtering Equipment performance requirements specified under Section 16282, Active Harmonic Filter Equipment. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section16050, Common Work Results for Electrical: 1. Custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer and specific for the equipment furnished. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of the VFD. 2. Manufacturer of all components of the VFD. 3. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. d. Weight. 4. Nameplate schedule. a. Provide in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 5. Bill of material, including quantity, description, manufacturer, • part number, serial number, vendor name with phone, and spare part list with unit price.Bills of material shall include all items within enclosure. a. Provide the Bill of material on CD-ROM in Microsoft Excel format. 6. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Input current. d. Output current. e. Interrupting rating. f. Momentary current rating. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Catalog cut sheets for major components. 9. Design data: a. Efficiency and power factor values. b. Certification that the drive is sized for the full nameplate motor horsepower and current of the driven load at the installed altitude and ambient temperature. c. Certification that based upon VFD design, cable length to motor, and motor dielectric insulation level that the VFD will not damage motor insulation due to carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt, or other VFD produced • characteristics. d. Certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformally coated. 10. List of diagnostic indicators. 11. List of fault and failure conditions that the drive can recognize and indicate for simultaneous occurrence. 12. List of standard features and options. 13. For equipment installed within a motor control center, the contractor shall submit a letter confirming each VFD unit contained within the MCC has been coordinated with its respective driven load. Letter shall list VFD location and driven equipment tag numbers as well as the FLA rating of each driven load motor. Motor data sheets for each driven load motor shall be attached to the coordination letter for verification. 14. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design categoryC, D, E, or F submit the following as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical: a. Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. b. Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. 15. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • C. Shop drawings: 1. Complete plan and elevation drawings showing: a. All dimensions. b. Panel, sub-panel and component layout indexed to the bill of material. c. Conduit connections. 2. Block diagram showing the basic control and protection systems specifying the protection, control, trip and alarm functions, the reference signals and commands and the auxiliary devices. 3. Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing connections to both internal and external devices: a. Include terminal number and wire numbers. 4. Complete single-line and 3-line diagrams including, but not limited to, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, contactors, instrument transformers, meters, relays, timers, control devices, and other equipment comprising the complete system: a. Clearly indicate device electrical ratings on the drawings. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. • 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design categoryA or B: a. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. 3. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Startup and commissioning instructions and data. 2. Operating manuals: a. Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full details for care and maintenance of each model of VFD provided under this Contract. Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3. Operating instructions: • a. Written descriptions detailing the operational functions of all controls on the front panel. 4. Maintenance manual: a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering all details pertaining to care and maintenance of all equipment as well as identifying all parts. b. Manuals shall include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the initial test, adjustment and start-up procedures. 2) Detailed control instructions which outline the purpose and operation of every control device used in normal operation. 3) All schematic wiring and external diagrams: a) Furnish drawings in a reduced 11-inch by 17- inch format that are fully legible at that size. F. Test reports. G. Manufacturer's field reports: 1. Certification letter from the VFD manufacturer that the 111 VFD(s) has been inspected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 2. Report listing the setting of all VFD adjustable parameters and their values after start-up. H. Record Documents: 1. Certified Record Documents of equipment with information listed above. 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. No spare parts are required. 1.7 SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 1111 Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Qualifications: 1. Any third party certification, safety or protection requirements shall be applied to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements or individual components by themselves is not acceptable. 2. VFD systems shall be UL 508C listed and labeled. 3. Variable frequency drives shall be manufactured by the VFD manufacturer at its own facility which shall have a quality assurance program that is certified in conformance with ISO 9001. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Ship the VFDs and associated equipment to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize on site off-loading equipment: . 1. VFDs shall be delivered to the site preassembled and wired. 2. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the VFD to prevent condensation from forming. 1.10 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Refer to Section 01756, Testing, Training and Startup. B. Prior to issuance of any submittal, manufacturer (not a manufacturer's representative) shall actively participate in a pre- submittal coordination meeting with the pump supplier, to be held at the OWNER'S office. Contractor shall coordinate the date and time of the pre-submittal meeting with OWNER, providing no less than 14 days prior notice, and ensure that both the pump and variable frequency drive suppliers will be present simultaneously. C. Submit equipment for review. • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 D. Following approved submittal, conduct internal factory test to ensure that all systems and equipment are functional and • submit certified test results for Engineer's review. E. Conduct factory acceptance test. F. Ship equipment to project site after successful completion of factory acceptance test. G. Install equipment in the field. H. Submit manufacturer's certification that all equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for Engineer's review. I. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for Engineer's review. J. Conduct Owner's training sessions. K. Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment. 1.12 SCHEDULING • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.13 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Supplier shall coordinate warranties for pumps, motors, and drives such that supplier acts as a single point of contact for all warranties C. OWNER shall be listed as recipient of all warranties D. At no additional charge the Manufacturer shall replace any work or material they have provided which develops defects within 2 years from date of final acceptance of installed equipment by OWNER. 1. Manufacturer's service and repair support during and after warranty. 2. Correction of Defective Work: During the warranty period, SUPPLIER shall respond to telephone notification of defective work or equipment malfunction from the OWNER by • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • dispatching a competent authorized representative to the project site within 24 hours. SUPPLIER's representative shall have access to all necessary parties (if necessary) within 24 hours following notification of defective work or equipment malfunction. Repairs and adjustments involving parts shall start within 48 hours of said notification. E. All materials and equipment shall be warranted against defective materials, design and workmanship. F. During the warranty period, the Manufacturer or his authorized dealer is required to make the necessary repairs or replacements on site. G. Warranties which mention that the part must be returned to the factory are not acceptable. H. During the warranty period, the Owner will not accept charges for: 1. Travel time. 2. Mileage. 3. Materials 4. On-site repair labor. • I. Warrantyshall list anyand all items excluded. J. If necessary, as determined by the Owner, any repairs must be made on a premium time basis. 1.14 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. The VFD manufacturer shall be responsible for start up of the VFDs in the presence of the equipment suppliers, Contractor, Engineer and Owner. 1.15 COMMISSIONING A. After startup and training has been completed, the VFDs shall be commissioned by the VFD manufacturer: 1. The VFDs shall operate the driven load without failure under normal operating conditions for a period of 30 days. 2. Any failures shall be repaired by the VFD manufacturer. 3. Following repair, the commissioning period shall be restarted. 1111 Commissioning shall only be complete once an uninterrupted 30-day period has been completed. Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. Allen-Bradley. 3. Siemens-Robicon. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Sinusoidal pulse width modulated (PWM) type drive. a. Six-pulse insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) power section. b. Microprocessor based controls. c. Line and load reactors. B. Ratings: 1. Voltage: a. Input voltage: 480 volts within 10 percent, 3-phase, 60 hertz. C. Operational features: • 1. Protective features: a. Provide the following minimum protective features: 1) Motor overload protection. 2) Instantaneous overcurrent. 3) Instantaneous overvoltage. 4) Undervoltage. 5) Power unit overtemperature. 6) Phase loss. 7) VFD output short circuit. 2. Control mode: a. Operation in either a constant volts/hertz or sensorless vector mode: 1) The control mode selectable using the programming keypad. 3. Frequency control: a. Minimum of 3 selectable skip frequencies with adjustable bandwidths. b. Programmable minimum frequency. c. Programmable maximum frequency. 4. Acceleration/deceleration: a. Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration rates: 1) Each rate adjustable from 0.01 to 3,600 seconds. 5. Spinning load: a. The VFD shall be capable of determining the speed • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • and direction of a spinning load, "catch" the load and accelerate or decelerate it without damage to the load. 6. Programmable loss of signal: a. Upon loss of speed reference the VFD shall be programmable to either: 1) Stop. 2) Maintain current speed. 3) Default to pre-selected speed. 7. Power interrupt ride-through: a. The VFD shall be capable of continuous operation in the event of a power loss of 5 cycles or less. 8. Inputs/Outputs: a. Manufacturer's standard number the following: 1) Analog inputs: a) Configurable as either 0 to 10 volts or 4 to 20 milliamperes. 2) Analog outputs: a) Programmable 4 to 20 milliamperes isolated. 3) Discrete inputs: a) Programmable. 4) Discrete outputs: a) Programmable. b) Form C relay contacts. 5) Potentiometer 3-wire input. • b. Provide additional inputs/outputs as required to meet the control functions indicated on the Drawings. 9. Communications: a. Provide each VFD with a Ethernet communications interface module. 10. Diagnostics: a. Store a minimum of 4 fault conditions in non-volatile memory on a first in-first out basis. b. Operational parameters stored at the time of a the fault: 1) Operating frequency. 2) Drive status. 3) Power mode. c. Fault memory accessible via RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485. 11. Automatic restart: a. User selectable automatic restart feature allowing the VFD to restart following a momentary power failure or other VFD fault: 1) Programmable for up to 9 restart attempts. 2) Adjustable time delay between restart attempts. • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.3 COMPONENTS • A. Provide cooling devices required to maintain the VFD within the Manufacturer's specified temperature limits for the project conditions: 1. Provide cooling device alarm. B. Provide front accessible air filters. C. Provide cooling devices and controls required to maintain the VFD within the Manufacturer's specified temperature limits for the project conditions. D. Thermostat controlled air-cooling with a long-life, low noise cooling fans, sized for 100 percent capacity cooling. E. Provide power and fuse protection for the VFD cooling fans. F. Fans shall start when the VFD is running and shall stop when components have cooled. G. No filters are required. • H. Enclosure: 1. Motor control center. 2. Provide cooling devices required to maintain the VFD within the manufacturer's specified temperature limits for the Project conditions: a. Provide cooling device failure alarm. I. Power disconnect: 1. Flange mounted thermal magnetic circuit breaker. 2. Lockable in the OFF position. J. Reactors: 1. Line reactors: 5 percent input and 5 percent output. K. Keypad: 1. Provide each VFD with a keypad for programming only. a. Control shall be through pilot devices 2. Keypad requirements: a. Password security to protect drive parameters. b. Mounted on the door of the motor control center. c. Back-lit LCD: 1) Minimum of 2 lines with a minimum of 16 characters • per line. Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • d. Programming and display features language: English. e. Capable of displaying the following parameters: 1) Speed (percent). 2) Output current (amperes). 3) Output frequency (hertz). 4) Input voltage. 5) Output voltage. 6) Total 3-phase kilowatt. 7) Kilowatt-hour meter. 8) Elapsed run time meter. 9) Revolutions per minute. 10) Direct current bus voltage. 3. In addition to all keys required for programming, provide the following controls on the keypad: a. Auto/manual selector. b. Start pushbutton. c. Stop pushbutton. d. Jog pushbutton. e. Speed increment. f. Speed decrement. g. Forward/reverse selector. h. Run LED indicator. i. Program LED indicator. j. Fault LED indicator. 4. Provide the VFD with the hardwired controls as indicated on the • Drawings. L. Control power transformer: 1. Furnish a control power transformer mounted and wired inside the VFD enclosure. 2. With primary and secondary fusing. 3. Sized to power all VFD controls and options as well as any external devices indicated on the Drawings including the motor winding heater. M. Door mounted speed potentiometer for manual speed control. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Metal oxide varistors: 1. Provide protection for the VFD against: a. Line transients: 5,000 volt peak minimum. b. Line to ground transients: 7,000 peak minimum. B. Conformal coating: 1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed circuit boards to act as a protection • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 against moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and • chemicals such as H2S and chlorine. 2.5 FINISHES A. Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer's standard gray. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. VFDs, factory testing: 1. Tests shall be observed by the OWNER. Tests may be observed by the Electrical ENGINEER and the Project ENGINEER. 2. The OWNER shall bear costs associated with travel for this test including, but not limited to: lodging, meals, travel time, time to witness tests, etc., for up to 3 representatives of the OWNER. 3. Costs associated with accommodation of the witness testing at the testing facility shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. 4. The ENGINEER shall be reimbursed by the OWNER for all costs associated with these tests. 5. Control Strategies described in specification 17101 shall be reviewed and understood by supplier prior to • commencement of the Factory Test. 6. Provide a certified copy of the test results to the OWNER: a. Include in the results any minor adjustments made during the test. b. If major changes must be made, the test must be repeated. 7. General: a. Incoming inspection of components and raw materials based on strategic supplier base and experience. b. All VFDs furnished under this Section shall be tested and inspected as specified below. Testing of VFDs based on sampling plans is not allowed. c. The testing procedures specified are the minimum acceptable requirements. The manufacturer may perform additional tests at its discretion. 8. Failure of any component during testing requires repair of the faulted component and complete retest. 9. Testing sequence: a. Submit a detailed test procedure for the VFD factory test: 1) A minimum of 8 weeks in advance of the proposed testing date. 2) No tests shall be performed until the test procedure is reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -14- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 10. Component tests: a. Preliminary inspection: 1) Verify that all components are correct. 2) Verify that all connections are properly torqued. b. Printed circuit boards: 1) Test for correct component placement and value and complete board functional test to ensure proper performance with specified tolerances. 2) Heat cycle test for 48 hours at 60 degrees Celsius. 3) Apply control power to microprocessors, printed circuit boards, diagnostic boards, and similar devices including software to test for proper operation, sequencing, logic, and diagnostics. 4) Test operation of all analog and discrete inputs and outputs. c. Wiring: 1) Control and power wiring continuity verified point-to- point. 2) Hi-pot power and control wiring at manufacturer's recommended levels. 3) Verify ground bond resistance. d. Load testing: 1) No load testing in accordance with the • manufacturer's standard factory test procedure. 2) Full load testing: a) Test each VFD and a representative motor with the system logic and a dynamometer load to simulate field operation conditions at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent full load current. b) Load test each VFD at a minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. (1) Monitor and record temperature rise. (2) Once temperature rise stops continue to operate the VFD for a minimum of 2 hours. (a) If operating temperature exceeds the rated value, repair or replace the VFD and retest. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind • load requirements at the Project site. Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -15- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 C. General • 1. Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, terminal block lugs to land motor leads to, wires between VFD and terminal block lugs and other accessories needed to complete the installation of the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center). 2. Assemble and install the VFD in the locations and with the layouts indicated on the Drawings. 3. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. 4. Furnish components and equipment as required to complete the installation. 5. Replace any hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to provide a complete installation. 6. Install free-standing enclosures on 3-1/2 inch raised concrete housekeeping pad: a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units. b. Weld and/or bolt the VFD frame to the leveling channels. 7. Provide openings in top or bottom of the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center) enclosure for conduit only, no additional openings will be allowed: a. Improperly cut holes will require that the entire panel be 111 replaced: 1) No hole closers or patches will be allowed. 8. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit: a. Tie with nylon wire ties. b. Label all wires at each end with wire numbers shown on the approved control drawings. c. All connections to and from the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center) enclosure must be made via terminal blocks. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer representative for startup assistance and training: 1. Inspection and field adjustment: a. Supervise the following and submit written certification that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, adjusted, and readied for operation. 2. Startup field testing: a. Provide technical direction for testing, checkout, and • startup of the VFD equipment in the field. Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -16- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • b. Under no circumstances are any portions of the drive system to be energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. B. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer factory technician to make all drive parameters and protective device settings: 1. Protective device settings provided by the VFD manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer of the driven equipment requirements. 2. Provide documentation of VFD settings included but not limited to: a. Minimum speed. b. Maximum speed. c. Skip speeds. d. Current limit. e. Acceleration time. f. Deceleration time. • 3.4 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. The authorized representative shall instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step by step troubleshooting with test equipment for two (2) Days, with the first half day in classroom setting and the rest with actual equipment furnished. Instructions shall be specific to the VFD models provided in this project. C. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of four (4) weeks in advance of the first session. Training dates and time shall be determined by the OWNER. Training shall include individual sessions for up to ten (10)personnel. 1. Proposed training materials shall be submitted for review a minimum of four • (4) weeks in advance, and comments shall be incorporated Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -17- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 prior to training. Training materials shall remain with the • trainees. The OWNER may videotape the training for later use with the OWNER's personnel. 3.6 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 16262 Variable frequency drives (VFD) Durham AWWTF Secondary -18- 0.5 to 50 horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • SECTION 16282 ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. Active Harmonic Filtering Equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for • convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. c. Section 01756, Commissioning and Process Start-up. d. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. e. Section 16262, Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-50 Horsepower 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect equipment from moisture by using appropriate heaters as instructed by manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Catalog cut sheets, other descriptive literature. 2. Layout with dimensions, openings and location of customer connections. • 3. Weights. Clean Water Services 16282 Active Harmonic Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Filtering Equipment Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 4. Capacities and ratings. • 5. Overcurrent protection and accessories. 6. Mounting, including seismic certification where applicable. 7. One-line, wiring, and schematic diagrams. 8. Conduit entrance locations. 9. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts B. Informational Submittals: 1. Instructions for handling and storage. 2. Nameplate schedules. 3. Test procedures. 4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Training. 6. Calculations: Anchor bolt calculations are required for all equipment as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. The calculations shall be signed and stamped by and engineer registered in the State of Oregon. 1.4 SPARE PARTS A. No spare parts are required. • 1.5 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Square D, AccuSine. B. TCI, H5. C. Or approved equal. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Voltage: 480 volts, three-phase, three-wire, 60-Hz. • Clean Water Services 16282 Active Harmonic Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Filtering Equipment Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • B. Operating Ambient Conditions: 1. Temperature: 50 to 104 degrees F. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. C. Harmonic Correction: 1. Limit the second through fiftieth-order harmonic current to less than 5 percent total harmonic distortion (THD). Limit harmonic current levels for individual harmonic orders to comply with IEEE 519, Table 10.3. Limit the harmonic voltage distortion to no more than 5 percent, independent of distortion of the voltage supplied by the utility. 2. The Active Harmonic Filter shall be compatible with and operate seamlessly with the Variable Frequency Drive specified under Section 16262, Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-50 Horsepower. D. Power Factor Correction: Maintain a setpoint of 0.95 lagging displacement power factor or better under all load conditions. The equipment shall not cause leading displacement power factor to occur. • E. Capacity: As specified on Drawings. F. Provisions for Additional Capacity: It shall be possible to increase the capacity of the equipment by installing additional units in parallel to previously installed filter units or system. 2.3 SENSORS A. Current Sensing Devices: For each harmonic filter system, provide one set of current transformers or transducers. Quantity, type and ratings of the current sensing devices shall be as recommended by the filter manufacturer. Current transformers shall be located as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.4 ENCLOSURE A. Provide a disconnecting means that is interlocked with the enclosure door to interrupt power when the door is opened. The disconnect shall be padlockable in the OFF position with as many as three padlocks. • Clean Water Services 16282 Active Harmonic Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Filtering Equipment Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 B. Where shown on Drawings, install filters integral to motor • control center lineups. C. Stand-alone Enclosure: 1. NEMA Type 1, with gasketed doors and openings. 2. Enclosures shall be suitable for wall mounting, with conduit entry through the top and bottom. 3. Paint shall be manufacturer's standard type and color. D. Provide ventilation fan for cooling, thermostatically controlled. 2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION A. Provide 200,000 AIC fuses with Class T semiconductor-rated fast-blow time- current characteristics. 1. Alternatively, provide molded case circuit breaker with 65,000 ampere short circuit rating. 2.6 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE(HMI) A. Provide each filter system with manufacturer's standard • human-machine interface (HMI) screen. B. Provide standard control features such as "Run," "Stop," and the ability to set all parameters from the HMI. Include indicating lights or displays for operator feedback. C. Display operating data while the filter system is operating. Display at a minimum: 1. Ac line voltage. 2. Total RMS load current. 3. Harmonic load current. 4. Reactive load current. 5. Output harmonic. 6. Reactive current output of the harmonic filter. 7. Power factor before filter correction. 8. Power factor after filter correction. • Clean Water Services 16282 Active Harmonic Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Filtering Equipment Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • D. Display fault conditions (both alarm and shut down) as they occur. Provide diagnostic information in English and clearly indicate the nature of the fault. 1. Ac line over-voltage (alarm). 2. Ac line under-voltage (alarm). 3. Ac line power loss (alarm). 4. Ac line phase imbalance (alarm). 5. All other faults (shut down). E. Inputs: Filter equipment shall accept a 120V ac dry contact signal from the Plant Control system. Closed contact shall "start" the equipment, an open contact shall shut the equipment down. F. Output Relays: Provide one relay for each of the following conditions. Relay contacts shall be Form C, rated for 1A, noninductive at 120 volts. 1. Fault. 2. Running. • 2.7 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Power correction units shall consist of switching power semiconductors that switch the ac line to cancel harmonics and adjust reactive currents. Capacitors on a dc bus shall be used to store power for this purpose. Use a microprocessor to control switching of the semiconductors. B. Provide over-current and over-temperature protective functions. Reduce current output to keep the unit within its ratings while still providing correction to the electrical system. C. In the event of alarm fault conditions, the control system shall automatically restart the system upon removal of the condition. D. In the event of shut-down fault conditions, shut the system down and do not permit it to automatically restart. Display the type of fault in the HMI display. In order for the system to be re- started, the user shall be required to manually reset it. • Clean Water Services 16282 Active Harmonic Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Filtering Equipment Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. Factory Inspections: Inspect equipment for required construction, electrical connection and intended function. B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment actually furnished. 1. Functional Test: Perform manufacturer's standards test. Record test data for report. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in locations shown on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Locate equipment to allow adequate ventilation. C. Secure to wall with anchor bolts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, • proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. B. Verify correct installation of current sensors including location and phasing. C. Verify control setup including correct selection of current sensor current ratios, control setpoints, etc. D. Perform tests per manufacturer's literature. E. Check tightness of power connections using calibrated torque wrench. Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's recommended values. F. Check fuses for continuity. G. Confirm input voltage and verify that the unit is programmed for that system voltage. • Clean Water Services 16282 Active Harmonic Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Filtering Equipment Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating mechanisms and settings per manufacturer's requirements. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Furnish manufacturer's representative in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services, and Section 01756, Testing, Training, and Facility Startup, for the following services at jobsite or classroom as designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 1/2 person-day for installation assistance and inspection of installation. 2. 1/2 person-day for functional and performance testing. 3. 1/2 person-day for plant startup. 4. 1/2 person-day for training of site personnel. B. Provide field test personnel to start the equipment. Provide a • three-phase harmonic analyzer to measure TDD and THD(V) levels to demonstrate performance to the user and conformance. Prepare written test reports for each system. Test reports shall be signed, dated and submitted to the Engineer. C. Manufacturer's Certification by a Factory Trained Manufacturer's Representative: Certify in writing equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 411 Clean Water Services 16282 Active Harmonic Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Filtering Equipment Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16305 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Short circuit fault analysis study. 2. Protective device coordination study. 3. Arc-flash hazard study. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this • Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.2 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE): 1. 141 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants (Red Book). 2. 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Buff Book). 3. 315 - IEEE Standards Electrical and Electronics Graphic and LetterSymbols and Reference Designations. 4. 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis (Brown Book). 5. 902 - IEEE Guide for Maintenance, Operation and Safety on Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Yellow Book). • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 6. 1015 - IEEE Recommended Practice For Applying Low Voltage •. Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - Corrigendum 1 (Blue Book). 7. 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General study requirements: 1. Scope: a. The short-circuit fault analysis, protective device coordination and arc- flash hazard studies shall include all new and modified equipment in the power distribution system including but not limited to: 1) Utility equipment. 2) Switchgear. 3) Switchboards. • 4) Generators. 5) Transformers: a) Including all dry-type transformers. 6) Motor control centers. 7) Free standing variable frequency drives and starters. 8) Disconnect switches. 9) Motors. 10) Panelboards: a) Including all 240 and 208 volt systems. 11) Vendor control panels. 12) HVAC equipment. b. Study scenarios: 1) The studies shall include all possible electrical system configurations, for example: a) Operation on normal (utility)source. b) Main-breakers closed, tie-breaker open. c) Either main-breaker open, tie-breaker closed. 2. Obtain, for all equipment, the required data for preparation of the study, including, but not limited to: a. Transformer kilovolt-ampere (kVA) and impedances. b. Generator impedances. c. Generator decrement curves. d. Bus withstand ratings. e. Cable and bus data. Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • f. Protective device taps, time dials, instantaneous pickups, and time delay settings. 3. Obtain the Electric Utility information on the minimum and maximum available fault current, minimum and maximum utility impedances, utility protective device settings including manufacturer and model number, interrupting ratings, X/R ratios, and model information one level above the point of connection: a. Utility tolerances and voltage variations. 4. The individual performing the studies shall visit the site and collect all necessary field data in order to perform and complete comprehensive electrical system studies. 5. Obtain equipment layouts and configurations from the manufacturer's final submittal requirements and project layout drawings as required. 6. Bus and conductor data: a. Use impedances of the actual installed or specified conductors, unless otherwise indicated. b. Use cable and bus impedances calculated at 25 degrees Celsius, unless otherwise indicated. c. Use 600-volt cable reactance based on typical dimensions of actual installed or specified conductors, unless otherwise indicated. • d. Use bus withstand values for all equipment having buses. e. Use medium voltage cable reactances based on typical dimensions of shielded cables with 133 percent insulation levels, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Motors: a. Each motor shall be individually modeled: 1) Grouping of motors for fault contribution current is not acceptable. b. Motors with variable frequency drives may be assumed to have no contribution to fault current. 8. Use the equipment, bus, and device designations as indicated on the Drawings for all studies. B. Short-circuit fault analysis study additional requirements: 1. The short-circuit fault analysis shall be performed and submitted in 2 phases: a. Initial short-circuit fault analysis: 1) Based on the Contract Documents and Electric Utility information. 2) The initial short-circuit fault analysis report shall indicate the estimated available short-circuit current at the line side terminals of each piece of equipment covered by the scope of the study. • 3) Provide a list of assumptions used in the initial study. Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project b. Final short-circuit analysis: • 1) The final short-circuit fault analysis shall modify the initial analysis as follows: a) Utilize the actual equipment provided on the project. b) Utilize conductor lengths based on installation. 2. Calculate 3-phase bolted fault, line-to-line fault, line-to-ground fault, double line-to-ground fault, short-circuit 1/2 cycle momentary symmetrical and asymmetrical RMS, 1-1/2 and 4 cycle, interrupting symmetrical RMS,and 30 cycle steady state short-circuit current values at each piece of equipment in the distribution system. 3. Evaluate bus bracing, short circuit ratings, fuse interrupting capacity and circuit breaker adjusted interrupting capacities against the fault currents, and calculate X/R values: a. Identify and document all devices and equipment as either inadequate or acceptable. 4. Calculate line-to-ground and double line-to-ground momentary short circuit values at all buses having ground fault devices. 5. Provide calculation methods, assumptions, one-line diagrams, and source impedance data, including Utility X/R ratios, typical values, recommendations, and areas of concern. C. Protective device coordination study additional requirements: • 1. Furnish protective device settings for all functions indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to: a. Current. b. Voltage: 1) Provide settings for all voltage relays based upon actual Utility and generator tolerances and specifications. c. Frequency: 1) Provide settings for all frequency relays based upon actual Utility and generator tolerances and specifications. d. Negative sequence. e. Reverse power. f. Machine protection functions: 1) Provide settings for all motor and generator protective relays based on the manufacturer's recommended protection requirements. S Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2. Provide log-log form time-current curves (TCCs) graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system: a. Include with each TCC a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered by the particular TCC: 1) Typical time-current curves for identical portions of the system, such as motor circuits, are acceptable as allowed by the Engineer. b. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics: 1) These details can be included on the TCC. c. Include a detailed description of each protective device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings: 1) These details can be included in the TCC. 3. TCCs shall include all equipment in the power distribution system where required to demonstrate coordination. Include Utility relay and fuse characteristics, medium voltage equipment protective relay and fuse characteristics, low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics, transformer characteristics, motor and generator characteristics, and characteristics of other system load protective devices: a. Include all devices down to the largest branch circuit and • largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center, main breaker in branch panelboards and fused disconnect switches. b. Provide ground fault TCCs with all adjustable settings for ground fault protective devices. c. Include manufacturing tolerances and damage bands in plotted fuse and circuit breaker characteristics. d. On the TCCs show transformer full load currents, transformer magnetizing inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters and transformer damage curves. e. Cable damage curves. f. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed based on the short-circuit fault analysis study. g. Coordinate time interval medium-voltage relay characteristics with upstream and downstream device to avoid nuisance tripping. • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 4. Site generation: When site generation (including cogeneration, • standby, and emergency generators) is part of the electrical system, include phase and ground coordination of the generator protective devices: a. Show the generator decrement curve and damage curve along with the operating characteristic of the protective devices. 5. Suggest modifications or additions to equipment rating or settings in a tabulated form. D. Arc-flash hazard study additional requirements: 1. Include the calculated arc-flash boundary and incident energy (calories/square centimeter) at each piece of equipment in the distribution system: a. Perform study with 15 percent arcing fault variation as defined by IEEE 1584. b. Perform arc-flash calculations at minimum and maximum utility fault contributions. c. Perform arc-flash calculations for both the line side and load side of switchgear, switchboard, motor control center and panelboard main breakers. d. Perform arc-flash calculations for all short-circuit scenarios with all motors on for 3 to 5 cycles and with all motors off. • e. Protective device clearing time shall be limited to 2 seconds, maximum. 2. Provide executive summary of the study results. a. Provide summary based upon worst case results. 3. Provide a detailed written discussion and explanation of the tabulated outputs. a. Include all scenarios. 4. Provide alternative device settings to allow the Owner to select the desired functionality of the system: a. Minimize the arc-flash energy by selective trip and time settings for equipment maintenance purposes. b. Identify the arc-flash energy based upon the criteria of maintaining coordination and selectivity of the protective devices. E. Electrical system study meetings: 1. The individual conducting the short circuit analysis, protective device coordination, and the arc-flash hazard studies shall meet with the Owner and Engineer 3 times. • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2. The purpose of the 3 meetings is as follows: a. Initial meeting: 1) Meet with the Owner and Engineer to discuss the scope of the studies. 2) Discuss the Owner's operational requirements for both normal operation and maintenance. b. Preliminary results meeting: 1) This meeting will be held after the studies have been completed, reviewed, and accepted by the Engineer. 2) The purpose of this meeting is to inform the Owner of the results of the study and impacts on normal operation and maintenance including: a) Protective device coordination problems and recommended solutions. b) Explanation of the arc-flash study results and its potential impact on operations. c) Recommendations for reduction of arc-flash category levels including reduction of protective device settings or changes in operational practices. c. Final meeting: 1) Discuss changes to the reports based on the previous meeting. 2) Discuss with the Owner how changes to the electrical • system may change the arc-flash hazard category. 3) Deliver the final electrical system studies report. 3. The meetings will be at the Owner's facility: a. Provide a minimum of 3 weeks' notice to the Owner and Engineer in advance of the projected meeting date. b. Submit a draft of the meeting agenda when each meeting is requested. 4. Meeting materials: a. Prepare and provide the following materials: 1) Meeting agenda. Include at a minimum the scope of the meeting, estimated time length for the meeting and meeting goals. 2) 6 copies of the project one-line diagrams for the initial meeting. 3) 6 copies of the studies of the submitted study. F. By virtue of the fact that this is a professional study the Owner reserves the right to modify the requirements of the study to comply with its operational requirements. The protective device coordination study and the arc-flash study shall be modified based on the results of the meetings with the Owner. • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.5 SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Initial studies and reports: 1. Include the following in the initial short-circuit current report: a. List of all devices included in the studies. b. A description of all operating scenarios. c. Form and format of arc flash labels. C. Final studies and reports: 1. Format and quantity: a. Provide 6 bound copies of all final reports. b. Provide 3 complete sets of electronic files on CD or DVD media,including the electrical system model(s), configuration files, custom libraries, any other files used to perform the studies and produce the reports. Also provide an electronic version of the bound reports in PDF format. c. Provide the number of copies specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Include the sections below in the final report: a. Copies of correspondence and data obtained from the Electric Utility Company. • b. Letter certifying the inspection and verification of existing equipment. c. One-line diagrams: 1) The following information shall be included at a minimum: a) Motor horsepower. b) Transformer data: (1) kVA. (2) Configuration. c) Cable data: (1) Insulation. (2) Size. (3) Length. 2) One-line diagrams shall be fully legible at 11-inch by 17-inch size. d. Include in the short-circuit fault analysis study: 1) Descriptions, purpose, basis, assumptions, recommendations, and scope of the study. 2) Normal system connections and those, which result in maximum fault conditions. 3) Tabulation of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings compared to maximum calculated short- circuit duties. • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 4) Fault current calculations for the cases run including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer software printouts. e. Protective device coordination study shall include: 1) Descriptions, purpose, basis, assumptions, recommendations, and scope of the study. 2) List all requirements used in the selection and setting criteria for any protective devices. 3) Manufacturer's time-current curves for circuit breakers, fuses, motor circuit protectors, and other protective devices for all new equipment. 4) TCCs graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system on log-log graphs. At least 3 of the copies shall be in color. 5) Tabulation of relay, fuse, circuit breaker, and other protective devices in graphical form with a one-line diagram to display area coordination. 6) Where coordination could not be achieved, an explanation shall be included in the report to support the statement along with recommendations to improve coordination. Recommended equipment modifications or settings shall be in a tabulated form. f. Include in the arc-flash study: • 1) Descriptions, purpose, basis, assumptions, recommendations, and scope of the study. 2) Normal system connections and those, which result in maximum arc- flash conditions. 3) Arc-flash raw data, calculations, and assumptions. 4) Arc-flash label data: a) Identifying the content of each label. b) Identifying the location of each label. D. Certification: 1. Submit written certification, sealed, and signed by the professional engineer conducting the study, equipment supplier, and electrical subcontractor stating that the data used in the study is correct. E. Submit the credentials of the individual(s) performing the study and the individual in responsible charge of the study. F. The Engineer will review all studies and reports. After review, the Engineer will make recommendations and/or require changes to be made to the short-circuit analysis, protective device coordination or arc-flash studies. These changes shall be provided as part of the scope of work. G. Submit course outline for Owner's training. Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Qualifications of the entity responsible for electrical system studies: 1. The studies shall be performed, stamped, and signed by a professional engineer registered in the state where the project is located. 2. A minimum of 5 years' experience in power system analysis is required for the individual in responsible charge of the studies. 3. The short-circuit analysis, protective device coordination, and arc-flash hazard studies shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program: a. Point-to-point calculations are not acceptable. C. The study shall be performed by an independent firm. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Site visit to gather data on the existing facility systems for all studies: 1. Make multiple trips as required to obtain all data for the short- circuit, protection device coordination and arc flash study. B. Submit the initial short-circuit analysis study before submittal of any • electrical equipment. C. Initial electrical system study meeting. D. Submit the preliminary short-circuit analysis protective device coordination and arc flash studies. E. Second electrical system study meeting for preliminary results. F. Final arc-flash meeting and final short-circuit analysis, protective device coordination, and arc-flash studies. G. Label equipment with approved arc flash labels. H. Owner's training. • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Electrical system study software one of the following or equal: 1. ETAP by Operation Technology Inc. 2. Powertools by SKM Systems Analysis. 3. Paladin DesignBase by Power Analytics Corporation. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Arc-flash hazard labels: 1. Dimensions: a. Minimum 5 inches by 3.5 inches. 2. Materials: a. Polyester with polyvinyl polymer over-laminate. b. Self-adhesive. c. Resistant to: 1) UV. 2) Chemicals and common cleaning solvent resistant. 3) Scuffing. • 4) Wide temperature changes. 3. Contents: a. Short-circuit bus identification. b. Calculated incident energy (calories/square centimeter) range. 1) Based on worst case study results. c. Hazard/risk, personnel protective equipment category number. d. Arc-flash protection boundary. e. Shock hazard boundary: 1) The CONTACTOR may provide separate labels for indication of the shock hazard boundary. f. Description of the combined level of ersonnel protective p equipment. 4. Color scheme: a. For locations above 40 calories/square centimeter: 1) White label with red "DANGER" strip across the top. 2) Black lettering. b. For locations below 40 calories/square centimeter: 1) White label with orange "WARNING" strip across the top. 2) Black lettering. • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.1 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. After review and acceptance of the arc-flash hazard study by the Engineer, install all arc-flash hazard labels: 1. Install labels at all locations required by NFPA, ANSI, or IEEE standards. 2. At a minimum install labels in the following locations: a. The front of each main or incoming service compartment. b. The front of each low voltage switchgear section. c. The front of each medium voltage circuit breaker door. d. The front of each accessible auxiliary or conductor compartment. e. Each accessible rear or side vertical section. f. Each motor control center compartment. g. Each panelboard covered by the study. h. Each control panel, individual starter or VFD or other equipment covered by the scope of the study. 3. Install labels prior to equipment energization. C. After review and acceptance of the arc-flash hazard study and • coordination study by the Engineer, adjust protective device settings per final study prior to equipment energization. 1. Devices which require power for configuration may be set during energization, but before any subfed loads are energized. 2. Ensure that settings for upstream equipment are set prior to energizing downstream devices. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. The individual performing the arc-flash hazard study shall direct the installation of the arc-flash hazard labels: 1. Remove and replace any improperly applied labels. 2. Repair the equipment finish damaged by removal of any label. 3. Install labels to within 1/64 inch of level or plumb across the entire dimension of the label. 411 Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Training: 1. Provide a minimum of 1 training sessions for the Owner's electrical maintenance personnel: a. Each session shall be a minimum of 4 hours. 2. The training shall cover at a minimum: a. Hazards associated with arc-flash. b. Causes of arc-flash. c. Explanation of the arc-flash labels installed on the Owner's electrical equipment. d. Proper use of personal protective equipment. e. PPE requirements for maintenance work. 3. The individual in charge of the arc-flash study or qualified representative shall conduct the training sessions. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 16305 Electrical System Studies Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16411 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches. 2. Non-automatic transfer switches. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 3. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 4. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 5. Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding. 6. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 1.02 REFERENCES • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20 - General-Use Snap Switches. 2. 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. 3. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 4. 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment. C. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. KS 1-2001- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 3. ICS1 - Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements 4. ICS6 - Enclosures D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publication: 1. Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment E. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): 1. TSAcceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems • Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.03 DEFINITIONS • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions: 1. Safety switches and disconnect switches are to be considered synonymous. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide heavy-duty type disconnect switches as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents. B. Provide disconnect switches with the number of poles, voltage, current, short circuit, and horsepower ratings as required by the load and the power system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. • 2. Manufacturer's specifications and description. 3. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Current. c. Horsepower. d. Short circuit rating. 4. Fused or non-fused. 5. NEMA enclosure type. 6. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. 7. Weight. 8. Dimensioned drawings. 9. Elementary diagrams. 10. Wiring diagrams. 11. Nameplate list. 12. Evidence that the equipment will be provided with all specified accessories, options, features, and characteristics. 13. Certifications that the equipment is designed and manufactured in conformance with applicable codes and standards. • Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • C. Manual. Provide manufacturer's installation and maintenance instruction manuals in conformance with Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. D. Shop drawings: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions: a. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance, Regulatory Requirements below. b. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product. 2. Identify motor or equipment served by each switch; indicate nameplate inscription. E. Installation instructions: 1. Provide anchorage instructions and requirement based on the seismic requirements at the Project Site as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical and calculations: a. Stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. NEMA KS1- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 V Maximum). 2. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. 3. UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment C. Disconnect switches shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as • specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.10 WARRANTY • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.11 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Disconnect switches: One of the following or approved equal. 1. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. General Electric. 4. Siemens. 5. Appleton. 6. Crouse-Hinds. B. Non-automatic transfer switch: One of the following or approved equal. 1. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. • 3. General Electric. 4. Siemens . 5. ASCO Series 7000. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Disconnect Switch 1. Switch mechanism: a. Quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty operating mechanisms: 1) Provisions for padlocking the switch in the Off position. 2) A minimum of 90-degree handle travel position between Off and On positions: a) Provide handle position indicators to identify the handle position. 3) Full cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the On position and to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open: a) With an externally operated override. • Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2. Switch interior: a. Switch blades visible when the switch is Off and the cover is open. b. Lugs: 1) Front accessible. 2) Removable. 3) UL listed for 60/75-degree Celsius copper conductors. c. Current carrying parts completely plated to resist corrosion. d. Removable arc suppressors to facilitate easy access to line side lugs. e. Furnish equipment ground kits for every switch. 3. Ratings: a. UL horsepower rated for AC or DC with the rating not less than the load served. b. Current: 1) 30 to 1,200 amperes. c. Voltage: 1) 250 volts AC, DC. 2) 600 volts (30 A to 200 A, 600 volts DC). d. Poles: 1) 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles. e. UL listed short circuit ratings: • 1) 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 amperes). 2) 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or J fuses (30-600 amperes employing appropriate fuse rejection). 3) 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class L fuses (800-1,200 amperes). f. Where not indicated on the Drawings, provide switches with the NEMA ratings specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical for the installed location. 4. Size, fusing and number poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required. 5. Local power disconnects for 480V electrical actuators shall be 3 pole, 600V, non-fusible, NEMA 4X SS, 16 UL Amps. Power disconnect shall be ABB E0T16U3S4-P or approved equal. 6. Auxiliary Contacts. Two sets of Form C contacts shall be provided for disconnect switches on all VFD driven loads. B. Non-automatic Transfer Switch 1. General. The non-automatic transfer switch shall transfer from the normal service to an alternate service. The transfer shall not take place automatically, but shall be initiated manually by operating personnel. Transfer back to the normal power supply • Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project shall also be initiated manually. The switch shall be UL listed 11111 and shall bear the UL label. 2. Construction. a. The non-automatic transfer switch shall be of the mechanically held double throw type and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over-center linkage. All main power contacts and auxiliary contacts shall be mechanically attached to a common shaft, shall be double- break silver alloy with wiping action, and shall be protected by arcing contacts. Arcing contacts shall close before and open after the main contacts and shall be readily replaceable. Contact design and arrangement shall permit repeated making and breaking of full-load current, in a combination of motor and other loads, without damage to the main contacts. Provide a main transfer mechanism utilizing rugged metal parts throughout. Molded circuit breaker type designs are not acceptable. b. The switch transfer shall be produced in such a way that a time delay of at least 0.4 seconds exists between the opening of the closed contacts and the closing of the open contacts. The transfer switch shall be capable of transferring in either direction with 70% of rated voltage applied at the switch terminals. c. All switch and relay contacts, coils, springs, and control • elements shall be serviceable or removable from the front of the mounted switch and accessory assembly without the removal of either assembly from its compartment and without disconnection of drive linkages, power conductors, or control conductors. d. The enclosure shall be NEMA 12 construction with hinged doors on the front for access to the interior controls. Secure doors by a locking type latch. Provide two keys for the lock. e. Cable connections shall be accessible from the front without removing internal components. f. Safety Requirements. 1) Arrange the electrical supply to each control panel to be disconnected by a single switch or circuit breaker, except for necessary foreign circuits. Cover any live parts within the control panel fed from foreign control or signal circuits or arrange for them to be disconnected by one of the following methods: a) Enclosed relays which are automatically de- energized when the main disconnecting switch is opened; or b) Door-operated enclosed disconnect switches; or • Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • c) Clearly identified enclosed manually operated disconnect switches, which may be located inside the control panel door, provided the operating handles are isolated or barriered from all open live parts. 2) Arrange the controls so that manipulation of control switches, adjustments to timing relays, or replacement of fuses can be done without exposure to live parts. g. The transfer switch shall have the following features: 1) Continuous rating of 480 volts, 3-phase, with 3-poles and full neutral bus. Current rating shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2) Adequate line and load lugs for terminating the power conductors shown on the Drawings. 3) A terminal strip with terminals for terminating all external control circuits. Number all terminals using the wire number for the wire terminated. 4) Cable wiring with cable ties, secured in place and guarded where subject to mechanical injury. 5) Permanent identification of each wire at each point of connection using numbered wiring sleeves. Provide electrically common wires with the same number. • Uniquely number electrically different wires. 3. Controls. Include the following controls and accessories: a. 960MCC3401-Side A/960MCC3401-Side B source selector push buttons mounted on front of enclosure. b. Provision for addition of remote push buttons to transfer from 960MCC3401-Side A to 960MCC3401-Side B and vice- versa. c. Indicating Lights. One each to indicate whether the switch is at 960MCC3401-Side A or 960MCC3401-Side B position. Mount lights on front of switch enclosure. d. Nameplates. Provide engraved lamicoid plastic nameplate for each control device and indicating lamp. Engraving shall be subject to review by the Engineer. e. Transfer Relay. A relay to inhibit transfer unless the selected power source is at 90% or greater of rated voltage and frequency. f. Transfer Delay. A timer to provide an adjustable delay of 1 to 5 seconds in the closing of the open switch contacts after the closed switch contacts are opened. Provide delay for switch operation in either direction. g. Auxiliary Contacts. Two sets of Form C contacts which transfer whenever the switch transfers. 4. UL Label. The transfer switch shall have a UL label on the unit • when it arrives at the site. Absence of the UL label shall be Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project sufficient cause for the unit to be rejected. Provide all of the • specified features, options, and accessories. If the manufacturer's standard UL unit does not have the specified features, options, or accessories, then provide alternative features, options, or accessories to accomplish the same purpose in a manner similar to that specified, while still providing a unit with a UL label. 5. Current Ratings. The transfer switch shall have continuous ampere rating as shown on the Drawings and a short circuit withstand rating for 3 cycles at 480 volts as follows: Continuous Ampere Withstand RMS Amperes, Rating Symmetrical 300 A 100,000 6. Finish. Shall be manufacturer's standard not less than 3 mils thick. Color shall be light gray ANSI 61 per Z55.1. 7. Factory Tests. Assemble, wire and test the automatic transfer switch at the factory. Conduct tests to assure that every component functions properly. Submit prototype test reports on bus bracing for the Engineer's review. 2.03 ACCESSORIES • A. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installable "B" type electrical interlock for position indication as indicated on the Drawings. B. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installed insulated groundable neutral kit as indicated on the Drawings. C. NEMA Type 7 and 9 enclosures furnished with drain and breather kit when used in outdoor applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. General: 1. Use Myers hubs or bolt-on hubs for all conduit penetrations on NEMA Type 12, Type 4, and Type 4X enclosures. • Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 110 2. Provide all mounting brackets, stands, supports and hardware as required: a. Match finish and materials for all brackets, stands, and hardware with the switch installed. b. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for disconnect switches in accordance with the approved seismic calculations, and locate aboveground or above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface for box. 3. When possible, mount switches rigidly to exposed building structure or equipment structural members: a. For NEMA Type 4 and Type 4X locations, maintain a minimum of 7/8 inch air space between the enclosure and supporting surface. b. When mounting on preformed channel, position channel vertically so that water may freely run behind the enclosure. 4. Provide a nameplate for each disconnect switch: a. Provide per requirements specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. b. Identify voltage, circuit, fuse size, and equipment served on the nameplate. 5. Lace all power conductors for non-automatic transfer switches to resist short circuit forces. II • 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.04 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.05 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.06 TESTING A. Field Tests. Perform the tests for automatic transfer switches as outlined in NETA. Submit reports for review by the Owner. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16411 Disconnect Switches Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 16412 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. AB 3. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application. C. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): 1. 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. 2. 943 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. In accordance with UL 489. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Circuit breakers for motors smaller than 100 horsepower shall be molded case thermal magnetic type. Circuit breakers for 100 horsepower and larger motors shall be motor circuit protector type. • Clean Water Services 16412 Low Voltage Molded Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Case Circuit Breakers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.05 SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Manufacturer's time-current curves for all molded case circuit breakers furnished. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 WARRANTY • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. 4. ABB. • Clean Water Services 16412 Low Voltage Molded Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Case Circuit Breakers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Conforming to UL 489. 2. Operating mechanism: a. Quick-make, quick-break, non-welding silver alloy contacts. b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles open and close simultaneously. c. Mechanically trip free from the handle. d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker has tripped. e. Lockable in the "OFF" position. 3. Arc extinction: a. In arc chutes. 4. Voltage and current ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum frame size 100A. 5. Interrupting ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Not less than the rating of the assembly (panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, etc.) • B. Motor circuit protectors: 1. Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor controller. 2. Each pole continuously adjustable in a linear scale with `LO' and 'HI' settings factory calibrated. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Terminals: 1. Line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of conductors in accordance with UL 489. B. Case: 1. Molded polyester glass reinforced. 2. Ratings clearly marked. C. Trip units: 1. Provide thermal magnetic or solid-state trip units as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Thermal magnetic: a. Instantaneous short circuit protection. b. Inverse time delay overload. 111 c. Ambient or enclosure compensated by means of a bimetallic element. Clean Water Services 16412 Low Voltage Molded Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Case Circuit Breakers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 D. Molded case circuit breakers for use in panelboards: • 1. Bolt-on type. a. Plug-in type breakers are not acceptable. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test breakers in accordance with: 1. UL 489. 2. Manufacturer's standard testing procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install breakers to correspond to the accepted shop drawings. 3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.04 ADJUSTING • A. Adjust trip settings in accordance with Protective Device Coordination Study as accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Adjust motor circuit protectors in accordance with NEC and the manufacturer's recommendation based on the nameplate values of the installed motor. 3.05 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16412 Low Voltage Molded Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Case Circuit Breakers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 SECTION 16422 • MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Motor starters and contactors. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. • b. Section 01756, Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16070, Hangers and Supports. e. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. f. Section 16123, 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables. g. Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. h. Section 16444, Low Voltage Motor Control Centers. i. Section 17710, Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components. 1.2 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): 1. 60 947-4 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear. 2. 801-1 - Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial-Process Measurement and Control Equipment - Part 1: General Information. C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V. D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 2. 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels. Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. FVNR: Full voltage non-reversing. 2. Overload relay class: A classification of an overload relay time current characteristic by means of a number which designates the maximum time in seconds at which it will operate when carrying a current equal to 600 percent of its current rating. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General requirements: 1. Starters for motor control centers, individual enclosed starters, or control panels. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical: 1. Submit motor starter data with equipment submittal. B. Product data: 411 1. Manufacturer. 2. Catalog cut sheets. 3. Technical information. 4. Complete nameplate schedule. 5. Complete bill of material. 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Confirmation that the overload relay class for each starter meets the requirements of the equipment and motor supplier. 8. Electrical ratings: a. Phase. b. Wire. c. Voltage. d. Ampacity. e. Horsepower. 9. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. Shop drawings: 1. Elementary and schematic diagrams: a. Provide 1 diagram for every starter and contactor. b. Indicate wire numbers for all control wires on the diagrams: 1) Wire numbering as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. • c. Indicate interfaces with other equipment on the drawings. Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • D. Installation instructions: 1. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of equipment furnished or installed under this Section. Including but not limited to: a. Electrical ratings: 1) Phase. 2) Wire. • 3) Voltage. 4) Ampacity. b. Complete bill of material. c. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions starter and/or contactor component parts, including: 1) Protective devices (fuses, breakers, overload relays, heater elements, etc.). 2) Pilot devices. d. Complete renewal parts list. e. As-built drawings: 1) Furnish as-built drawings for each starter and contactor indicating final: a) Wire numbers. b) Interfaces with other equipment. 2) 11-inch by 17-inch format. F. Certifications: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformally coated. 1.6 SPARE PARTS 411 A. No spare parts are required. Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. All starters and components shall be UL listed and labeled: a. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. b. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and System Controllers; Contactors and Overload Relays Rated: 600 Volts. 3. Combination starters shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.9 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.11 SYSTEM START-UP • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.12 MAINTENANCE A. Spare parts: 1. Provide the following spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the corresponding equipment number: a. One spare fuse of each size and type per starter. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. NEMA starters and contactors: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Schneider Electric/Square D. c. General Electric. d. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 4110 Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Provide combination type starters with motor circuit protector or thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and control power transformer with ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. NEMA size, design, and rated: a. NEMA Size 1 minimum: 3. Coordinate motor circuit protector, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, or fusible disconnect, and overload trip ratings with nameplate horsepower and current ratings of the installed motor: a. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide starters coordinated to the actual motors furnished. 4. Provide starters NEMA Size 2 and larger with arc quenchers on load breaking contacts. 5. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without opening starter enclosure door. B. Full voltage starters (FVNR): 1. Across-the-line full voltage magnetic starters. 2. Rated for 600 volts. 3. Electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings. • 4. Provide positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, pad lockable enclosure doors. 5. Size 1 starters shall be furnished with bi-metallic overload relays. Size 2 and larger starters shall be furnished with solid state electronic overload relays. 6. Double-break silver alloy contacts. 7. Reversing starters provided with both mechanical and electrical interlocks to prevent line shorts and energizing both contactors simultaneously. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Molded case circuit breakers: 1. Circuit breaker type and ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide as specified in Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. B. Contactors: 1. NEMA size as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electrically held: a. For lighting loads designed to withstand the initial inrush currents of ballast and lamp loads. 3. Factory adjusted and chatter free. • Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 4. Auxiliary contacts: • a. Contact ratings as per NEMA A 600 rating: 1) Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amps at 600 volts. b. Provide all contacts indicated on the Drawings, and any additional contacts required for proper operation. c. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary contact. 5. Constructed in accordance with the following standards: a. UL 508. b. IEC 947-4. 1) Type 1 coordination when protected by a circuit breaker. 2) Type 2 coordination when protected by a suitable UL listed fuse. c. IEC 801-1 parts 2 through 6. C. Overloads: 1. Bi-metallic overload relay: a. Class 20 protection. b. Ambient compensated. c. Interchangeable heater pack: 1) One heater per phase. 2) Coordinate with installed motor full load amps and service factor. d. Visible trip indicator. e. Push-to-trip test. f. Isolated normally open alarm contact. g. Normally closed trip contacts. • h. Manual reset. 2. Solid state electronic: a. Selectable Class 10, 20, 30 protection. b. Ambient insensitive: 1) Operating temperature: -20 to 70 degrees Celsius. c. Thermal memory. d. Protective functions: 1) Motor overcurrent. 2) Phase unbalance (adjustable.) 3) Phase loss. 4) Ground fault protection. e. Self-powered. f. Provide current transformers for metering of motor current. g. Visible trip indicator. h. Push-to-trip test. i. Isolated normally open alarm contact. j. Normally closed trip contact. k. Manual reset. • Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • D. Control power transformer: 1. Furnish integral control power transformer capacity to power: a. All motor controls indicated on the Drawings. b. Motor winding heaters, through a normally closed auxiliary contact on the starter. Approximate motor space heater rating shall be 250 W. 2. Primary and secondary fusing as indicated on the Drawings: a. Fusing sized by the manufacturer for the rating of the transformer furnished. 3. Control power transformer secondary voltage: a. 120 VAC. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Lugs and terminals: 1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG and larger. 2. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors. B. Surge protective devices: 1. Furnish surge protection devices across the coil of each starter, contactor, and relay. • C. Pilot devices: 1. Provide pilot lights, switches, elapsed time meters, and other devices as specified or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. As specified in Section 17710, Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and Panel Components. D. Nameplates and wire markers: 1. As specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. E. Conformal coating: 1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed circuit boards to act as protection against moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and chemicals such as H2S and chlorine. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load • requirements at the Project site. Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Starters in motor control centers: • 1. Install as specified in Section 16444, Low Voltage Motor Control Centers. D. Starters in control panels: 1. Install as specified in Section 17710, Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and Panel Components. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. B. Set all overloads and motor circuit protectors based on the nameplate values of the installed motor. 3.4 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Demonstrate operation of equipment as specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup: 1. Demonstrate the operation of every motor starter to the Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction. C. Training: 1. Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative for training purposes. 3.6 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16422 Motor Starters Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit panelboards. 2. Power Distribution Panelboards. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise • diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. c. Section 10400, Identifying Devices. d. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. e. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. f. Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. g. Section 16444, Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective device, accessory item, and component. 2. Manufacturer's shop drawings including dimensioned plan, section, and elevation for each panelboard type, enclosure, and general arrangement. • Clean Water Services 16442 Panelboards Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 3. Tabulation of features for each panelboard to include the • following: a. Protective devices with factory settings. b. Provisions for future protective devices. c. Space for future protective devices. d. Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings. e. Enclosure type. f. Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings. g. Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range. h. Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system voltage. i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary components. j. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 4. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. B. Informational Submittals: 1. As required by Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 1.3 SPARE PARTS • A. No spare parts are required. 1.4 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100. 1111 Clean Water Services 16442 Panelboards Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this Section shall be products of: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D Co. 4. Or approved equal. B. Panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as equipment furnished under Section 16444, Low-Voltage Motor Control Centers. 2.2 GENERAL A. Provide low voltage panelboards for application at 600 volts or less in accordance with this Section. B. Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and 411 UL 67. C. Wire Terminations: 1. Panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, shall be suitable for use with 75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NEC 75 degrees C conductor ampacity. 2. In accordance with UL 486E. D. Load Current Ratings: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard assemblies, including bus and circuit breakers, are noncontinuous as defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be 80 percent of noncontinuous rating. 2. Where indicated "continuous," "100 percent," etc., selected components and protective devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value shown. E. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment • short circuit rating for each panelboard assembly shall be no less than the SCCR indicated on Drawings. Clean Water Services 16442 Panelboards Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project F. Overcurrent Protective Devices: • 1. In accordance with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL 489. 2. Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation. a. Capable of device replacement without disturbing adjacent devices and without removing main bus. b. Spaces: Cover openings with easily removable cover. 3. Series-Connected Short Circuit Ratings: Devices shall be fully rated; series-connected ratings unacceptable. G. Circuit Breakers: 1. General: a. Thermal-magnetic unless otherwise indicated, b. Molded case, c. Trip indicating handle showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions. d. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles open and close simultaneously. e. Mechanically trip free from the handle. • f. Lockable in the "OFF" position. 2. Noninterchangeable: In accordance with NEC. 3. Bus Connection: Bolt-on circuit breakers in 480Y/277-volt, and plug-in circuit breakers in 208Y/120 and 240/120-volt branch circuit panelboards. 4. Trip Mechanism: a. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. b. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps. c. Two and three pole, common trip. • d. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. e. Test button on cover. f. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise. 5. Unacceptable Substitution: a. Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multi-pole breakers. b. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole spaces. • Clean Water Services 16442 Panelboards Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 6. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel). a. Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker. b. Push-to-test button. c. Reset button. 7. Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip breaker specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA ground fault (UL listed for equipment ground fault protection). H. Enclosures: Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures. I. Bus: 1. Material: Tin plated copper bus full sized throughout length. 2. Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as required for current and future positions. • J. Feeder Lugs: Main, feed-through, and neutral shall be replaceable, bolted mechanical or crimp compression type. K. Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box. 1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions. 2. Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors such as feeder, grounding electrode, etc. 3. Termination points shall be bolted crimp compression lugs for conductors 6 AWG and larger. L. Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of neutral conductors, and isolated from box. 1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions. 2. Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors. • 3. Termination points shall be bolted crimp compression lugs for conductors 6 AWG and larger. Clean Water Services 16442 Panelboards Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project M. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus • connections, and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings indicated. 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. NEMA 250 Type 1 Branch Panelboard Enclosure: 1. Front trim shall be secured to box with concealed trim clamps. 2. Surface-mount panelboard front trim shall have same dimensions as box. 3. Flush panelboards front trims shall overlap box nominal 3/4-inch on all sides. 4. Door in panelboard front trim, with concealed hinges, shall provide access to protective device operating handles. 5. Doors over 30 inches in height shall have multi-point latching. 6. Door lock shall be secure with flush catch and tumbler lock; all panelboards keyed alike, with two milled keys each lock. 7. Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and enclosed card, mounted inside • each panel door. 2.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Branch Protective Devices: 1. Locking: Furnish devices with provisions for handle padlocking. 2. Load Connections: Wire lugs shall be mechanical or crimp compression type, removable/replaceable, and suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating switch nor conductor ampacity. 3. Provide a nameplate for each circuit, blanks for spares. • Clean Water Services 16442 Panelboards Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1 and manufacturers' written installation instructions. B. Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls. C. Install top of cabinet trim 78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown. Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than 78 inches above the floor. D. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA289. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle, and wrap with nylon wire ties. 3.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD • A. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard. 3.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD A. Provide engraved identification for each protective device. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16442 Panelboards Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 16444 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage motor control centers. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with • the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. e. Section 16123, 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables. f. Section 16150, Low Voltage Wire Connections. g. Section 16262, Variable Frequency Drives 0.50-50 Horsepower. h. Section 16305, Electrical System Studies. i. Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. j. Section 16422, Motor Starters. k. Section 17710, Control Systems- Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components. 1.2 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 18-2001 - Motor Control Centers. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): • 1. 845 - Motor Control Centers. Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.3 DEFINITIONS • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Factory assembled, factory wired and factory tested motor control centers: 1. Motor control centers and major components to be products of a single manufacturer including, but not limited: a. Starters. b. VFD. c. Related equipment specified in the Contract Documents or indicated on the Drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of motor control center. 2. Manufacturer of motor control center parts. 3. Nameplate schedule. • 4. Bill of material. 5. Enclosure: a. NEMA rating. b. Finish color. 6. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Current: 1) Horizontal bus ampacity. 2) Vertical bus ampacity. 3) Ground bus ampacity. d. Short circuit withstand rating. e. Protective device interrupting rating. 7. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. 8. Catalog cut sheets: a. Submit complete manufacturer's catalog information: 1) Clearly indicate the features of the equipment including any options necessary to meet the required functionality. 9. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 10. Submit a letter confirming each variable frequency drive (VFD) unit contained within the MCC has been coordinated with its respective driven load. Letter shall list VFD location and driven equipment tag • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • numbers as well as the FLA rating of each driven load motor. Motor data sheets for each driven load motor shall be attached to the coordination letter for verification. 11. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical: a. Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. b. Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. 12. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. C. Shop drawings: 1. Layout drawings: a. Provide fully dimensioned and to scale layout drawings which include: 1) Dimensions: a) Overall length. b) Overall width. c) Overall height. d) Overall weight and weight of individual shipping splits. 2. Interfaces to other equipment. • 3. Shipping splits. 4. Allowable top and bottom conduit windows. 5. Complete component and unit layout drawings. 6. Indicate lug sizes, type, and manufacturer based on the cable size specified in the Contract Documents and as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Elementary schematics: a. Provide one custom schematic diagram for each compartment: 1) Include all remote devices. 2) Show wire numbers on the schematics: a) Provide wire numbering as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 8. External connection diagram showing the wiring to the external controls and devices associated with the motor control center. 9. One-line diagrams: a. Provide complete one-line diagrams for each motor control center, including but not limited to: protective devices, starters, drives, metering, and other equipment. b. Indicate electrical ratings of the equipment shown on the one-line diagrams. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 D. Installation instructions: • 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. 3. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of all types of equipment furnished and/or installed under this Section. Include the following: 111 a. Electrical ratings: 1) Phase. 2) Wire. 3) Voltage. 4) Ampacity. 5) Bus bracing and protective device interrupting ratings. b. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions for the motor control center and all component parts, including: 1) Starters. 2) Overload relays and heater elements. 3) Variable frequency drives. 4) Protective devices including, but not limited to, fuses, circuit breakers and protective relays. 5) Pilot devices. c. Complete renewal parts list. F. Record Documents: 1. Elementary schematics: a. Furnish as-built elementary schematics indicating final: 1) Wire numbers. 2) Interfaces with other equipment. b. Provide one custom schematic diagram for each compartment: 1) Include all remote devices. • 2) Show wire numbers on the schematics. Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • c. Layout drawings: Provide complete dimensioned component and unit layout drawings. 2. The Record Documents shall reflect all modifications made during the submittal review process and during construction. G. Calculations: 1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the motor control center to prove the motor control center is suitable for the seismic requirements at the Project Site. 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. No spare parts are required. 1.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. IDB. All portions of the motor control center, vertical bays, and components shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Ship the motor control center and associated equipment to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment. 1.10 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305, Electrical System Studies and submit results for Engineer's review. B. After successful review of the initial fault current study, as specified in • Section 16305, Electrical System Studies, submit complete equipment Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 submittal as specified in the Submittals article of this Section for • Engineer's review. C. Conduct internal factory test to ensure that systems and equipment are functional and submit certified test results for Engineer's review. D. Conduct factory acceptance test, to be witnessed by Owner and Owner's representative. E. Ship equipment to the Project Site after successful completion of factory acceptance test. F. Assemble equipment in the field. G. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for Engineer's review. H. Submit manufacturer's certification that the equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for Engineer's review. I. Conduct Owner's training sessions. J. Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment. 4111 1.12 SCHEDULING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.13 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.14 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Allen-Bradley 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. Siemens. 4. Schneider Electric/Square D. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2.2 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Existing motor control centers: 1. Provide complete motor control center vertical sections or individual motor control center units to be added to existing motor control centers as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide additions that are of the same manufacturer, type, rating, and color as the existing motor control centers: a. Provide all hardware necessary to connect the busses of the new and existing motor control centers, including ground and neutral busses. 3. Provide enclosures to match the NEMA ratings and colors of the existing motor control centers. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Furnish motor control centers as specified in the Contract Documents and indicated on the Drawings. 2. Arrange the equipped sections side by side and/or back-to- back to form continuous motor control center lineups as • indicated on the Drawings: a. Identify any deviations from the Drawings in writing and submit for approval. 3. Provide wire markers at each end of every wire as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 4. Provide complete and functional motor control centers. 5. Provide devices or accessories not specified in this Section but necessary for the proper installation and operation of the equipment. 6. Provide new components of the latest construction series available from the manufacturer. B. Design and construct motor control center to operate at the voltage level and configuration indicated on the Drawings. C. Bus system: 1. Material: a. Tin-plated copper. b. Short-circuit rating: 1) As indicated on the Drawings. c. Bus bar supports: 1) High impact strength, non-tracking glass-polyester material that is impervious to moisture and gases. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Horizontal power bus: • a. Current-carrying capacity as indicated on the Drawings. b. Mounting: 1) Mount horizontal bus bars edgewise, one above the other, and fully isolated from all wireways and units. c. Temperature rise: 1) In accordance with UL 845. 2) De-rate the temperature rating of the bus for the specified conditions of ambient temperature and altitude as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3. Vertical power bus: a. Current-carrying capacity of not less than 300 amps. b. Mounting: 1) Enclose the vertical bus in a polyester-glass cover with small openings to permit unit stabs to mate with the bus: a) Provide a shutter mechanism to cover the stab openings when plug-in units are removed. 2) Provide top and bottom bus covers for insulation and isolation of the ends of the bus. c. Isolated from the unit compartments by a full height barrier. d. All unused space shall be covered by hinged blank doors and equipped to accept future units. 4. Ground bus: 111 a. Horizontal ground bus: 1) Current-carrying capacity of not less than 300 amps. 2) Mounting: a) Full-width, firmly secured to each vertical section structure: (1) Located in the top or bottom wireway. b) Pre-drilled and furnished with lugs for connection to equipment ground wires: (1) Furnish a minimum of 10 lugs per vertical section of MCC. b. Vertical ground bus. 1) Mounting: a) Furnish in each vertical section. b) Bolted to the horizontal ground bus. c) Install parallel to the vertical power bus. d) Mount vertical ground bus such that plug-in units engage the ground bus before any connection to the power bus is made. Upon removal of plug-in units, ground stabs are disconnected from the ground bus after the power stabs have been disconnected. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 5. Bus splice bars: a. Provided to join the bus at the splits. b. Connected to each horizontal bus bar with a minimum of two bolts. c. Employ conical or spring washers at connections, designed to maintain constant pressure against the splice joint. d. Same ampacity rating as the horizontal bus. 6. Provide bus system configured for back-to-back MCCs, where required. D. Enclosures: 1. Each motor control center shall consist of 1 or more vertical sections bolted together: a. Freestanding. b. Totally enclosed. c. Dead-front assembly. d. Designed for modification and/or addition of future vertical sections. e. Form each vertical section of heavy gauge steel. f. Designed for back-to-back arrangement installation, where required and/or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Enclosure rating: a. Indoor: 1) NEMA Type 1 gasketed. • 3. Standard section dimensions: a. Nominal height: 90 inches. b. Nominal depth: 20 inches. c. Nominal width: 20 inches. 4. Wireways: a. Provide each vertical section with a horizontal wireway at the top and bottom of the section: 1) Arranged to provide a full-width metal enclosed wiring trough across the entire motor control center assembly. b. Provide each vertical section with a full-height vertical wireway. c. Completely isolated from the vertical and horizontal bus bars. d. Provide a removable, hinged door. 5. Shipping splits: a. No more than 3 vertical sections and not more than 60 inches in width. b. Solid bussing between vertical sections in a shipping split is not acceptable. 6. Lifting angles: a. Furnish each vertical section and/or shipping split with a removable lifting angle mounted to the top of the enclosure: 1) Extending the entire width of the shipping split. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 7. Mounting channels: • a. Mount each vertical section and/or shipping split on an external 1.5-inch by 3-inch mounting channel. E. Units: 1. A plug-in unit consists of: a. Unit assembly. b. Unit support pan. c. Unit door assembly. 2. Completely enclosed and isolated from adjacent units, buses, and wireways, except for conductor entries into the unit, by a metal enclosure. 3. Constructed so that any fault will be contained in the unit compartment. 4. Supported and guided by a removable unit support pan: a. Re-arrangement of units and the removal of a unit so that a new and possibly larger unit can be added without the removal of an in-service unit to gain access to the unit support pan. 5. Held in place by screws or other positive locking means after insertion. 6. Provide a test position with the unit supported in the structure but disengaged from the bus. 7. Integral plug-in ground stab. 8. Stabs: a. Free floating. b. Self-aligning. II/ c. Backed by spring steel clips to ensure high pressure contacts: d. Electrolytically tin-plated copper. 9. Handle: a. Provide a flange mounted handle mechanism to operate each disconnect switch or circuit breaker. b. Door mounted operators or operator handles are not acceptable. c. Engaged with the disconnect device at all times as an integral part of the unit independent of the door position. d. Lockable in the "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks. e. Mechanically interlocked so that the door cannot be opened with the handle in the "ON" position. 1) Provide a means for qualified personnel to defeat this interlock. f. Interlocked so the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn with the handle in the "ON" position. g. Lockable in the "ON" position: 1) This shall not prevent the circuit breaker from operating and opening the contacts in the event of a fault condition. h. Color-coded to indicate position. i. Located so the center of the grip when it is in its highest position is not more than 6 feet 7 inches above the finished floor, including the height of the housekeeping pad and mounting channels. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 10. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide units for spaces 4110 and future equipment: a. Equip these units to accept a future plug-in unit without modification to the vertical sections. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Provide components contained within the motor control center as specified in: 1. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2. Section 16123, 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables. 3. Section 16150, Low Voltage Wire Connections. 4. Section 16262, Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-50 Horsepower. 5. Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 6. Section 16422, Motor Starters. 7. Section 17710, Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and Components. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Wiring: 1. Wire the motor control center in accordance with the following NEMA Class and Type as defined by NEMA ICS 18-2001: 411 a. NEMA Class II-S: 1) Furnish wiring diagrams for individual units consisting of drawings that identify electrical devices, electrical connections, and indicate terminal numbering designations. 2) Furnish individual unit diagrams with each unit and include inter- wiring between units, i.e. electrical interlocking, etc., as specifically specified in the Contract Documents. 3) Provide custom drawings with unique terminal numbering designations in lieu of standard manufacturer drawings. b. NEMA Type B wiring: 1) Control wiring: a) Type B-T pull-apart terminal blocks. 2) Power wiring: a) Type B-T for Size 1 starters. b) Type B-T or B-D for Size 2 and 3 starters. c) Type B for Size 4 and larger starters and feeder units. B. Lugs and terminals: 1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG wire or larger: a. UL listed for copper or aluminum conductors. 2. Compression type, requiring a hydraulic press and die for installation. 411 3. Provide 20 percent spare control block terminals. Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 C. Nameplates: • 1. Provide nameplates as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification: a. Identifying the motor control center designation as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Identifying each vertical section: a. Mounted and centered on the top horizontal wireway of the vertical section. 3. Furnish individual nameplates for each unit indicated on the Drawings: a. 1 nameplate to identify the unit designation. b. 1 nameplate to identify the load served. c. Furnish space units with blank nameplates. 4. Manufacturer's labels: a. Furnish each vertical section with a label identifying: 1) Serial number. 2) Bus rating. 3) Vertical section reference number. 4) Date of manufacture. 5) Catalog number of section. D. Pilot devices: a. Refer to Section 17710, Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and Components. b. Provide 30mm size for all pilot devices. • c. Provide LED lights for all pilot lights. i 2.6 FINISHES A. Finish metal surfaces and structural parts with phosphatizing, or equal, treatment before painting. B. Finish interior surfaces including bus support angles, control unit back plates, and top and bottom barrier plates with baked white enamel. C. Finish exterior of enclosure with manufacturer's standard gray. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • C. General: 1. Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other accessories necessary to completely install the motor control center for the line, load, and control connections. 2. Assemble and install the motor control center in the locations and with the layouts as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Make bus splice connections. 4. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and shop drawings. 5. Furnish all components, and equipment necessary to complete the installation. 6. Replace hardware, lost or damaged during installation or handling, in order to provide a complete installation. 7. Install the MCC on a 3-1/2-inch raised concrete housekeeping pad: a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units. 1) Remove the manufacturer's supplied mounting channels as required by the manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Weld and/or bolt the motor control center frame to leveling channels. D. Provide openings in the top or bottom of the motor control center for conduit • only. 1. No additional openings will be accepted: a. Mis-cut holes will require that the entire vertical section or removable panel be replaced. b. No hole closers or patches will be accepted. E. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit: 1. Tie with nylon wire ties as specified in Section 16123, 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables. 2. Label all wires at each end with wire markers as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification as shown on the approved elementary schematics. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative to: 1. Inspect, verify, and certify that the motor control center installation meets the manufacturer's requirements. • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.3 ADJUSTING • A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. 3.4 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Demonstrate the operation of the motor control center to the Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction. C. Training: 1. Provide training for motor control center components as specified in the individual component specifications. 3.6 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16444 Low Voltage Durham AWWTF Secondary -14- Motor Control Centers Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 . SECTION 16460 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. Low Voltage Transformers. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed 1111 Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. c. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. d. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. e. Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding. f. Section 16075, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Descriptive information. 2. Dimensions and weight. 3. Transformer nameplate data. 4. Schematic and connection diagrams. 5. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets. 6. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. • Clean Water Services 16460 Low Voltage Transformers Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.3 SPARE PARTS • A. No spare parts are required. 1.4 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated. B. Dry-type, self-cooled, two-winding, with copper windings. C. Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. D. Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Table 4.2 of NEMA TP 1. E. Maximum Sound Level per NEMA ST 20: • 1. 40 decibels for 0 kVA to 9 kVA. 2. 45 decibels for 10 kVA to 50 kVA. F. Overload Capability: Short-term overload per IEEE C57.96. G. Vibration Isolators: 1. Rated for transformer's weight. 2. Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound emitted by transformer. 3. Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external vibration isolators. 4. 30 kVA and Above: Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer enclosure with integral vibration isolator. H. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Square D Co. 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. • Clean Water Services 16460 Low Voltage Transformers Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2.2 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER A. Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard. B. Core and Coil: 1. Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 kVA to 25 kVA and for three- phase units 3 kVA to 15 kVA. 2. Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above. C. Enclosure: 1. Single-Phase, 3 kVA to 25 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 2. Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 3. Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. D. Voltage Taps: • 1. Single-Phase, 3 kVA to 10 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. 2. Single-Phase, 15 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. 3. Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. 4. Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. E. Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger. • Clean Water Services 16460 Low Voltage Transformers Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA and manufacturer's instructions. B. Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in direct contact with mounting surface. C. Provide moisture-proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections. D. Connect voltage taps to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under normal plant load conditions. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 16460 Low Voltage Transformers Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 16510 LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: LED luminaires, drivers, poles, and accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. • C. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA): 1. LM-79 - IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products. 2. LM-80 - IES Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. 3. TM-21 - Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1598 - Luminaires. 2. 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment For Use In Lighting Products. • Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.03 DEFINITIONS • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. CCT: Correlated color temperature - Scientific scale to describe how "warm" or how "cool" the light source is, measured in Kelvin. The lower the Kelvin temperature, the warmer the light feels, or appears. 2. CRI: Color Rendering Index - A quantitative measure of the ability of a light source to reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or natural light source. 3. Driver - Device that manages power and controls the current flow from AC to DC for an LED lighting product. 4. Efficacy - Lumen output of a light source per unit of power supplied to that source (lumens per watt). 5. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference - Electrical interference (noise) generated by electrical and electronic devices. 6. FC: Foot Candles - Measure of light level on a surface being illuminated. 7. L70 - The extrapolated life in hours of the luminaire when the luminous output depreciates 30 percent from initial values. 8. LED: Light emitting diode - A solid-state semiconductor device that produces light when electrical current flows through it. • 9. LED light source - See LED luminaire. 10. LED luminaire - A complete lighting unit consisting of LED-based light emitting elements and a matched driver together with parts to distribute light, to position and protect the light emitting elements, and to connect the unit to a branch circuit. 11. Lumen - The international (SI) unit of luminous flux or quantity of light. The amount of light that is spread over a square foot of surface by one candle power when all parts of the surface are exactly one foot from the light source. 12. Lumen ambient temperature multiplier - LED light source relative lumen output when compared to a standard ambient temperature. 13. Lumen maintenance factor - How well an LED light source is able to retain its intensity when compared to new. 14. Luminaire - Lighting unit. 15. THD: Total harmonic distortion - The combined effect of harmonic Distortion on the AC waveform produced by a driver or other device. • Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide luminaires, and accessories for all lighting systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Individual luminaire types are indicated on the Drawings and on the Luminaire Schedule. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Product data: 1. LED Luminaires: a. Catalog literature for each luminaire specified, cross- referenced to the luminaire type on the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings. b. Provide for each luminaire type: 1) Materials. 2) Type of diffuser. 3) Hardware. • 4) Gasketing. 5) Reflector. 6) Chassis. 7) Finish and color. 8) Driver type and protection. 9) LED luminaire: a) Initial lumen output at 40 degrees Celsius ambient. b) Correlated color temperature. c) Lumen maintenance factors. d) Lumen ambient temperature multipliers. e) Drive current. f) Efficacy. 10) Picture of luminaire. 11) Dimensioned drawings: a) Effective projected area rating for pole mounted luminaires. 12) Weight. 13) Photometric data: a) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity system by an approved testing laboratory. b) Luminaire dirt depreciation factor. c) Candlepower distribution curves. • d) Average luminaire brightness. e) Lumen output charts. Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 14) Furnish support method for interior luminaires weighing more than 30 pounds and all wall-mounted luminaires: • a) Support methods shall be based on seismic requirements at the project site as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. c. Luminaire substitutions: 1) Provide complete literature for each luminaire substitution: 2) Submittals for substituted luminaires shall be sufficient for competent comparison of the proposed luminaire to the originally specified luminaire: a) Photometric data: (1) IES file in standard IES format. (2) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity system by an approved testing laboratory. (3) Candlepower distribution curves. (4) Average luminaire brightness. (5) Lumen output charts. (6) Power requirements in watts and volt-amperes. b) Calculations: (1) Provide software generated calculations showing illuminance levels in footcandles and • power usage in watts per square foot for each of the areas in which substitutions are proposed: (a) Use surface reflectance values and luminaire light loss factors approved by the Engineer to perform all calculations. c) Specification sheets: (1) If lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with contract documents, standard specification sheets will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to, luminaire type designation, manufacturer's complete catalog number, voltage, LED type, CCT, CRI, specific driver information, system efficacy, L70 life rating, and any modifications necessary to meet the requirements of the contract documents. 3) Substitutions for specified luminaires will be evaluated upon quality of construction, light distribution, energy use, appearance, and maintenance. 4) Substitutions shall comply with all applicable building and energy codes. • Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2. Driver: Provide for each driver type: a. Catalog number. b. Type of driver. c. Output wattage. d. Input voltage. e. Operating voltage range. f. Maximum input power. g. Efficiency. h. Operating line current. i. Power factor. j. Operating temperature range. k. Current output range in ambient temperatures of 30 degrees Celsius to 55 degrees Celsius. I. Surge suppression data. 3. Luminaire poles: a. Submit complete data for each pole type including but not limited to: 1) Material. 2) Finish and color. 3) Handholes. 4) Anchoring. 5) Luminaire attachment methods and fittings. • 6) Pole height. 7) Pole dimensions. 8) Bolt hole circle layout and hardware. 9) Accessories. 10) Provide the EPA wind load rating. C. Calculations: 1. Provide complete design calculations and installation documents for pole mounting piers and poles mounted from structures: a. Include in the calculations the wind and seismic requirements at the project site. b. Calculations and design shall be performed by and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the project is being constructed: D. List of manufacturer recommended spare parts. E. Record documents: 1. Update the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings to reflect the acceptable substitutions, after the substitution has been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 1.06 SPARE PARTS • A. No spare parts are required. Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.09 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.10 SCHEDULING A. Exterior and outdoor lighting system operation shall be demonstrated during the hours of darkness. B. Lighting demonstration shall occur within 2 weeks before substantial completion. 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. LED luminaire: • 1. 5 year warranty from the date of installation including material, workmanship, photometrics, driver, and LED modules. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.13 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish 1 complete spare LED luminaire, with driver, of each type used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Luminaires: One of the following or equal: 1. As noted on the Luminaire Schedule. B. Drivers: One of the following or equal: 1. Philips Advance. 2. Thomas Research. • 3. eldoLED. Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Timer Controls: One of the following • or equal: 1. Intermatic. D. Substitutions: 1. The lighting design and luminaire selection has been based upon the photometric data of the identified luminaire. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure and prove to the Engineer at time of submittal the substitutions meet the quality and photometric requirements of the original design. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. LED Luminaires: 1. General: a. Pre-wired with leads of 18-AWG, minimum, for connection to building circuits. b. Provide the luminaires furnished per the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings: 1) The Specifications noted herein are an addition or supplement to the Luminaire Schedule. c. Individual LEDs connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of 1 LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. • 2. Minimum ambient temperature range of 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius. 3. Minimum rated life: a. Office Areas: 70,000 hours when operated at 25 degrees Celsius. b. Process Areas: 60,000 hours when operated at 40 degrees Celsius. 4. Minimum efficacy of 70 lumens/watt. 5. Minimum Color Rendering Index of 70. 6. Tested according to IESNA LM-79 and LM-80. 7. Lumen maintenance projection in accordance with IESNA TM-21. 8. RoHS compliant. 9. Integral driver. 10. Suitable for dry, damp, or wet locations as indicated on the Drawings or on the Luminaire Schedule. a. Wet or damp locations: UL 1598 listed. 11. Designed as a complete LED assembly. Retrofit LED lamps in luminaires not designed specifically for LED light sources shall not be used. 12. Provide with integral photocell. • Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 13. Exterior/outdoor luminaires: • a. Luminaires in combination with their mounting pole and bracket shall be capable of withstanding: 1) Wind levels at the project site without damage. 2) Seismic levels at the project site. b. Corrosion-resistant hardware and hinged doors or lens retainer. c. Luminaires furnished with integral photoelectrical control shall be of the luminaire manufacturer's standard design. B. Timer Controls: 1. Outdoor lights shall be controlled from one astronomical timer inside the lighting contactor located in the Electrical Room. 2. Indoor lighting shall be controlled from 2-hour timers located at the entry to each area. 3. Where indoor light fixtures in one area are powered by multiple 120V circuits, the lights shall be controlled from the lighting contactor located in the Electrical Room. 4. 2-hour timers shall be Intermatic FF32H or approved equal. C. Drivers: 1. Input power source: a. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Drive current: • a. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 3. Power factor: greater than 0.90. 4. Efficiency: greater than 80 percent. 5. Total harmonic distortion (THD) of the input current less than 20 percent. 6. Rated life of 60,000 hours in an LED luminaire operated at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. 7. Minimum operating temperature of-40 degrees Celsius. 8. Sound rating: Class A+ or quieter. 9. UL listed Class 2 Outdoor in accordance with UL 8750. 10. In accordance with IEEE C62.41 Category A for transient protection. 11. Driver must limit inrush current: a. Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard: 1) 230 Amps per 10 Amp load with a maximum of 106 Amps squared-seconds at 120V. 2) 430 Amps per 10 Amp load with a maximum of 370 Amps squared-seconds at 277V. • Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2.03 COMPONENTS • A. Luminaire poles: 1. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. 2. Anchor bolts: a. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic and wind forces. 1) Standard hex bolt head. 2) Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J-shape. b. Complete with leveling shims. 3. Anchor base: a. Fabricated from the same type of material as the pole shaft. b. Base plate to telescope the pole shaft. c. Welded top and bottom along the entire perimeter. d. With slotted bolt holes on the bolt circles as submitted. 4. Pole shaft: a. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. 5. Handhole: a. Reinforced handhole located approximately 18 inches above the base. b. Complete with cover fabricated from the same material as the pole shaft and stainless steel attachment screws. 110 c. With an integral ground connection nut, 1/2 inch by 13 inch UNC welded to the pole for connection to the grounding system. 6. Shroud: a. Fabricated from the same type of material as the pole shaft. b. 1-piece formed channel section that shall conform to the pole shaft taper. c. Secured by a locking device with provisions for a padlock to prevent accidental lowering. 7. Fastening hardware: a. All fasteners shall be stainless steel. 8. Finish: a. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pole mounted receptacle: 1. Where indicated, furnish a 20A GFCI receptacle: a. Integrally mounted in the pole shaft at 18 inches above the base. b. Complete with corrosion resistant and weatherproof cover. • Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Install luminaires per the manufacturer's guidelines and submitted installation calculations to meet seismic and wind requirements at the project site. C. Luminaire poles: 1. Set poles on anchor bolts and secured with double nuts on each bolt. 2. Dry-pack the pole base, after the luminaire and pole has been leveled and plumbed. 3. Bond metal poles to the plant grounding system, utilizing a ground lug connection within the pole: a. Route ground conductor through pier and pole base sleeve using Schedule 40 PVC conduit. 3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Aim and verify all exterior and outdoor luminaires alignment, during dark evening hours, as directed by Owner or the Engineer. 3.05 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Clean all lenses, diffusers, and reflectors. C. Refinish all luminaires' trim, poles and support brackets, where finish has been damaged. D. Clean all LED luminaires (new and old), used during construction for construction lighting, before substantial completion. E. Clean and re-lamp all existing fluorescent and HID luminaires used during construction for construction lighting, before substantial completion. • Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3.06 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Refer to the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings. END OF SECTION Clean Water Services 16510 Lighting: LED Luminaries Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project This Page Intentionally Blank • SECTION 16950 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Responsibilities for testing the electrical installation. 2. Adjusting and calibration. 3. Acceptance tests. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience • only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding. C. Copyright information: 1. Some portions of this Section are copyrighted by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for details. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 877 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes. 2. D 923 - Standard Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating 111) Liquids. Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3. D 971 -Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil • Against Water by the Ring Method. 4. D 974 - Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator Titration. 5. D 1298 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method. 6. D 1500 - Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM Color Scale). 7. D 1524 - Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field. 8. D 1816 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using VDE Electrodes. 9. D 2285 - Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Against Water by the Drop Weight Method. 10. D 3612 - Standard Test Method for Analysis of Gases Dissolved in Electrical Insulating Oil by Gas Chromatography. D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 2. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding • System. 3. 95 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2300 V and Above) With High Direct Voltage. 4. 421.3 - IEEE Standard for High-Potential Test Requirement for Excitation Systems for Synchronous Machines. 5. 450 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications. 6. 1106 - IEEE Recommended Prictice for Installation, Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Nickel- Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications. 7. 1188 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid (VRLA) Batteries for Stationary Applications. 8. C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. 9. C57.13.1 — IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers. 10. C57.13.3 - IEEE Guide for Grounding of Instrument Transformer Secondary Circuits and Cases. 11. C57.104 - IEEE Guide for the Interpretation of Gases Generated in Oil-Immersed Transformers. • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • E. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA). F. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1 . ATS-2009 Standard for Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and S stems. PY G. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). H. Manufacturer's testing recommendations and instruction manuals. I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. J. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). K. Specification sections for the electrical equipment being tested. L. Shop drawings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. • B. Specific definitions: 1. Testing laboratory: The organization performing acceptance tests. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Testing of all electrical equipment installed under this Contract in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and as specified in this Section. B. Conduct all tests in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineer's representative: 1. The Engineer will witness all visual, mechanical and electrical tests and inspections. C. The testing and inspections shall verify that the equipment is operational within the tolerances required and expected by the manufacturer, and these Specifications. D. Responsibilities: 1. Contractor responsibilities: a. Ensure that all resources are made available for testing, and • that all testing requirements are met. Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Electrical subcontractor responsibilities: • a. Perform routine tests during installation. b. Demonstrate operation of electrical equipment. c. Commission the electrical installation. d. Provide the necessary services during testing, and provide these services to the testing laboratory, Contractor, and other subcontractors, including but not limited to: 1) Providing electrical power as required. 2) Operating of electrical equipment in conjunction with testing of other equipment. 3) Activating and shutting down electrical circuits. 4) Making and recording electrical measurements. 5) Replacing blown fuses. 6) Installing temporary jumpers. 3. Testing laboratory responsibilities: a. Perform all acceptance tests specified in this Section. b. Provide all required equipment, materials, labor, and technical support during acceptance tests. E. Upon completion of testing or calibration, attach a label to all serviced devices: 1. The label shall indicate the date serviced and the company that performed the service. 1.05 SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Manufacturers' testing procedures: 1. Submit manufacturers' recommended testing procedures and acceptable test results for review by the Engineer. C. Test report: 1. Include the following: a. Summary of Project. b. Description of equipment tested. c. Description of tests performed. d. Test results. e. Conclusions and recommendations. f. Completed test forms. g. List of test equipment used and calibration dates. D. Testing laboratory qualifications: 1. Submit a complete resume and statement of qualifications from the proposed testing laboratory detailing their experiences in performing the tests specified: • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 a. This statement will be used to determine whether the • laboratory is acceptable, and shall include: 1) Corporate history and references. 2) Resume of individual performing test. 3) Equipment list and test calibration data. E. Division of responsibilities: 1. Submit a list identifying who is responsible for performing each portion of the testing. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. Testing laboratory qualifications: 1. The testing laboratory may be qualified testing personnel from the electrical subcontractor's staff or an independent testing company. 2. Selection of the testing laboratory and testing personnel is subject to approval by the Engineer based on testing experience and certifications of the individuals and testing capabilities of the organization. 1.07 PROJECTOR SITE CONDITIONS • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, submit the manufacturer's complete field testing procedures to the Engineer and to the testing laboratory, complete with expected test results and tolerances for all equipment to be tested. B. Perform testing in the following sequence: 1. Perform routine tests as the equipment is installed including: a. Insulation-resistance tests. b. Continuity tests. c. Rotational tests. 2. Adjusting and preliminary calibration. 3. Acceptance tests. 4. Demonstration. 5. Commissioning and plant start-up. 1.09 WARRANTY • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Test instrument calibration: 1. Utilize a testing laboratory with a calibration program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. 2. The accuracy shall be traceable to the NIST in an unbroken chain. 3. Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency schedule: a. Field instruments: 6 months maximum. b. Laboratory instruments: 12 months maximum. c. Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the lessor (such as Doble): 12 months maximum. 4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. 5. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration record for each test instrument: a. The records shall show the date and results of each • calibration or test. 6. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for each test instrument. B. Do not begin testing until the following conditions have been met: 1. All instruments required are available and in proper operating condition. 2. All required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags, and brushes are available. 3. All equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls and other lifting equipment are available or scheduled. 4. All instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the electrical devices are available. 5. Data sheets to record all test results are available. 3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY START-UP A. As specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Low voltage cables, 600 volt maximum: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: • a. Compare cable data with the Drawings and Specifications. Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • b. Inspect exposed sections of cable for physical damage and correct connection as indicated on the Drawings. c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by 1 of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot- pound levels or NETA ATS tables. d. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangement. f. Inspect cable jacket insulation and condition. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors: 1) Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. 2) Test duration shall be 1 minute. c. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection. • d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. 2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum. c. Cable shall exhibit continuity. d. Investigate deviations in resistance between parallel conductors. B. Low voltage molded case and insulated case circuit breakers: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage and alignment. • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 d. Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing • and operating the breaker. e. Verify the unit is clean. f. Verify the arc chutes are intact. g. Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition and alignment. h. Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct. i. Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and its operating mechanism in accordance with manufacturers published data. j. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. k. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot- pound levels or NETA ATS tables. I. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units. m. Verify cell fit and element alignment. 111 n. Verify racking mechanism operation. o. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. p. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the coordination study. q. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole: 1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 2) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500 VDC for 300-volt rated cable and 1,000 VDC for 600-volt rated cable. Apply the test voltage for 1 minute: 1) For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer's recommendation. • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 e. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current 410 injection. f. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. g. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection. h. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection. i. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection. j. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with manufacturer's published data. k. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, antipump function and trip unit battery condition: 1) Reset all trip logs and indicators. I. Verify operation of charging mechanism. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar • bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. 2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum. d. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer's published data: 1) If manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. e. Insulation-resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than 2 megohms. f. Long-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer's published • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 time-current characteristic tolerance band including adjustment factors: • 1) If manufacturer's curves are not available, trip times shall not exceed the value shown in NETA ATS tables. g. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band. h. Ground fault pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band. i. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. j. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be within manufacturer's published tolerances. k. Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall conform to the manufacturer's published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. I. Breaker open, close, trip, trip-free, antipump, and auxiliary features shall function as designed. m. The charging mechanism shall operate in accordance with manufacturer's published data. • C. Grounding systems: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Inspect ground system for compliance with that indicated on the Drawings, specified in Specifications, and in the NEC. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot- pound levels or NETA ATS tables. d. Inspect anchorage. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform fall of potential test or alternative test in accordance with IEEE 81 on the main grounding electrode or system. c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • equipment frames, the system neutral and any derived neutral points. 3. Test values: a. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of corrosion. b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. d. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall be as specified in Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm. D. Variable frequency drive systems: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. • b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Ensure vent path openings are free from debris and that heat transfer surfaces are clean. f. Verify correct connections of circuit boards, wiring, disconnects, and ribbon cables. g. Motor running protection: 1) Verify drive overcurrent setpoints are correct for their application. 2) If drive is used to operate multiple motors, verify individual overload element ratings are correct for their application. 3) Apply minimum and maximum speed setpoints. Verify setpoints are within limitations of the load coupled to the motor. h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot- ., pound levels or NETA ATS tables. Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 i. Verify correct fuse sizing in accordance with manufacturer's published data. • j. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of input circuit breaker as specified in this Section. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter. b. Test the motor overload relay elements by injecting primary current through the overload circuit and monitoring trip time of the overload element or as recommended by the manufacturer. c. Test for the following parameters in accordance with relay calibration procedures specified in this Section or as recommended by the manufacturer: 1) Input phase loss protection. 2) Input overvoltage protection. 3) Output phase rotation. 4) Overtemperature protection. 5) Direct current overvoltage protection. 6) Overfrequency protection. 7) Drive overload protection. 8) Fault alarm outputs. d. Perform continuity tests on bonding conductors as specified in this Section. • e. Perform start-up of drive in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Calibrate drive to the system's minimum and maximum speed control signals. f. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices: 1) Slowly vary drive speed between minimum and maximum. Observe motor and load for unusual noise or vibration. 2) Verify operation of drive from remote start/stop and speed control signals. g. Perform electrical tests of input circuit breaker as specified in this Section. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 c. Overload test trip times at 300 percent of overload element • rating shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published time-current curve. d. Test values for input circuit breaker shall be as specified in this Section. e. Relay calibration results shall be as specified in this Section. f. Continuity of bonding conductors shall be as specified in this Section. g. Control devices shall perform in accordance with system requirements. h. Operational tests shall conform to system design requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. B. After the acceptance tests have been completed, dispose of all testing expendables, vacuum all cabinets, and sweep clean all surrounding areas. 3.05 PROTECTION • A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 16950 Field Electrical Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- Acceptance Tests Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • Section 17050 • BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A: Section Includes: 1. This Section includes general design, material, equipment fabrication, calibration, testing, commissioning, training and documentation requirements for instrumentation and control systems. 2. Additional or more stringent requirements, when given in other Sections, shall prevail. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. American National Standards Institute/American Petroleum Institute • (ANSI/API): 1. API RP550 - Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems. 2. ANSI/API 551-1992 - Process Measurement Instrumentation. C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. D. International Society of Automation (ISA): 1. ISA S5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 2. ISA S5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic and Computer Systems. 3. ISA S5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams. 4. ISA S5.5 s.- Grahic Symbols for Process Displays. p Y p Y 5. ISA RP7.1 - Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test. 6. ISA S7.3 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air. 7. ISA S12.4 - Instrument Purging for Reduction of Hazardous Area Classification. 8. ISA S18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 9. ISA S20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. • 10. ISA S51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology. Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 11. ISA RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers. • 12. ISA S71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Airborne Contaminants. E. Milspec: 1. MIL-I-46058C - Electrical Insulating Compound. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 3. NFPA 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. H. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): 1. SAMA PMC-5 - Resistance Thermometers. 2. SAMA PMC-6 - Filled System Thermometers. 3. SAMA PMC-8 - Thermocouple Thermometers. 4. SAMA PMC-17 - Bushings and Wells for Temperature Sensing Elements. 411 I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Where a term is used in Specification Section number series 17000 through 17999 relating to instrumentation, and the meaning is not defined therein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the meaning of the term shall be as defined in ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology, or if not contained in ISA 51.1, as defined in listed reference standards under "References." B. PAT: 1. Performance Acceptance Test. C. Panel: 1. An instrument support system which may be a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the context, the term "panel" in these Contract Documents shall be interpreted as a general term, which includes flat panels, enclosures, cabinets and consoles. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 D. PICS: • 1. Process Instrumentation and Control System. E. SCADA: 1. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. F. Signal Circuit: 1. Any circuit operating at less than 80 volts AC or DC. G. Two-Wire Transmitter: 1. A transmitter, which derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and therefore requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this Specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter, which provides a 4 to 20 milliampere current regulation of signal in a series circuit with an external 24-volt direct current driving potential and a maximum external circuit resistance of 600 ohms. 1.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Overview: 1. The Contractor shall install two PLC control panels provided by OWNER. Refer to the Contract Documents for additional • requirements. 2. OWNER will provide all PLC and HMI configuration. The Contractor is responsible for the configuration of all instrumentation and programmable equipment such as valve actuators. 3. Provide and install all instrumentation identified in the Contract Documents. 4. Contractor shall provide onsite troubleshooting, commissioning, validation, and startup while the Owner is testing the PLC program. Testing and documentation of testing is extensive. Refer to paragraph 3.02 Field Quality Control and paragraph 1.06 Submittals. 5. Refer to Sections 17101-01 through 17101-14, Control Loop Descriptions for Control Descriptions. B. Work Includes: 1. Instrumentation and control works shall include, but not be limited to, field instrumentation and controls, control panel work, testing, training, documentation, and related items 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, through the services of a qualified Process Control and Instrumentation System (PCIS) subcontractor, a complete and functioning control system. The • PCIS shall be responsible for all control work except as excluded Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 in this paragraph. PLC and SCADA programming are to be • provided by the OWNER. 3. Portions of this Project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc) before performing any Work. b. Provide and document interface with, modifications to, upgrade, or replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. c. Documentation for modified panels shall be in the form of AutoCAD drawings. Markups of existing drawings are not acceptable. As-built drawings are available, however, CAD drawings for existing panels are not available. 1) Only modified portions of modified panels are required to be documented. C. Work by Others: 1. The OWNER will provide application programming for the Plant PLCs and SCADA workstations. The CONTRACTOR shall, provide assistance with the on-site check out of application software provided by the OWNER per Section "3.02 Field Quality Control." • D. Field testing of the revised control programs shall be performed per Section "3.02 Field Quality Control". 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Review other Sections and Divisions of the Contract Documents for full compliance with the total Contract Documents. In the event of a conflict between Sections, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly seek clarification from the ENGINEER. B. Unless different requirements are clearly specified or shown elsewhere, instrumentation and control design, materials, equipment, installation, and testing shall comply with the requirements of Division 16. C. Completeness: 1. Provide a complete and fully functional instrumentation and control system ready for use. 2. Components which are not identified on the Drawings and Specifications, but necessary to meet the full functional operation and performance requirements, shall be provided. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3. Equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, and instructions and recommendations of the related equipment manufacturer. D. Connections and Appurtenances: 1. The instrumentation and control systems shall include all necessary connections to sources of electrical power, air, water, drains, and vents, with all required valves, switches, and accessories as specified or as recommended for best operation by the manufacturer of the equipment furnished. 2. All necessary mounting panels, stands, hangers, and brackets shall be furnished and installed and shall comply with the relevant Sections of these Specifications. E. Coordination: 1. Systems and equipment provided under this Section shall be designed and coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and materials provided under other Sections of these Specifications, and where applicable, under other referenced contracts, and with identified existing equipment. 2. Coordinate all aspects of the Work between CONTRACTOR and all subcontractors before bidding to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The • OWNER is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the CONTRACTOR, the PCIS, the other subcontractors or suppliers. F. Control Functions: 1. Control functions are provided in Sections 17101-01 through 17101-14, Control Loop Descriptions. G. Instrument Tagging: 1. Attach instrument markers to all field instrument devices such as switches, and instrument elements, sensors, transducers, control valves, etc. See "OWNER EQUIPMENT NUMBERING STANDARD" that includes an example figure and the following list of tagging material: a. Tag Material: SAFETYCAL FLAP TAG FT-1 Black 5"X3" b. Label Material: Brady 2" wide yellow (M71 C-2000-595-YL or equiv.) 3 3/4"X 2" c. Font Size is 14 point standard except Instrument Number which is 24 point Bold. d. Label text will be capitalized and centered. First line of tag will be Instrument Number. Second and if necessary third lines will be Instrument Description. Fourth line will be • Instrument Type (pH transmitter, flow transmitter, etc.) Fifth line will be I/O address. Last line will be Power Source Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 Location if 4-wire device or say "Loop Powered" if 2-wire 1111) device. e. Label will be neatly centered under laminated cover of tag with no air bubbles. f. Install 1/4" grommet for stainless steel fastener. g. Stainless Steel wire fastener 2. All back of panel instruments shall be provided with black-white- black plastic laminate nameplates engraved with the instrument's full tag number. Nameplates shall be secured to the panel with stainless steel screws. 3. All front of panel instruments shall include the instrument's full tag number, service description, and (if relevant) power source in the nameplate legend. Unless it is part of the instrument, the nameplate shall be engraved black-white-black plastic laminate, secured with stainless steel screws. H. Hazardous (Classified) Areas: 1. Instrumentation and control equipment specified, is subject to the requirements for hazardous (classified) areas as specified in Division 16 and indicated on the Drawings. 2. Two-wire transmitters to be installed in a hazardous (classified) area shall be Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe, and made safe by means of suitably rated Factory Mutual approved • intrinsically safe barriers installed in a non-hazardous area. 3. Switches to be installed in a hazardous (classified) area shall be made safe by means of suitably rated Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe barriers or intrinsically safe relays installed in a non-hazardous area. I. Equipment Locations: 1. The monitoring and control system configurations are diagrammatic. The locations of the equipment are approximate. The exact locations and routing of wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions and physical interference and by the electrical terminations on the equipment. 2. Equipment shall be located and installed so that it is readily accessible for operations and maintenance, but does not obstruct the removal of equipment. J. Documentation to be provided: 1. All aspects of the instrumentation and control systems design shall be fully documented, and subsequently revised to conform to the "As-Built" installation. The numbering of all instruments, equipment, terminal blocks, conductors, and cables shall be shown on all related documents. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 K. Detailed Wiring Design: • 1. Typical panel wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring diagrams, and loop wiring diagrams are included in Contract Drawings and designed to completely show control panel wiring, terminations, interfaces with other systems, hardwire functions, interlocks, and wiring of components provided. 2. The Contract Drawings contain typical wiring diagrams that apply to multiple circuit diagrams, such as loop drawings and control wiring diagrams. Contractor shall duplicate these typical drawings and customize for each control circuit and loop. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Submittal data shall be grouped in a logical manner to facilitate review of subsystems and each submittal shall be substantially complete. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review. 3. Incomplete submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR without the ENGINEER's review and without contract time extension. 4. Design Data submittals shall be reviewed and returned with resubmittal not required, before fabrication is started. 5. All panel drawings and loop drawings shall be produced with latest version of AutoCAD software. 6. Variations: A notice of variation shall be included in any submittal deviating from the plans or Specifications. 7. Hardware submittals shall be provided within 60 days of the Notice to Proceed. B. Pre-submittal Conference: 1. The ENGINEER shall arrange and conduct a Pre-submittal Conference within 60 days after award of the Contract. The purpose of the Pre-submittal Conference is to review and approve the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to carry out its responsibilities for Shop Drawing submittal on the WORK to be provided under this Section. The CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER shall attend. Both the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER may invite additional parties at their discretion. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall allot one, 4-hour half day for the Conference. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall present the following for discussion at the Conference: a. A list of equipment and materials required for the PICS and • the manufacturer's name and model number for each proposed item. Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 b. A list of proposed clarifications to the Contract Documents along with a brief explanation of each. Resolution shall be • subject to a separate formal submittal and review by the ENGINEER. c. An exact one-to-one sample of each type of submittal herein, including control loop drawings as described in Project-Wide Wiring Drawing Submittal. d. A flow chart showing the steps to be taken in preparing and coordinating each submittal to the ENGINEER. e. A Gantt chart type schedule for all system related activities from the Pre-submittal Conference through start-up and training. Dates of submittals, design, fabrication, programming (by others), factory testing, deliveries, installation, field testing, and training shall be shown. The schedule shall be subdivided to show activities relative to each major item or group of items when everything in a given group is on the same schedule. f. An overview of the proposed training plan. The OWNER's staff and ENGINEER will review the overview and may request changes. All changes to the proposed training shall be resolved at the pre-submittal conference. The overview shall include the following for each proposed course. 1) Course title and objectives. 2) Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. • 3) Course content - a topical outline. 4) Course duration. 5) Course format - lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc. 4. Provide all items to be discussed at the Pre-submittal Conference for review to the ENGINEER and OWNER a minimum 14 days prior to the Pre-submittal Conference. 5. The ENGINEER shall take minutes of the Conference, including all events, questions, and resolutions. Prior to adjournment, all parties must concur with the accuracy of the minutes and sign accordingly. C. Schedule of Values: 1. Purpose: Supplements the overall Project Schedule of Values and Progress Schedule to provide a basis for partial payment for Work completed. 2. Content: Submit summary of major milestones and associated partial payments for Work provided under PICS Subsystems. 3. Requests for partial payment shall be considered providing: a. Milestone activity is completed in accordance with criteria in paragraph Activity Completion. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • b. Prerequisite activities are completed in accordance with criteria in paragraph Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times, and in conformance with Progress Schedule. D. Product Data: 1. General: a. Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings. b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications. c. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. 5) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable specification section, and paragraph. 6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being furnished. d. Legibly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be supplied. • 2. Material and Equipment Schedules: a. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and instruments for this project. b. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. 3. Instrument Data Sheets and Cut Sheets: a. The Contractor shall use the Specifications and Drawings to complete the Instrument Data Sheets. b. Furnish fully completed data sheets, both electronically in Microsoft Word or Excel and in hardcopy, for each instrument and component according to ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. Include the following information on the data sheet: 1) Component functional description used herein and on the Drawings. 2) Manufacturers model number or other product designation. 3) Tag number used herein and on the Drawings. 4) System or loop of which the component is a part. 5) Location or assembly at which the component is to be installed. • 6) Input and output characteristics. Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 7) Scale range with units and multiplier. • 8) Requirements for electric supply. 9) Requirements for air supply. 10) Power consumption. 11) Response timing. 12) Materials of construction and of component parts that are in contact with, or otherwise exposed to, process media, and or corrosive ambient air. 13) Special requirements or features, such as specifications for ambient operating conditions. 14) Features and options that are furnished. c. Provide a technical brochure or bulletin ("cut sheet") for each instrument on the project. Submit with the corresponding data sheets: 1) Where the same make and model of instrument is used in 2 or more applications on the project, and the process applications are nearly identical, and the materials, features and options are identical submit one brochure or bulletin for the set of identical instruments. 2) Include a list of tag numbers for which it applies with each brochure or bulletin. 3) Furnish technical product brochures that are complete enough to verify conformance with all Contract Document requirements, and to reflect only those • features supplied with the device. 4) Cross out models, features, options, or accessories that are not being provided. 5) Clearly mark and identify special options and features. d. Organization: Index the data sheets and brochures in the submittal by systems or loops. 4. Control Panel Hardware Submittal: a. Submit the following in one submittal package. b. Complete and detailed bills of materials: 1) A bill of material list, including quantity, description, manufacturer, part number, serial number, vendor name with phone and spare part list with unit price where required, shall be submitted for each of the PICS system components. Bills of material shall include all items within an enclosure. 2) Provide the Bill of material on CD-ROM in Microsoft Excel format. c. Complete grounding requirements for each system component including any requirements for PLCs, process LANs, and SCADA equipment. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 . d. Provide a data sheet for each control system component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin, which include: 1) The manufacturer's model number or other identifying product designation. 2) Tag and loop number. 3) System to which it belongs. 4) Site to which it applies. 5) Input and output characteristics. 6) Requirements for electric power. 7) Requirements for air supply (if any). 8) Device ambient operating requirements. 9) Materials of construction. 10) Component functional description used in the Contract Documents. 11) Scale, range, units, and multiplier (if any). 12) Materials of component parts to be in contact with or otherwise exposed to process media and corrosive ambient air. 13) Special requirements or features. e. Priced list of spare parts for all devices. E. Shop Drawings: • 1. General: a. Preparation of Shop Drawings shall not commence until adjournment of the Pre-submittal Conference. b. Coordinate all aspects of the Work so that a complete, instrumentation, computer, and control system for the facility is supported by accurate shop and record drawings: 1) Clearly show every wire, circuit, and terminal provided under this contract on one or more submitted wiring diagrams. c. Show all interfaces between any of the following: instruments, vendor control panels, motor control centers, motor starters, variable speed drives, control valves, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PICS. d. Generate all drawings developed for this project utilizing AutoCAD by Auto Desk: 1) Furnish on CD-ROM disks, as well as hard copies on 11-inch by 17-inch plain bond paper. e. Organize the shop drawing submittals for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1) Furnish the initial shop drawing submittal bound in one or more standard size, 3-ring, D-ring, loose leaf, vinyl • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 plastic, hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf • storage. 2) Binder ring size: Not to exceed 3 inches. f. Include the letterhead and/or title block of the firm responsible for the preparation of all shop drawings. Include the following information in the title block, as a minimum: 1) The firm's registered business name. 2) Firm's physical address, email address, and phone number. 3) OWNER's name. 4) Project name and location. 5) Drawing name. 6) Revision level. 7) Personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. 8) Date. 2. Shop drawing requirements: a. Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. b. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c. Component layout and identification. d. Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal identification. e. Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring • diagrams, conductor size, etc. f. Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer's recommendations for the seismic and wind conditions specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. g. Weight. h. Finish. i. Nameplates: 1) Refer to Section 16075, Electrical Identification. j. Temperature limitations, as applicable. k. Interfaces between instruments, motor starters, control valves, variable speed drives, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PICS shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit wiring diagrams for approval by the ENGINEER and OWNER; a. Wiring diagrams shall be submitted 90 days after notice to proceed. The templates included in the contract documents will be used to document each and every loop on the project. All control panel wiring and terminal block numbering shall be shown, including any power wiring. After this submittal is approved satisfactorily the control panel fabrication can proceed. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 b. Preliminary field mark-up as-built wiring diagrams shall be • submitted 5 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2 and Performance Tests. The wiring diagrams shall fully document any changes that have occurred during the construction phase of the project. Final as-built wiring diagrams shall be submitted 30 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2 and Performance Testing. 4. Itemized instrument summary. The summary shall be prepared with Microsoft Excel software and shall be submitted on hard copy. The instrument summary shall list all of the key attributes of each instrument provided under this Contract. As a minimum, attributes shall include: a. Tag number. b. Manufacturer. c. Model number. d. Service. e. Area location. f. Calibrated range. g. Loop drawing number. h. Associated LCP and PLC. 5. Instrument Installation Drawings: a. Submit instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring • details for all components and assemblies in an electronic AutoCAD and hard copy format, including access requirements and conduit connection or entry details. a. Furnish for each instrument a dedicated 8 1/2-inch by 11- inch installation detail that pertains to the specific instrument by tag number. b. For each detail, provide certification and the hard copies, by the instrument manufacturer, that the proposed installation is in accordance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations and is fully warrantable. c. For each detail, provide, as a minimum, the following contents: 1) Necessary sections and elevation views required to define instrument location by referencing tank, building or equipment names and numbers, and geographical qualities such as north, south, east, west, basement, first floor, etc. 2) Ambient temperature and humidity where the instrument is to be installed. 3) Corrosive qualities of the environment where the instrument is to be installed. 4) Hazardous rating of the environment where the • instrument is to be installed. Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 5) Process line pipe or tank size, service and material. • 6) Process tap elevation and location 7) Upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument installation and pipe fittings and valves. 8) Routing of tubing and identification of supports. 9) Mounting brackets, stands, anchoring devices, and sun shades. 10) Conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power and signal. 11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and all components. 12) Clearances required for instrument servicing. 13) List itemizing all manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities, lengths required, and materials of each item required to support the implementation of the detail. 6. Control Panel Drawings: a. Layout Drawings: 1) Submit panel, enclosure, console, furniture, and cabinet layout drawings for all items provided. 2) As a minimum, include the following information: a) To scale front, side, and plan views. b) Dimensions. c) Interior and exterior arrangements. d) Mounting information, including conduit entrance • location. e) Finish data. f) Tag number and functional name of items mounted in and on each panel, console, and cabinet. g) Nameplate legend including text, letter size, and colors. b. Wiring and Piping Diagrams: 1) Submit panel wiring and piping diagrams for every panel that contains wiring and/or piping. 2) Include the following information: a) Name of panel. b) Wiring and piping sizes and types. c) Terminal strip numbers. d) Wire tags and labels. e) Functional name and manufacturer's designation for items to which wiring and piping are connected. f) Electrical control schematics in accordance with ANSI standards. c. Installation drawings: 1) Provide site-specific installation drawings for all control equipment panels, including dimensions. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -14- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2) Provide scaled drawings and show the position of the • equipment at its intended installation location. 3) Show the placement of all equipment being provided under this Contract and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas. 4) Show all required access and clearances associated with the equipment with a statement of compliance to manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes. 7. Control System Diagram: a. Submit a complete set of control system diagrams including the following information: 1) All PLCs, workstations, printers, communication devices, and communication links: a) Show all PLCs with their current I/O allocation, and future I/O allocation, current plus spares provided, and maximum potential I/O based on available slots. 2) All cables required for communication requirements. 3) Show each component fully annotated with conduit size and number associated with the power source. F. Testing and Startup Plan Submittal • 1. Submit plan 70 days prior to start of ORT-1. 2. General testing submittal requirements are specified in this section as well as Section 3.02. Additional requirements are specified in Section 01756, Testing, Training and Facility Startup and other Sections. 3. Testing Procedure Submittals: a. Submit the proposed procedures to be performed during tests of the PICS and its components in two parts: 1) Preliminary Submittal: Outline of the specific proposed tests and examples of proposed forms and checklists. 2) Detailed Submittal: After successful review of the Preliminary Submittal, submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms, and checklists. Include a statement of test objectives with the test procedures 4. The Startup Plan shall include the following: a. Testing Plan b. Checklist for all activities to perform during testing and startup. c. Instrument Calibration and adjustment forms. d. Loop and Control Circuit drawings. e. Preliminary equipment loading sheets • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -15- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 f. List of all equipment included in Startup. Details include the • following: 1) Associated Tag Number 2) Manufacturer Name 3) Model Number 4) Serial Number 5) Delivery Date 6) Manufacturer Warranty g. Electrical Acceptance Sheets 1) Megger Reports 2) Continuity checks for power circuits. h. Certified letters of proper installation and operation by Manufacturer's Certified Representative. 1) The equipment and instrumentation evaluation is performed prior or during performance of ORT-1. The list of items to be evaluated includes the following: a) Motor Control Centers b) Variable Frequency Drives c) HVAC d) Magnetic Flow Meters e) Control Interface Panels f) Equipment Control Panels 2) Acceptance of items above requires a certified copy of all test forms signed by the, CONTRACTOR, PCIS and • the OWNER's Representative, with test data entered, together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested. i. Factory Acceptance Tests: 1) Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during tests. j. Operational Readiness Test Part 1 (ORT-1): 1) Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during tests. k. Operational Readiness Test Part 2 (ORT-2): 1) Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during tests. I. Performance Acceptance Test: 1) Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during tests. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -16- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • G. Testing Submittals: 1. Test procedures: 70 days prior to schedule start of testing. 2. Submit the following for review: a. Factory Acceptance Test, Certified Record. b. Operational Readiness Test Part 1 (ORT-1): 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed test, forms, and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed forms and checklists. 3) Test Documentation: Completed component calibration sheets with O&M manuals. c. Operational Readiness Test Part 2 (ORT-2): 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed forms, and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed forms and checklists. d. Performance Acceptance Test: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Proposed tests, forms, and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed tests, forms, and checklists. 3) Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test procedures when tests are completed. e. Refer to Part 3 of this section for additional requirements. • H. Technical Manuals/Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Manuals shall be based upon the approved Shop Drawing submittals as modified for the conditions encountered in the field. 2. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete preliminary set of written Operation and Maintenance Manuals 8 weeks before calibration, start-up and/or testing. 3. Furnish in accordance with Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data and the following additional requirements. 4. Submit preliminary sets of these manuals to the ENGINEER for review of format and content: a. ENGINEER will return 1 set with comments. b. Revise and/or amended as required and submit the requisite number of copies to the ENGINEER 15 days before Pre- commissioning of the systems. 5. Incorporate changes that occur during startup and submit as part of the final manuals. 6. Provide comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance, and repair. 7. Include Record Documents and the approved shop drawing submittals, modified for conditions encountered in the field during the work. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -17- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 8. Include signed results from Calibration, Loop Validation Tests, Pre-commissioning, and Performance Testing. • 9. Provide installation, connection, operating, calibration, setpoints (e.g., pressure, pump control, time delays, etc.), adjustment, test, troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail. 10. Provide exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies and accessory components together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. 11. Spare Parts List: a. Include a priced list of recommended spare parts for all the equipment furnished under this Contract: 1) Include recommended quantities sufficient to maintain the furnished system for a period of 5 years. b. Annotate the list to indicate which items, if any and quantity are furnished as part of this Contract. c. Provide the name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and manufacturer's local service representative of these parts. 12. Organize the Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each process in the following manner: a. Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams. b. Section C - Loop Drawings. • c. Section D - Instrument Summary. d. Section E - Instrument Data Sheets and Brochures. e. Section F - Sizing Calculations. f. Section G - Instrumentation Installation Details. g. Section H - Test Results. h. Section I - Operational Manual. i. Section J - Spare Parts List. j. Section K - Control and SCADA System Software. I. Training Submittals: The Training Submittal shall be based on the preliminary submittal provided at the Pre-submittal Conference. 1. Develop and submit for review a General Training Plan. Include complete descriptions of all planned training classes, a preliminary training schedule, a list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of proposed training manuals, and a description of any special training tools to be used (simulators, self-paced modules, personal computer-based training, etc.). 2. The ENGINEER will review the General Training Plan. Special emphasis will be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors and the timing of the individual courses to maximize their effectiveness. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the proposed instructors are not sufficiently qualified to conduct the specified training courses, or lack experience, where • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -18- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • required, on the specific configuration of the system, provide more qualified instructors. 3. Training Course Plan submittals: a. For each training course or other training activity, submit a detailed, complete outline and agenda for each lesson. b. Describe any student pre-requisites for the course or training activity. c. Provide an updated schedule for all sessions of the course, including dates, times, durations, and locations. d. Submit training materials. 4. Incorporate all submittal review comments into the course. 5. Do not conduct training courses before review and acceptance of the Course Plan submittal for the course. J. Record Documents: 1. Furnish in accordance with Section 01770,'Closeout Procedures. 2. Provide record documents of all instrumentation drawings. 3. Record Drawing Requirements: a. Submit final fully updated record drawings upon completion of the Work for final review. b. Clearly and neatly show all changes in accordance with Section 01770, Closeout Procedures, and the following: 1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments, or other • structures encountered or uncovered during construction. 4. Shop Drawings: a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems: 1) Should an error be found in a shop drawing during installation or startup of equipment, note the correction, including any field changes found necessary, on the drawing and submit the corrections in the Record Documents. 2) Update, check, and revise all wiring drawings and other submitted drawings and documents to show final installed conditions. b. Provide "As-Built" Shop Drawings for all instrumentation equipment as PDF files and on 11-inch by 17-inch paper. 1) Provide actual field markups (redlines) upon substantial completion. c. Provide electronic copies of these documents on optical disks or USB Flash Drive in AutoCad Version 2014 by Autodesk and .pdf. Size all Drawings to be readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media. 4110 Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -19- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 5. Submittal Documents: 11111 a. Provide an interim submittal of Record Documents after the PICS system Pre-commissioning. b. Submit final Record Documents before Substantial Completion or earlier if so specified in Section 01770, Closeout Procedures or the General Requirements. 6. Review and Corrections: a. Correct any Record Documents or other documents found to be incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re-submit Record Documents returned for correction. K. Project Closeout Submittals: 1. Recommended Spare Parts List. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for project, fully indexed, incorporating all instrumentation and control system documentation submitted and produced, and revised to conform to the "As-Built" installation. Application specific operation and maintenance instruction and application program records shall be included. Submit 1 set for review and 4 sets of the final accepted manuals. 3. Submit reproducible Drawings revised to conform to "As-Built" installation for the OWNER's records after acceptance of the 411 project Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Electronic files, 2 sets, in the form of CD-ROM disks or thumb drive, bearing all electronically formatted documents including "As-Built" CAD Drawings and application programs, shall be submitted for information only and the OWNER's records, after acceptance of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for project. The media shall contain a table of contents, ASCII formatted, identifying the contents of each file and the software program/version with which it was produced. The media shall contain a CAD plotting document providing definition of, and correlation between layers/colors and line types for all CAD files. A Portable Document Format (*.pdf) version of each CAD drawing shall also be provided as part of the disk set. 5. "As-Built" Wiring Diagrams Submittals: Final "As-Built" set of wiring diagrams with CONTRACTOR, Division 16, ELECTRICAL, and PICS supplier coordination signature that each suppler has completed all "As-Built" markups to every detailed wiring diagram in the construction set of wiring diagrams. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -20- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Procurement Restriction: 1. Certain equipment manufacturers with marketing operations based on local agents, have terms where the selling agent has responsibility for after sales service. In such cases, the CONTRACTOR's procurement of such equipment is restricted to the selling agent within whose service area the equipment will be finally installed, thus assuring the OWNER of the availability of local after sales service. B. Quality Assurance Procedure: 1. A quality assurance procedure shall be defined and implemented by the CONTRACTOR supervising instrumentation and control systems. The procedure shall: a. Require that the project manager schedule and budget for in- house and inter-Contractor checking. b. Specify qualifications required for engineering and technical personnel in the execution and checking of specific tasks. c. Identify the responsibilities of the executor and the checker. d. Provide quality assurance data sheets listing specific tasks and stages of tasks, with space for the printed names of the executor and checker, and the checker's signature and date. • 2. The quality assurance procedure shall form part of the contractual requirements for subcontractors, and manufacturers or suppliers with unit responsibility. 3. The quality assurance data sheets shall be maintained current and shall be available for inspection upon request. C. Substitutes and "Or-Equals": 1. Substitutes and "Or-Equals" may be proposed in accordance with the General Conditions. 2. Where manufacturers of instrumentation or control system products other than those specified are proposed, they shall have a minimum of 5 years' experience in the manufacture of comparable equipment used in similar applications. The CONTRACTOR shall provide manufacturers' references to existing installations upon request of the ENGINEER. Noncompliance shall be a basis for rejection. D. Coordination Meetings: 1. General: In accordance with Summary of Work section. a. Attendees May Include: ENGINEER, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and PICS Subcontractor. b. First Meeting: Schedule per the requirements of Summary of • Work section. Thereafter, monthly, prior to first startup Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -21- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 activity and weekly during startup activities. Include meetings 410 on progress schedule. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage: 1. Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through tests as directed by the ENGINEER. If such tests reveal defects, the equipment shall be replaced. 2. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not interfere with the construction or the OWNER's operations. B. Delivery Timing: 1. No instrumentation or control system equipment shall be delivered to the job site until required for integration with other construction, and all necessary environmental preparations have been made. C. Intermediate Storage and Handling: • 1. When the CONTRACTOR is obliged to take delivery in advance of this time, the CONTRACTOR shall do so at a bonded air- conditioned warehouse. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for storage at the warehouse and transport of the equipment to the jobsite by suitably qualified movers with moving equipment (e.g., floating bed truck) as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Non-compliance: 1. Should the equipment be delivered to the jobsite and be stored in adverse conditions or installed in improper environmental conditions, then at the ENGINEER's discretion, prior testing may be declared void. 2. The prior testing (e.g., factory acceptance testing) shall be repeated and/or, at the discretion of the ENGINEER, a reduced value dollar credit shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. 3. The equipment shall still be required to satisfy site testing performance criteria. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -22- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS A. General: Instrumentation and control systems equipment shall be suitable, or made suitable, for site conditions at the project location. B. Temperature: 1. Electrical and Control Room Temperature: 60 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Field Locations Temperature: 20 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Above temperatures do not include affects of direct sunlight or wind chill. C. Relative Humidity (RH): 1. Electrical and Control Rooms RH: 20 to 80 percent. 2. Field Locations RH: 10 to 100 percent. D. Atmospheric Contaminants: 1. Atmospheric contaminants include hydrogen-sulfide, chlorine, ammonia and dust in indeterminate concentrations. 2. Corrosive atmosphere testing shall be conducted, where specified. E. Electromagnetic Radiation: • 1. Electromagnetic radiation: 27 to 500 MHz: 10 volts/m. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. General: 1. Coordinate system delivery and installation supervision with other portions of the Work. B. Special Planning: 1. Retrofit of the existing plant shall be specifically scheduled and sequenced. Shutdown of existing plant shall be minimized. All shutdown operations shall be scheduled with the OWNER. Detailed planning and careful execution shall be conducted to limit risk of accidental shutdown of adjoining existing facilities. 2. The work shall be divided into stages that shall be individually scheduled with the OWNER. For each stage, a detailed retrofit schedule shall be submitted. The retrofit scheduled shall list each individual action in stop order, identifying individual devices, terminals, and wire numbers. Prior to commencing each stage of retrofit works, and prior to shutdown, the CONTRACTOR shall make a "dummy run" through the schedule to add identification markers to all unmarked devices, terminals, and wires. 3. Planning or work shall include allowance for testing requirements • detailed in Part 3. Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -23- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MATERIALS A. Refer to other instrumentation and control Sections. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. Tests shall be observed by the OWNER. Tests may be observed by the Electrical ENGINEER and the Project ENGINEER. 2. The OWNER shall bear costs associated with travel for this test including, but not limited to: lodging, meals, travel time, time to witness tests, etc., for up to 3 representatives of the OWNER. 3. Costs associated with accommodation of the witness testing at the testing facility shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. 4. Prerequisites to Factory Testing: a. Approved test plan. b. Notice to the OWNER given 21 working days prior to the start of testing. 5. Instrumentation and control systems shall be factory tested and calibrated. 6. Factory test/calibration records shall be submitted to the ENGINEER to show that the equipment has achieved the • specified performance and accuracy. 7. Additional Factory Testing: Refer to other instrumentation and control Sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install instrumentation and control systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, final submittals, manufacturer's instructions, and (where applicable) American Petroleum Institute RP550/551. B. Electrical: 1. Install cable and wiring in accordance with applicable Sections in Division 16. 2. Control related enclosures shall be protected from metal shavings when installing conduits. Conduit penetrations into control enclosure shall be punched; the use of drills is prohibited. When installing conduits all terminal blocks, wireways, and devices shall be covered with plastic to prevent metal shavings • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -24- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 from coming in contact with any part of the equipment or wiring. • The Contractor shall be liable for fixing or replacing all equipment that is damaged during installation at no additional expense to the Owner. C. Piping: 1. Install piping and fittings in accordance with applicable Sections of Divisions 2 and 15. D. Wiring Identification Numbers: Each wire shall be labeled per the Clean Water Services standards as demonstrated on the example wiring diagrams provided as part of the Plans and as summarized below: 1. Cable numbers shall be named based on the equipment tag of the field device utilizing the electrical power source. The form of the tag shall be 406P1205C2 where '406P1205' represents the equipment designation; 'C' indicated a control cable and 2 is a sequential number developed as part of the circuit design. Cable type designations shall follow the designations listed below: a. C - Control b. S - Signal (below 80 volts AC or DC) c. P - Power d. N - Network (Ethernet, Profibus ...) Se. Examples for cable numbers: 1) Signal cable from Control Valve (406LCV1205) to PLC terminals: a) Input twisted shielded pair: (1) 406FCV1205S1+ and 406FCV1205S1- b) Feedback twisted shielded pair: (1) 406FCV1205S2+ and 406FCV1205S2- 2) Control cable to "Open" and "Closed" limit switches on control valve: a) Power from PLC: 406ZSO1206C1 b) Return from ZSO: 406ZSO1206C2 c) Return from ZSC: 406ZSC1206C1 2. Within PLC cabinets, PLC control and signal wiring from/to I/O cards and PLC terminal strips shall be labeled based on the rack, slot, and point number of the I/O point. Labels shall take one of the following forms: a. RXSYPZ - Discrete PLC I/O Wiring. b. RXSYPZ+/- - Analog PLC I/O Wiring. c. AC- - Power connection. Where X is replaced with the PLC rack of the I/O point. Where Y is replaced with the slot of the rack the I/O point is located. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -25- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 Where Z is replaced with the point number of the slot I/O point is located. • E. Ancillary Devices: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any additional or different type connections as required by the instruments and specific installation requirements. Such additions and such changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing the work. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra work or delay. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing - General: 1. The requirements given in this Section are a minimum and may be augmented, but not replaced, by more specific requirements in subsequent Sections. 2. As noted in Part 1 of this document, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed test plan and detailed step-by-step test procedures, complete with forms for the recording of test results, testing equipment used, and space for signature identification of the individual witnessing the test. 3. No required test shall be applied without prior notice to the OWNER. Testing shall not be conducted without being witnessed unless with the prior acceptance of the OWNER or OWNER's • representative. The Contractor shall check the installed work to extent possible prior to formal testing to ensure that formal testing can be expeditiously performed. 4. Each unit of test equipment used shall have a certified calibration report traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), and issued within 6 months of the testing date. These calibration reports shall be submitted with the test records. Test instruments shall have an accuracy 3 times better than that of the device under test. Analog devices shall be tested at 5 equally spread points over the full range. 5. Provide onsite supervision for startup and testing activities. Provide sufficient resources to complete all onsite testing, calibration, and adjustment during the scheduled startup period. Provide assistance to OWNER during the startup of the facility. B. Operational Readiness Test (ORT): Prior to startup test period and PAT for each facility, inspect, test, and document that the associated PICS equipment is ready for operation. Break the ORT for each facility into two parts: 1. ORT Part 1 - Purpose: Part 1 of the ORT shall demonstrate that the installation is physical installation is complete and the system is ready for software testing. Field instruments shall be calibrated • and receive final adjustments as part of this ORT. Through loop Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -26- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • tests the accuracy of all wiring shall be demonstrated; as well as, hardwired interlocks and alarms. 2. ORT Part 1 - Prerequisites: The following activities shall be completed prior to the start of ORT 1: a. Electrical and equipment installation complete, including equipment tags and wire/conduit labeling. b. Approved wiring diagrams including loop drawings and interconnect diagrams. c. An approved ORT 1 procedure. d. Manufacturer approval of the mechanical installation or a confirmation that a manufacturer's representative will be present during the testing. e. Notification of the Contractor's intent to perform ORT 1 submitted 30 days prior to the scheduled start of the ORT. 3. ORT - Part 1 - Description of Test: The PICS Subcontractor shall test and document that the Process Instrumentation and Control system, excluding OWNER provided applications software, is ready for operation. For PICS equipment for which the OWNER provides applications software, provide sufficient temporary software configuration to allow testing of this equipment. a. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: 1) The PICS shall be responsible for validating installation, • calibration, and interface with the PLC of all signals. During startup and commissioning activities the PICS shall be responsible for troubleshooting all field wiring up to the PLC interface point while the OWNER is conducting testing from the PLC and SCADA system. 2) Structure tests to include circuits internal to valves, MCCs and control panels. Tests shall include vendor provided controls and equipment. 3) Provide space on forms for signoff by PICS Subcontractor. 4) Use loop status report to organize and track inspection, adjustment, and calibration of each loop and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Tag number for each component. d) Check-offs/Sign-offs for each component: (1) Tag/identification. (2) Installation. (3) Termination wiring. (4) Termination tubing. (5) Calibration/adjustment. e) Check-offs/Sign-offs for the Loop: 411 (1) Panel interface terminations. Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -27- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 (2) I/O interface terminations with PLC's. • f) I/O Signals for PLCs are Operational: Received/sent, processed, and adjusted. g) Total loop operational. h) Space for comments. 5) Component calibration sheet for each active control system component (except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar items) and each PLCs I/O module and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Component tag number or I/O module number. d) Component code number for control system elements. e) Manufacturer for control system elements. f) Model number/serial number for control system elements. g) Summary of Functional Requirements, for example: (1) Indicators and recorders, scale, and chart ranges. (2) Transmitters/converters, input and output ranges. (3) Computing elements' function. (4) Switching elements, unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual). (5) I/O Modules: Input or output. • h) Calibrations, for example, but not limited to: (1) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (2) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. (3) I/O Modules: Actual inputs or outputs of 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. i) Space for comments. 6) Maintain loop status reports, valve adjustment sheets, and component calibration sheets at site and make them available to ENGINEER at all time. 7) Full testing by PICS Subcontractor shall be completed prior to verification of ORT-1 by ENGINEER. PICS Subcontractor to provide written confirmation of testing completion prior to ENGINEER involvement with ORT-1 testing. These inspections and tests will then be spot checked by ENGINEER. 8) ENGINEER reviews loop status sheets and component calibration sheets and spot-check their entries periodically, and upon completion of ORT. Correct deficiencies found. 1111 Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -28- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 b. ORT Forms: Example ORT forms referenced in Article • Supplements. 4. ORT-Part 2: Combined effort between PICS Subcontractor and OWNER to confirm that PICS, including applications software, is ready for operation. a. ORT, Part 2 - Purpose: Each control function and operating condition shall be tested. End-to-end loop test from field devices and equipment to the SCADA HMI shall be performed. Test shall be performed using actual equipment and conditions with a minimum of simulated conditions. Set points, time delay and tuning constants shall be adjusted as part of this testing. b. Prerequisites for ORT 2: 1) Completion of ORT-Part 1, all forms signed off by ENGINEER. 2) Approved ORT-Part 2 testing plans. 3) All equipment shall be available for operation. All manufacturer inspections and certifications completed. 4) Testing schedule coordinated with the CONTRACTOR. Allow a minimum of two weeks between the completion of ORT 1 and any scheduled ORT, Part 2 testing. c. Joint test with OWNER. Plant interlocks and communication with PLC's and SCADA equipment tested on a loop-by-loop • basis. d. Test procedures provided by OWNER based on ORT-1 and on application software tests. C. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT): These are the activities that Section 01756, Testing, Training, and Facility Startup refers to as performance testing. 1. Once ORT has been completed and facility has been started up, perform a witnessed PAT on complete PICS to demonstrate that it is operating as required by the Contract Documents. Demonstrate each required function on a paragraph-by- paragraph, and loop-by-loop. 2. Loop specific and non-loop- specific tests as required for entire installed PICS tested using actual process variables and all functions demonstrated. 3. Perform local and manual tests for each loop before proceeding to remote and automatic modes. 4. Where possible, verify test results using visual confirmation of process equipment and actual process variable. Unless otherwise directed, exercise and observe devices supplied by others, as needed to verify correct signals to and from such devices and to confirm overall system functionality. Test • verification by means of disconnecting wires or measuring signal Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -29- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 levels is acceptable only where direct operation of plant • equipment is not possible. 5. Make updated versions of documentation required for PAT available to ENGINEER and OWNER at site, both before and during tests. 6. Make one copy of all O&M Manuals available to ENGINEER at the site both before and during testing. 7. Refer to referenced examples of PAT procedures and forms in Article Supplements. D. Specialty Equipment: 1. For certain components or systems provided under this Section but not manufactured by PICS Subcontractor, provide services of qualified manufacturer's representative during installation, startup, demonstration testing, and OWNER training. Refer to Article Manufacturer's Services in PICS Subsystems for specific requirements. 3.03 TRAINING A. On-Site Training: 1. Provide on-site training for all instrumentation and control systems. On-site training shall include: testing and maintenance techniques, set up, calibration, operation, application • programming, system reconfiguration, a thorough description and explanation of the on-site control system, failure and recovery procedures (inducing failures), and operation during failures. Both theory and hands on experience shall be provided. 2. Allow for 40 hours of operational training with no limitation on the number of allowable attendees. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean area during construction and after completion of construction. B. Vacuum panels, cabinets, and enclosures to remove dust and debris. Wipe surfaces clean. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. Supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION" are part of this Specification. These forms shall be completed by the Contractor and submitted per the requirements of this Section. 1. ORT Forms: a. ORT-1 Form. b. ORT-2 Form. • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -30- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 c. Instrument Calibration Sheet: Provides detailed information • on each instrument (except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items). 2. Performance Acceptance Test Sheet: Describes the PAT for a given loop. The format is mostly free form. a. Lists the requirements of the loop. b. Briefly describes the test. c. Cites expedited results. d. Provides space for check-off by witness. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 17050 Basic Measurement and Control Durham AWWTF Secondary -31- Instrumentation Materials and Methods Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • 'W .. 1 N w. O F E N t _.ION ..°a L i l: R..a I a: SHEET SAMPLE TRANSMITTERS AND INDICATORS 4110 Owner Project No. (if applicable): Project Name: Project Owner: BC Company Regulatory Agency Project No(if applicable) Project No.: 10050-211-133 Date: 04120/03 Control Loop No: 106 Instrument Tag No, PIT--1.06A. Transmitter/gauge span: Manufacturer: ACE,Inc. Switch set-point: Model No.: "1.273-X Switch dead band Serial No: 3049560]TSi0 Switch range : Increasing Input Decreasing Input %of Span Input Output Error Input Output Error F Y ,g }} (%of span) BOO § 0% ('0() psi. 4.02 1A 0.13 OO psi A .?mA 0.0o 25% 30.01 r 1 8.00 A. 0.00 31.00 psi 8.01 ,t1A, 0.06 50% 10().00 psi 12.01 mA. 0.06 :10E00 psi. 12.00 mA 0.00 75% 150,00 psi 16.00 m'S 0.00 150.00 psi 16.01 m.^\ 0.06 100% 21)0.00 psi Th00 mA 0.0' 200.00 ,psi ' 99 m to 0.06 • Other(if applicable) Other(if applicable) SWITCHES Actuation point Increasing Input Decreasing Input Input Output Error Input Output Error (%of span) High(increasing input) Low(increasing input) Maximum allowable error(per Contact Documents): (? t s ,,,5p n Remarks: AdiMited ero-otherwise no adjustments required, CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT UTILIZED Device Type MFR/Model No. Accuracy Nist Traceability Calibration Reference Calibration Due Date Number Pressure c£ 3l'x.br for hiafhawaialBeta Xi. B025%Full Stale 394(i rssulimodule 1a gtBetaXi• 0.025% I t_l A al 5948P-6:0---150 psi Certified by: Date Certified: • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SOLIDS BLDGGOR C • ONTROL PN 6755 Operational Readiness Testing (ORT- Part 1) Instruments&Interface Devices . Loop No. 'Tag No. 'Device Description Cal.Sheet 'Status or Range IP&ID'Panel Wiring Diagram Checked 750TIT5031 Temperature Ind.Xmtr 750DPSL5033 Pressure Diff.Switch Low PLC I/O Loop No. Tag No. . e.•. . Loop Description (High Range (PLC 'Rack'Slot (Point'Type IP&ID'Panel !Wiring Diagram I/OIChecked 750TIT5031 750DPSL5033 Field Wiring Loop No. 'Wire No. (Loop Description Field Device (Field Term.No. (PLC Terminal No. (PLC Panel 'Wiring Diagram (Checked 750TIT5031 750TIT5031S1+ XXX TEMPERTURE 1 TB1-35 750LCPXXX 750TIT5031S1- XXX TEMPERTURE 2 TB1-38 750DPSL5033 750DPSL5033S1+ XXX PRESSURE XXXX 750DPSL5033S1- XXX PRESSURE XXXX ORT-Part 1:Test Procedures 1.Verify component tag/identification. 2.Verify correct wire terminations and instrument installation. 3.Instrument calibrations completed.(Fill out calibration sheet for each instrument) 4.Verify I/O signals to/from PLC,using the actual field devices when possible.(limit switch,hand switch,etc.) 5.Verify loop is ready for operation. Loop Checkout Comments/Notes/Problems ORT-Part 1 Loop Testing Completed: Date: (Integrator-Company Name) Make Up Air Unit#3 ORT-Part 1 Loop Testing Completed: Date: 750MAU5030 (Electrical Contractor-Company Name) Clean Water Services 17050 Sup-2 Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Operational Readiness Testing(ORT-Part 1) Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • 17050ement 3 • Example-Operational Readiness Testing(ORT-Part 2) Digital signal Example-Operational Readiness Testing (ORT-Part 2) Instruments&Interface-Devices Loop No. Tag No. Device Description Cal.Sheet 'Status or Range IP&ID 'Wiring Diagram IPanel 400FE/FIT1501 Basin No.7 Zones 1&2 Primary Effluent Flow meter 1 10-10,000 GPM=4-20mADC 11-6 1P74-L400FIT1501 1 PLC I/O Loop No. (Tag No. 'Loop Description 'Set Point FPLC 'Rack Slot !Point 'Type IP&ID Wiring Diagram 'Panel 400FIT1501 ???? 3 9 8 5 Al 1-6 P74-L400FIT1501 40LP01 400FY1501 3 9 12 2 AO 1-6 P74-L400F1T1501 40LP01 400FY1517 3 9 12 1 AO 1-6 P74-L400F1T1501 40LP01 Tests° Trip Reset Units Basin High Level Design Actual Basin Low Level Design Actual ORT-Part 2:Test Procedures 1.Place devices in Remote&SCADA Manual.Verify SCADA Manual Control(0-50-100-50-0%),Record Valve response and Loop PV(if possible) 2.Verify correct loop response during manual actuation. 3.Verify SCADA loop response matches device within tolerence. 4.Place loop in Auto mode(s),verify loop control responds correctly to SP and PV changes. 5.Verify loop is ready for operation. Loop Checkout Comments/Notes/Problems ORT-Part 2 Loop Testing Completed: Date: (Integrator-Company Name) ORT-Part 2 Loop Testing Completed: Date: Team Electric Clean Water Services 17050 Sup-3 Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Example-Operational Readiness Testing(ORT-Part 2) Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET -EXAMPLE- Project Name: Project No.: MCC-G Replacement Project 7182E10 300 Demonstration test(s): For reach functional requirement of the loop: (a) List and number the requirement; (b) Briefly describe the purpose and steps for each test; (c) Record results; (d) Sign off. 1. Pump No. 1 Verification-SCADA Manual Mode. la. Activate Pump No. 1 via SCADA terminal lb. Verify pump starts and speed is reported to SCADA. 1c. Adjust pump speed through full range. • 1d. Verify the VFD ramp rate is properly set. (xx%per second) le. Verify speed reported properly locally and at SCADA 1f. Simulate a moisture alarm in the pump. Verify the alarm is sent to SCADA and the pump continues to run. 1g. Simulate a motor winding temperature alarm in the pump. Verify the alarm is sent to SCADA and the pump shutdown sequence is initiated. lh. Reset the pump and simulate a high wet well level. Verify the pump starts in backup mode and pumps the wet well level down to the low level cutout, then stops. 1i. Verify normal operation is resumed after the pump is stopped in backup mode. • Clean Water Services 17050_Sup 04 Performance Acceptance Test Sheet Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Owner Sign-Off • Loop Drawings/ORT Results Instrument Calibration Sheets Performance Acceptance Test By Date Performed Witnessed Loop No.: • • Clean Water Services 17050_Sup 04 Performance Acceptance Test Sheet Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_01 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps II/ Description Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps Control Loop Process Description: During Nitrification, the Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps (MLR) recycles a portion of the biomass to the anoxic zones to develop the conditions required for denitrification. Biomass is taken from Oxic Cell 6E into the deox zone to reduce the amount of oxygen prior to mixing with Primary Effluent(PE). It then passes through a mixing chimney on its way to the anoxic zone. Each of two submersible axial flow MLR pumps discharge through an opening into the anoxic mixing chimney. The pumps will operate in a lead/lag sequence with each pump able to provide 50% of the total maximum flow. Each pump is capable of pumping up to 5140 gpm (7.4 MGD) to provide a combined pumping capacity of 14.8 MGD, which is equal to 200% of Max Month Dry Weather(MMDW) flow. Each pump is equipped with a discharge slide gate to isolate the Deox zone with the anoxic mixing chimney when the pump is not running. While operating in automatic if the MLR pump fails the isolation gate will automatically shut. Or, if the gate fails to close the pump will remain running. While operating in local control mode if the MLR pump is not running and the isolation gate is open a critical alarm will be generated to alert the operator of the problem. Due to the nature of the pump and gate valve configuration the pump must be running while the gate is open; if not flow could short circuit and flow in circles back into the Deox zone. • In Nitrate Control mode the pump speed is automatically modulated to maintain a nitrate concentration set point in the anoxic zones. The number of pumps to operate will automatically be determined based on the pump speed. Last Update: Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment: u menu � • Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump 1 41OP1401 Type: Submersible Axial Rating: 10 HP Pump Drive: VFD • Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump 1 Isolation Gate 410FCV1401 Type: Multi-turn Electrical Actuator Rating: • Clean Water Services 1710101 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_01 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps • • Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump 2 41OP1402 Type: Submersible Axial Rating: 10 HP Pump Drive: VFD • Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump 2 Isolation Gate 410FCV1402 Type: Multi-turn Electrical Actuator Rating: e . ,a In trumentation , Tag Number- Description Calibration Range • 410AE/AIT1664—ABS Anoxic Cell 5 Nitrate Indication O-X mg/L Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center None • VFD Control Panel Each Pump will be provided with a reset button at the VFD. The VFD will have a programmed interface located on the front panel. If the motor temperature switch high opens on high temperature the pump shall shutdown. The operator will be required to press the reset button at the VFD or place the LORR switch in the Off/Reset position to reset the pump provided the high temperature condition does not still exist. An alarm light for the temperature switch shall be provided on the front of the VFD for temperature high alarm. If the motor moisture switch high opens on high moisture the pumps shall provide information only status to SCADA. A status light for the moisture switch shall be provided on the front of the VFD for moisture high alarm. Pressing the reset button on the VFD will not disable any interlocks even temporarily while the button is held down. The VFD will be configured to run at a pre-programmed constant speed when started in Local Control mode. The speed will be determined during startup by CWS. • Clean Water Services 17101_01 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_01 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps • ure Manufactr's Supplied Control Panel ,.e PP ....,.e e..,. ,... ... . Each slide gate actuator will be equipped with the following switches and indicators • Local - Stop -Remote (LSR 3 position selector switch) • Open- Close Switch (OC 3 position return to center momentary switch) • Programmable Display, configured to display percent position Local Control Station For each MLR Pump the following will be provided on a local control station. • Local - Off/Reset-Remote (LORR 3 position selector switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button Intermediate Control Station None SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA Manual The operator will have the ability to select SCADA-Manual for each individual • pump. When the pump transitions to SCADA-Manual from SCADA-Auto, if the pump is running it will remain running at its last commanded speed. The operator will have the ability to start or stop the pump and adjust its speed while in SCADA-Manual. The Operator will have the ability to select SCADA-Manual for each individual slide gate. The gate shall remain in its last commanded position and will only change position when an operator commands it to a new position. SCADA Auto In SCADA-Auto the number of pumps to run will be determined from the speed of the pumps. In SCADA-Auto at least one pump will always be commanded to start. The speed of the pumps will be control from a proportional controller based on the difference between a nitrate set point and nitrate measurement running average. This loop is anticipated to be a low frequency, slow response loop, so controller should update time should be adjusted slowly. Running averages described above shall be calculated by storing the measured value into an array once a minute and taking the average for an adjustable time frame to be set during field tuning. For running averages plan on arrays large • enough to store up to 2 days of data pre measured variable. The actual number of array points used in the average will vary depending on the running average Clean Water Services 17101_01 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_01 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps window selected during tuning. The oldest values in the array shall be pushed out of the array every time the array is updated. The operator will have the ability to select the lead pump and the lag pump will automatically be selected. When only one pump is running and the speed controller output is greater than 99% (adjustable)the lag pump will start and the speed controller output will be divided by 2 (adjustable) for one scan of the logic. Then the speed controller will continue to change the speed as described above. When two pumps are running and the speed of the controller output is less than 40% (adjustable)the lag pump will stop and the speed controller will be multiplied by 2 (adjustable) for one scan of the logic. Then the speed controller will continue to change the speed of the pumps as described above. If the lead pump fails the lag pump will assume lead pump controls. Each pump is accompanied with an isolation valve and together they will operate in a startup and shutdown sequence. When a pump is called to start the isolation valve will be commanded to open first. When the valve is 10% (adjustable) open or greater the pump will start and run at the speed commanded. When the valve is called to stop the pump will remain running until the valve is at or below 10% (adjustable) open. If the valve actuator fails in a position greater than 10%the pump will remain running in alarm. If the pump fails, the isolation valve will close. • SCADS Display Statics and Process;Display For each pump the following shall be displayed on SCADA • Control Mode (Local / SCADA Manual/ SCADA Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • Speed Indication • VFD Fault • High Temperature Alarm • High Moisture Status • Lead/Lag Status For each isolation gate the following shall be displayed on SCADA • Control Mode (Local/ SCADA Manual / SCADA Auto) • Position • Clean Water Services 17101_01 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_01 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps Operator Entries For each pump the following shall be provided: • Method of lead pump selection • Method of selection control mode (SCADA Manual/ SCADA Auto Selection) • Method of changing SCADA Manual Speed Set Point For each gate the following shall be provided: • Percent Open Before Pump Start • Percent Open Before Pump Stop Pump Station Entries shall include the following: • Nitrate Set Point ..................... . SCADA Alarms and Resets For each pump the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the VFD. • VFD Fault • High Temperature Alarm • Fail to Start Indication (Pump being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication (Pump being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector • Isolation valve open critical alarm, if the isolation valve is open and the associated pump is off a critical alarm will be generated. For gate valve an alarm shall be generated when the absolute value of the position set point minus the actual valve position is greater than 2 percent (adjustable) for 90 seconds (adjustable). This alarm will auto-reset with the set point is within 2 percent of the set point. Alarm applies to SCADA-Manual and SCADA-Auto control modes only. Hard-Wired Interlocks For each pump the following is a list of hardwired interlocks. • Temperature High Alarm will shut down the pump. A reset will be required from the local control station before the pump can be operated again. • VFD Fault will shut down the pump. A reset from the VFD or local control station will be required before the pump can be operated again. • Clean Water Services 17101 01 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_01 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps Software Interlocks None Historical Trending • Speed indication for each pump • Running Status for each pump • Valve Position for each gate valve • Nitrate Indication • Nitrate Running Average • All proportional control tuning parameters • All alarms e , Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence Refer to SCADA-Auto pump and valve operation sequence. Equipment Restart After Power Interruption For each pump, if the pump is in SCADA-Auto control mode when the power is restored the pump will default to the SCADA-Auto and resume operation. If the pump was in SCADA-Manual control the operator will have to restart the pump if it was running. Reference Documentation (P&IDs, Loop Dwgs , Wiring Diagrams, etc ) • P&ID Aeration Basin 5 Sheet 1 of 3 • Clean Water Services 17101_01 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101 02 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 WAS Pumps Control Loop Description Aeration Basin 5 WAS Pumps Process Description: Two Waste Activated Sludge Pumps (WAS) are provided to waste settled sludge to the sludge thickeners and digesters. WAS pumps are connected to the common settled sludge manifold at the RAS pump station. These pumps operate in a duty/standby arrangement and can be operated in Constant Flow mode and Sludge Retention Time (SRT)modes. In Constant Flow mode the speed of the pump is controlled to maintain a constant flow set point. SRT mode will control WAS pumps to maintain an aerated sludge retention time to an operator set point. Last Update:.` Design Phase Approved By: Equiprment Unit Equipment: • AB No. 5 WAS Pump 1 465P2001 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 15 HP • Pump Drive: VFD • AB No. 5 WAS Pump 2 465P2002 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 15 HP Pump Drive: VFD Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 465FIT2000 -AB No. 5 WAS Flow 0-250 GPM • 320FIT1305 - Aeration Basin 5 Influent Flow Meter 0-26 MGD Control Strategies Local Control Operation.and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center None • Clean Water Services 17101_02 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_02 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 WAS Pumps VFD Control Panel Each Pump will be provided with a reset button at the VFD. The VFD will have a programmed interface located on the front panel. If the discharge pressure of the pump is high for more than an adjustable time, 0 to 30 seconds initially set to 5 seconds, then the pumps shall shutdown. The operator will be required to press the reset button at the VFD or place the LORR switch in the Off/Reset position to reset the pump provided the high pressure condition does not still exist. If the stator temperature switch high opens on high temperature the pump shall shutdown. The operator will be required to press the reset button at the VFD or place the LORR switch in the Off/Reset position to reset the pump provided the high temperature condition does not still exist. Manufacturer's Supplied Control Panel None Focal Control Station For each WAS Pump the following will be provided on a local control station. • Local—Off/Reset—Remote (LORR 3 position selector switch) • Start Push Button 1111 • Stop Push Button • High Discharge Pressure Light • High Temperature Light Intermediate Control Panel None SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA Manual The operator shall have the ability to place each pump into SCADA-Manual control. If the pump is running when the pump transitions to SCADA-Manual control the speed of the pump will hold in its last position and SCADA-Auto Control will be suspended. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start, stop, and adjust the speed of the pump manually. All automatic controls will be suspended. SCADA Auto The operator will have the ability to select two SCADA-Auto modes, SCADA- Auto Flow Control mode or SCADA-Auto SRT Control mode. Once SCADA- Auto mode is selected it will remain in that mode until the operator changes it. The default mode at startup shall be SCADA-Auto Flow Control mode. Both of • Clean Water Services 17101_02 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_02 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 WAS Pumps the SCADA-Auto modes only apply to pumps that are selected to be in SCADA-Auto and do not apply in Local Control or SCADA-Manual Control modes. SCADA-Auto Control for the WAS Pumps automatically operate the pumps in a Duty/Standby configuration. In SCADA-Auto the Duty pump will be commanded to start and the speed of the pump shall be determined by Flow Control mode or SRT Control mode described below. If the Duty pump fails to run the standby pump will automatically start and run at the speed determined by the SCADA-Auto control mode selected provided the Stand-by pump is in SCADA-Auto mode. Flow Control Mode: In SCADA-Auto Flow Control the speed of the pump will be controlled by a Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controller. The operator will enter a flow set point for the PID controller. The feedback(process variable) for the controller shall be the AB5 WAS Flow meter value. If the control mode transitions from SRT Control mode to Flow Control mode the flow set point last calculated by the SRT Control mode will be used as the initial Flow Control Mode. Any other transition to Flow Control Mode shall be last operator entered value. • SRT Control Mode: In SCADA-Auto SRT Control Mode the flow control of the pump will be calculated using the following equation. (TSSBNR • VBNR SRT ) - ((QBNR — QWAS) • TSSSE) QSP = TSSwAs Where, • Qsr = Calculated WAS Flow Set Point(MGD, convert to GPM) • TSSBNR =Running Average of TSS measured in BNR Cell 5 (mg/l) • VBNR = Volume of Aerobic Sludge Cell 6A through Cell 6F(MG) • SRT=SCADA entered Sludge Retention Time (Days) • QBNR =BNR Influent Flow Rate at PEPS(MGD) • QWAs =Measured WAS Flow Rate (convert to MGD) • QBNR- QWAS= Calculated Effluent flow of Clarifier(MGD) • TSSSE =Manually Entered TSS of Secondary Effluent(mg/l) • TSS WAS=Running Average of TSS measured on the effluent of WAS(mg/l) The Calculated WAS Flow will become the set point for the flow control mode described above. Running averages described in the equations above shall be calculated by 4110 storing the measured value into an array once a minute and taking the average Clean Water Services 17101_02 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_02 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 WAS Pumps for an adjustable time frame to be set during field tuning. For running averages plan on arrays large enough to store up to 24 days of data pre measured variable. The actual number of array points used in the average will vary depending on the running average window selected during tuning. The oldest values in the array shall be pushed out of the array every time the array is updated. Incorporate bump-less transfer of all SCADA Manual and SCADA Auto control modes. SCADA Display, , ,,.... Status and Process Display For each Pump the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Control Mode (Local/SCADA-Manual/SCADA-Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • Speed Indication • VFD Fault • High Discharge Pressure Alarm • High Temperature Alarm • Duty/Standby Status For the Pump Station the following will be displayed on SCADA. • • Remote Automatic Control Mode Selection(Flow or SRT) • Discharge Flow Rate • Discharge TSS Concentration Operator Entries For each Pump the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting SCADA-Manual or SCADA-Auto control mode. This method will only be available when LORR switch is in the Remote position. • Method of Starting the pump while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of Stopping the pump while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of setting the speed of the pump while in SCADA-Manual Mode. For the Pump Station the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting the Duty or Standby status for the pump • Method of selecting the SCADA-Auto Control mode, Flow Control or SRT Control • Set Point in Days for SRT Control mode • Set Point in MGD for Flow Control mode • Set Point for Secondary Effluent Secondary Clarifier 5 Total Suspended Solids Concentration determined by Lab or field samples. • Clean Water Services 17101_02 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_02 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 WAS Pumps • SCADA Alarms and Resets For each Pump the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the VFD. • VFD Fault • High Discharge Pressure Alarm • High Temperature Alarm • Fail to Start Indication (Pump being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication(Pump being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector An alarm will be generated whenever a pump is operating in SCADA-Auto and is running at minimum speed for more than an adjustable timeframe initially set to 5 minutes. Hard-Wired Interlocks • For each Pump: • High Pressure Alarm will shut down the pump. A reset will be required from the local control station or VFD before the pump can be operated again. • High Stator Temperature will shutdown the pump. A reset will be required from the local control station or VFD before the pump can be operated again. • VFD Fault will shut down the pump. A reset from the VFD or local control station will be required before the pump can be operated again. Software Interlocks None Historical Trending • Basin 5 TSS Cell • Basin 5 TSS Cell 5 Running Average • WAS Discharge Flow • WAS TSS Concentration • WAS TSS Running Average • Calculated Secondary Clarifier 5 Effluent Flow (QBNR- QwAs) • Flow Set Point to PID Controller • All PID tuning Parameters • • Running Status for Each Pump Clean Water Services 17101_02 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_02 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 WAS Pumps • All alarms • Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic;Famlover Se uence None . quipmente(Auto/Manual,) Restart After Power Interruption If the pump is in SCADA-Auto control mode when the power is restored the pump will default to the SCADA-Auto and resume control in Flow Control or SRT Control which ever was selected previously. If the pump was in SCADA- Manual control the operator will have to restart the pump if it was running. Reference Documentation P&IDs, Loop Dings., Wiring Diagrams, e.± tc • P&ID Primary Effluent Pump Station Modifications • P&ID Secondary Clarifier and Secondary Effluent Conveyance • • P&ID WAS Pumping 11111 Clean Water Services 17101_02 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_03 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 RAS Pumps Control Loop Descriptio Aeration Basin 5 RAS Pumps Process Description: Settled secondary sludge from Secondary Clarifier No. 5 is returned (pumped)to the Aeration Basin 5 (AB5) by two RAS Pumps. These pumps operate in a duty/standby arrangement and can be operated in manual mode or one of two possible auto modes, Flow Pace mode or Constant Flow mode. RAS can be returned to two locations on AB5, the Anoxic Mixing Chimney or the Anaerobic Mixing Chimney. The location is manually determined by the operator by remotely opening and closing the appropriate gate valves. The discharge of the RAS pumps can also be configured to return RAS to the Primary Effluent Pump Station. LaSt Update: Design Phase Approved By. Equipment Unit Equipment: • AB No. 5 RAS Pump 1 465P1901 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 20 HP • Pump Drive: VFD • AB No. 5 RAS Pump 2 465P1901 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 20 HP Pump Drive: VFD Instrumentation Tag Number- Description Calibration Range • 465FIT1900 -AB5 RAS Flow 0-12 MGD • 410FIT1305 - ABS PE Influent Flow Post Cell 6E 0-26 MGD Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center None VFD Control Panel Each Pump will be provided with a reset button at the VFD. The VFD will have a programmed interface located on the front panel. • Pressing the reset button on the VFD will not disable any interlocks even temporarily while the button is held down. Clean Water Services 17101_03 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_03 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 RAS Pumps Manufacturer's Supplied Control Panel None Local Control Station For each RAS Pump the local control station will have the following • Local - Off/Reset -Remote (LORR three position switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button Intermediate Control-Station None SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA Manual The operator shall have the ability to place each pump into SCADA-Manual control. If the pump is running when the pump transitions to SCADA-Manual control the speed of the pump will hold in its last position and SCADA-Auto control will be suspended. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start, stop, and adjust the speed of the pump manually. All automatic controls will be suspended. SCADA Auto The operator will have the ability to select two SCADA-Auto modes, Flow 1111 Control or Flow Pace modes. Once SCADA-Auto mode is selected it will remain in that mode until the operator changes it. The default SCADA-Auto mode at startup shall be Flow Control mode. Both of the SCADA-Auto modes only apply to pumps that are selected to be in SCADA-Auto and do not apply in Local Control or SCADA-Manual Control modes. The operator will have the ability to select the Duty Pump and the Standby pump will be automatically selected. In SCADA-Auto the Duty pump will be commanded to start and the speed of the pump shall be determined by Flow Control mode or Flow Pace mode described below. If the Duty pump fails to run the Standby pump will automatically start and run at the speed determined by the SCADA-Auto control mode selected. Flow Control Mode: In Flow Control mode the speed of the pump shall be controlled by a Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controller. The operator will enter a flow set point for the PID controller. The feedback(process variable) for the controller shall be the AB5 RAS Flow meter value. If the control mode transitions from Flow Pace mode to Flow Control mode the flow set point last calculated by the Flow Pace mode will be used as the initial Flow Control Mode. Any other transition to Flow Control Mode shall be last operator entered • value. Clean Water Services 17101_03 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 17101_03 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION:SECTION Aeration Basin 5 RAS Pumps 0 Flow Pace Mode: In Flow Pace mode the flow set point for the pumps will be an operator adjustable percentage set point of Primary Effluent flow. The resulting flow rate will become the set point for the PID controller used in the Flow Control mode described above. For all SCADA Manual and SCADA Auto control modes, incorporate bumpless transfer of control. SCADA Display Status and Process Display For Each Pump the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Control Mode (Local/SCADA-Manual/SCADA-Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • Speed Indication • VFD Fault • Duty/Standby Status Operator Entries For Each Pump the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting SCADA-Manual or SCADA-Auto control • mode. This method will only be available when LORR switch is in the Remote position. • Method of Starting the pump while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of Stopping the pump while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of setting the speed of the pump while in SCADA- Manual Mode. For the Pump Station the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting the Duty or Standby status for the pump • Method of selecting the Flow Control or Flow Pace SCADA- Auto control mode. • Set Point for Flow Control Mode • Set Point for Flow Pace Mode III Clean Water Services 17101_03 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_03 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 RAS Pumps SADA Alarmsand Resets For Each Pump the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the VFD. • VFD Fault • Low Flow alarm shall be generated with the pump is running and the flow is below an operator entered low flow set point for an operator entered time initially set to 30 seconds. • Fail to Start Indication(Pump being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication(Pump being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector An alarm will be generated whenever a pump is operating in SCADA-Auto and is running at minimum speed for more than an adjustable timeframe initially set to 5 minutes. Hard wired Interlocks • VFD Fault will shut down the pump. A reset from the VFD or local control • station will be required before the pump can be operated again. Software Irterl©cks: None Historical Trending • Running Status for Each Pump • Speed Indication for Each Pump • Flow Control SCADA-Auto mode Selection • Flow Pace SCADA-Auto mode Selection • Primary Effluent Flow • RAS Flow • Flow Set Point to PID Controller • All PID tuning Parameters • All alarms EqUipment.Run Time :Counters;(Hourly) Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment Failure Sequence None • Clean Water Services 17101_03 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_03 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 RAS Pumps Equipment.Automatic.Failover Sequence None Equipment (Auto/Manual} Restart After Power Interruption If the pump is in SCADA-Auto control mode when the power is restored the pump will default to the SCADA-Auto and resume control in Flow Control or Flow Pace Control which ever was selected previously. If the pump was in SCADA-Manual control the operator will have to restart the pump if it was running. e Reference Documentation (P&TDs, Loop Dwi s Wiring Dia rams .etc. e • P&ID RAS Pumping • 1111 Clean Water Services 17101_03 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17101_04 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 • Mixer & Aeration Control ontrol Loop Description Aeration Basin 5 Mixer & Aeration Control Process: ?escr>Iptton: Aeration Basin 5 (AB5) can be operated in four treatment modes determined manually by the Operator's configuration of AB5: • A20 Mode: where primary effluent is directed to the first anaerobic zone via the anaerobic mixing chimney. Under this mode the Anaerobic Mixing Chimney Control Gate 410FCV1553 is in the OPEN position and the Influent Collection Box Control Gate 410FCV1551 is in the CLOSED position. The Step Feed Control Valve 410FCV1550 is in the closed position. All RAS flow is directed to the anaerobic 1 mixing chimney. • Westbank Mode: where primary effluent is directed to the first anoxic zone via the influent collection box. Under this mode the Influent Collection Box Control Gate 410FCV1551 is in the OPEN position and the Anaerobic Mixing Chimney Control Gate 410FCV1553 is in the CLOSED position. The Step Feed Control Valve 410FCV1550 is in the CLOSED position. All RAS flow is directed to the anaerobic 1 mixing chimney. • Side Stream EBPR Mode: where primary effluent is directed to the first anoxic zone via the influent collection box. Under this mode the Influent Collection Box Control Gate 410FCV1551 is in the OPEN position and the Anaerobic Mixing Chimney Control Gate 410FCV1553 is in the CLOSED position. The Step Feed Control Valve • 410FCV1550 is in the CLOSED position. RAS flow is split between the anaerobic 1 mixing chimney and the anoxic 1 mixing chimney using RAS Pumps and Side Stream RAS Pumps. Refer to these control loop descriptions separately. • Step-feed Mode: the primary effluent is directed to the third oxic zone. In this mode, the Step Feed Control Valve 410FCV1550 is opened to allow flow to go directly to the oxic zone. AB5 Aeration Control: There are six aeration cells in ABS that will be integrated into the existing Most-Open- Valve (MOV) control currently in operation with the exiting blowers which will be utilized for this project. Each aeration cell will consist of aeration grid, air flow control valve, and air flow meter, and a Dissolved Oxygen (DO)probe which are all used to maintain a DO set point for the cell. The following is a list of aeration cells in ABS • Cell 6A (Oxic) • Cell 6B (Oxic) • Cell 6C (Oxic) • Cell 6D (Oxic) • Cell 6E (Oxic) • Cell 6F (Oxic) AB5 Mixer Control: There are five vertical mixers and in AB5. All of the mixers are constant speed. 41) Last Update: Design Phase Approved By: Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 1710104 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixer & Aeration Control • Equipment Unit Equipment: e e • Cell 1 Anaerobic Mixer 410MX1750 Type: Vertical Rating: 2 HP • Cell 2 Anaerobic Mixer 410MX1751 Type: Vertical Rating: 2 HP • Cell 3 Anaerobic Mixer 410MX 1752 Type: Vertical Rating: 2 HP • Cell 4 Anoxic Mixer 410MX 1753 • Type: Vertical Rating: 3.5 HP • Cell 5 Anoxic Mixer 410MX 1754 Type: Vertical Rating: 3.5 HP • Cell 6A Oxic Flow Control Valve 410FCV1658 Type: Modulation Valve Actuator Rating: Pneumatic • Cell 6B Oxic Flow Control Valve 410FCV1659 Type: Modulation Valve Actuator Rating: Pneumatic • Cell 6C Oxic Flow Control Valve 410FCV1660 Type: Modulation Valve Actuator Rating: Pneumatic • Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_04 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 • Mixer & Aeration Control • Cell 6D Oxic Flow Control Valve 410FCV 1661 Type: Modulation Valve Actuator Rating: Pneumatic • Cell 6E Oxic Flow Control Valve 410FCV1662 Type: Modulation Valve Actuator Rating: Pneumatic • Cell 6F Oxic Flow Control Valve 410FCV1663 Type: Modulation Valve Actuator Rating: Pneumatic • Aeration Basin 5 Primary Effluent Inlet Valve Cell 6C 410FCV1550 Type: Multi-turn Electrical Actuator Rating: • • Aeration Basin 5 Primary Effluent Inlet Valve Influent Collection Box 410FCV1551 Type: Multi-turn Electrical Actuator Rating: • Aeration Basin 5 Primary Effluent Inlet Valve Anaerobic Mixing Chimney 410FCV1553 Type: Multi-turn Electrical Actuator Rating: • Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 1710104 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixer & Aeration Control • Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 410FIT1658 -AB5 Cell 6A Oxic Air Flow 0-2200 SCFM • 410AIT1658 -AB5 Cell 6A Oxic Dissolved Oxygen 0-6 mg/L • 410FIT1659 - AB5 Cell 6B Oxic Air Flow 0-1900 SCFM • 410AIT1659 -ABS Cell 6B Oxic Dissolved Oxygen 0-6 mg/L • 410FIT1660 - AB5 Cell 6C Oxic Air Flow 0-1500 SCFM • 410AIT1660 -AB5 Cell 6C Oxic Dissolved Oxygen 0-6 mg/L • 410FIT1661 -AB5 Cell 6D Oxic Air Flow 0-1500 SCFM • 410AIT1661 -AB5 Cell 6D Oxic Dissolved Oxygen 0-6 mg/L • 410FIT1662 - AB5 Cell 6E Oxic Air Flow 0-1200 SCFM • 410AIT1662 - ABS Cell 6E Oxic Dissolved Oxygen 0-6 mg/L • 410FIT1663 - AB5 Cell 6F Oxic Air Flow 0-500 SCFM • 410AIT1663 -ABS Cell 6F Oxic Dissolved Oxygen 0-6 mg/L • 410FIT1305 - ABS PE Influent Flow Post Cell 6C 0-26 MGD Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm.Reset Motor Control Center Each Mixer will be providing with a reset button at the MCC bucket for • resetting motor overloads. VFD Control Panel None Manufacturer's Supplied;Control Panel For each PE influent gate valve • Local - Stop -Remote (LSR 3 position selector switch) • Open - Close Switch (OC 3 position return to center momentary switch) • Programmable Display, configured to display percent position Local Control Station Each vertical mixer local control station will have the following: • Local - Off/Reset-Remote (LORR three position switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button Intermediate Control Station None • Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_04 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 • Mixer & Aeration Control SCADA Control.Operation and Alarm Rese e, . SCADAManual Mixer Controls: Each mixer will default to SCADA-Manual control. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start and stop the mixer manually. Aeration Flow Controls: The pneumatic Aeration Flow Control valves are not provided with a local control station and can always be controlled from SCADA. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to change the position set point for the valve. When transitioning from SCADA-Auto mode to SCADA-Manual mode the last calculated valve position in auto will be set to the SCADA-Manual valve position set point for one scan of the logic, and then the operator can change the position. Aeration Basin 5 PE Influent Valve Controls: Each PE Influent valve shall be default to SCADA-Manual controls. In SCADA-Manual control the operator shall have the ability to change the position set point for the valve. 11111 Mixer Controls: The operator shall have the ability to place each Mixer in SCADA-Auto mode. In this mode the mixer will start and run for an operator adjustable Duration Time. When the Duration Timer times out it will trigger a reset of the Wait Timer and the Mixer shall stop. When the Wait Timer times out it will trigger a reset of the Duration Timer and start the mixer. This cycle will repeat continuously in SCADA-Auto Mode. Aeration Flow Control Valves General Requirements: Aeration Basin 5 has several aeration flow control valves with associated aeration flow meters and DO analyzers. The controls below describe the functionality required for each flow control valve and associated equipment. Aeration Constant Flow Control Mode: The operator shall have the ability to place each Aeration Flow Control valve in SCADA-Auto Flow Control mode. In this mode the valve position shall be controlled by the output of a Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controller, known as the Flow Control PID. The operator shall have the ability to manually set the flow to the aeration grid which shall be the input for the Flow Control PID controller. The feedback(or process variable) for the Flow Control PID controller will be the aeration flow meter associated with the flow control Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_04 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixer & Aeration Control • valve. When transitioning to this mode from Aeration DO Control Mode the last calculated flow set point will be set to the manual flow set point in Constant Flow mode for one scan of the logic, and then the operator will be able to adjust the flow set point. (This is known as bumpless transfer.) Aeration DO Cascade Control Mode: The operator shall have the ability to place each aeration flow control valve in DO Cascade Control mode. In this mode the DO shall be controlled by a cascaded PID controller. The outer PID controller(DO PID controller) shall calculate air flow and shall be the input to the Flow Control PID (inner PID controller) in place of the manuals set point will be the inner PID controller in the cascaded control. Refer to the control mode above. The operator shall have the ability to adjust a target DO set point, which shall be the input of the DO PID controller. The feedback for the DO PID controller shall be the DO probe associated with the flow control valves. When the valve is not in DO control mode the DO PID controller output shall track the measured flow, to prevent PID wind-up/down. (This is known as bumpless transfer.) Aeration DO Only Control Mode: The operator shall have the ability to place each aeration flow control valve in DO Only Control mode. In this mode the DO shall be controlled by a PID • controller. The PID controller set point shall be manually entered. The PID feedback shall be the DO analyzer feedback associated with the flow control valve. The output of the PID controller shall be position command to the air flow control valve associated with the DO probe. SCADA Display Status and Process Display For Each Mixer the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Control Mode (Local/SCADA-Manual/SCADA-Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • Fault Status For Each Aeration Flow Control valve the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Control Mode (SCADA-Manual/SCADA-Auto) • Valve Position • Fail Alarm For Each PE Influent Flow control valve the following will be displayed on SCADA • Control Mode (Local/ SCADA-Manual) • Valve Position • Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_04 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 • Mixer & Aeration Control All flow rates will be monitored. All DO concentrations will be monitored. Aeration Basin 5 shall display its Operational Status on the screen by evaluating the position the position of the valves. • The Operation Status shall read"A2O Mode"when following conditions are met: o 410FCV1553 is greater than 95% Open and o 410FCV1551 is less than 5% Open and o 410FCV1550 is less than 5% Open o All of the RAS Side Stream Pumps are Off • The Operation Status shall read "Westbank Mode"when the following conditions are met: o 410FCV1553 is less than 5% Open and o 410FCV1551 is greater than 95% Open and o 410FCV1550 is less than 5% Open and • The Operational Status shall read"Sid Stream EBPR Mode" when the following conditions are met: • 0 410FCV1553 is greater than 95% Open and o 410FCV1551 is less than 5% Open and o 410FCV1550 is less than 5% Open o One or more RAS Side Stream Pumps are Running • The Operational Status shall read"Step-feed Mode"when the following conditions are met: o 410FCV1550 is greater than 5% Open • The Operational Status shall read"Indeterminate Mode or Transitional" if none of the other conditions above are met. For Each Mixer the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting SCADA-Manual or SCADA-Auto control mode. This method will only be available when LORR switch is in the Remote position. • Method of Starting the mixer while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of Stopping the mixer while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of setting the Duration Timer • Method of setting the Wait Timer For Each Aeration Flow Control valve the operator will have the • following: • Method of selecting SCADA-Manual or SCADA-Auto control Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 1710104 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 Mixer & Aeration Control • mode. This method will only be available when LORR switch is in the Remote position. • Method of changing valve position from SCADA-Manual For Aeration Flow Zone the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting Automatic Control Mode (Flow Control, DO Cascade Control, DO Only Control) • Method of entering DO Set Point in DO Cascade Control Mode • Method of entering DO Set Point in DO Only Control Mode • Method of entering Flow Set Point in Flow Control Mode For each PE Influent Valve the operator will have the following • Method for changing the position of the valve. SCADA Alarms and Resets For Each Mixer the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the MCC. • Fault • Fail to Start Indication(Mixer being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be • cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication (Mixer being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector For Each PE Influent Valve an alarm shall be generated when the absolute value of the position set point minus the actual valve position is greater than 2 percent (adjustable) for 90 seconds (adjustable). This alarm will auto-reset with the set point is within 2 percent of the set point. Alarm applies to SCADA- Manual and SCADA-Auto control modes only. Hard„Wired Interlocks For Each Mixers • Motor overload (Fault)will shut down the mixer. A reset from the MCC or local control station will be required before the mixer can be operated again. Software Interlocks None • Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_04 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Aeration Basin 5 • Mixer & Aeration Control Historical Trending For each mixer • Running Status For each Aeration Flow Control Loop • Flow Control Mode (Constant Flow/DO Control) • DO Reading for each aeration zone • Air flow for each aerations zone • Valve position for each aeration flow control valve • All tuning parameters for each PID controller • All alarms Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) Mixer Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment Failure Sequence None • Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence None Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption After power interruption the mixers will start if they were running previously in SCADA-Manual. When a power failure is detected all of the flow control valves will be commanded to open. After power interruption all Aeration Flow Control shall resume operation automatically as commanded in either Flow Control Mode or DO control mode. Reference Documentation (P&IDs LoopDw s WiringDiagrams � g � a • P&ID Aeration Basin 5 Sheet 2 of 3 • P&ID Aeration Basin 5 Sheet 3 of 3 • Clean Water Services 17101_04 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17101_05 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Pumps Control Loop Description Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Pumps .t"rocess;.Description: The Nitrogen Reduction Diversion (NRD)Pumps are located in the Aeration Basin 5 (ABS)tunnel. Two pumps are provided in a duty/standby configuration. These pumps serve as carbon addition in the anaerobic zones when ABS is operating in the Modified West Bank mode. These pumps can provide up to 1.5 MGD of primary effluent to the anaerobic zone when operating. The pump station can operate in one of two automatic operation modes, Constant Flow mode or Flow Pace mode. In Constant Flow mode the operator inputs a defined flow rate and the pump speed is controlled to meet the flow rate. In Flow Pace mode the pump will operate to maintain an operator defined flow ratio with the ABS RAS Flow. Last.update: Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment: • Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Pump 1 410P1411 • Type: Centrifugal Rating: 7.5 HP Pump Drive: VFD • Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Pump 2 410P1412 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 7.5 HP Pump Drive: VFD Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 320FIT1305 -ABS RAS Flow 0-12 MGD • 410FIT1410 -Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Flow 0-1100 MGD Control Strategies. Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center None • Clean Water Services 17101_05 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_05 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Pumps VFD Control Panel110 Each Pump will be provided with a reset button at the VFD. The VFD will have a programmed interface located on the front panel. Pressing the reset button on the VFD will not disable any interlocks even temporarily while the button is held down. The VFD will be configured to run at a pre-programmed constant speed when started in Local Control mode. The speed will be determined during startup by CWS. Manufacturer's Supplied Control Panel None ee . - . Local ControlStation For Each NRD Pump the following will be provided on a local control station. • Local - Off/Reset-Remote (LORR 3 position selector switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button Intermediate Control Panel None SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA Manual Theo erator shall have the ability each p y to place pump into SCADA-Manual control. If the pump is running when the pump transitions to SCADA-Manual control the speed of the pump will hold in its last position and SCADA-Auto Control will be suspended. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start, stop, and adjust the speed of the pump manually. All automatic controls will be suspended. SCADA Auto : e The operator will have the ability to select two SCADA-Auto modes, SCADA- Auto Flow Control mode or SCADA-Auto Flow Pace mode. Once a SCADA- Auto mode is selected it will remain in that mode until the operator changes it. The default mode at startup shall be SCADA-Auto Flow Control mode. Both of the SCADA-Auto modes only apply to pumps that are selected to be in SCADA-Auto and do not apply in Local Control or SCADA-Manual Control modes. SCADA-Auto Control for the NRD Pumps automatically operates the pumps on a Duty/Standby configuration. In SCADA-Auto the Duty pump will be commanded to start and the speed of the pump shall be determined by Flow Clean Water Services 17101_05 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_05 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Pumps • Control mode or Flow Pace mode described below. If the Duty pump fails to run the standby pump will automatically start and run at the speed determined by the SCADA-Auto control mode selected. Flow Control Mode: In SCADA-Auto Flow Control the speed of the pump shall be controlled by a Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controller. The operator will enter a flow set point for the PID controller. The feedback(process variable) for the controller shall be the AB5 NRD Flow meter value. If the control mode transitions from Flow Pace mode to Flow Control mode the flow set point will last calculated by the Flow Pace mode will be used as the initial Flow Control Mode. Any other transition to Flow Control Mode shall be last operator entered value. Flow Pace Mode: In SCADA-Auto Flow Pace mode the flow set point for the pumps will be an operator adjustable percentage set point of RAS flow. The resulting flow rate will become the set point for the PID controller used in the Flow Control mode described above. SCADA Display Status and Process Display For Each pump the following shall be displayed on SCADA • • Control ModeLocal/ SCADA Manual/ SCADA ( Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • Speed Indication • VFD Fault • Duty/Standby Status p t tries Operator For Each Pump the following shall be provided: • Method of lead pump selection • Method of selection control mode (SCADA Manual/ SCADA Auto Selection) • Method of changing SCADA Manual Speed Set Point Pump Station Control shall include the following: • Method for selecting SCADA-Auto Mode Selection (Flow Control or Flow Paced) • Method for entering Flow Control set point • Method for entering Flow Pace percentage set point • Clean Water Services 17101_05 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_05 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Nitrogen Reduction Diversion Pumps SCADA Alarms and Resets For Each Pump the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the VFD. • VFD Fault • Low Flow alarm shall be generated with the pump is running and the flow is below an operator entered low flow set point for an operator entered time initially set to 30 seconds. • Fail to Start Indication (Pump being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication (Pump being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector Hard Wired Interlocks • VFD Fault will shut down the pump. A reset from the VFD or local control station will be required before the pump can be operated again. Software Interlocks None Historical Trending1111 • Running Status for each pump • Speed indication for each pump • Pump Station Discharge Flow • All P&ID tuning parameters • All alarms Equipment Run Time,Counters (Hourl Y) Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic FailoverSequence None Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption For each pump, if the pump is in SCADA-Auto control mode when the power is restored the pump will default to the SCADA-Auto and resume operation. If the pump was in SCADA-Manual control the operator will have to restart the pump if it was running. Reference Documentation, P&IDs, Loop Div s , Wiring Diagrams, ..etc.) • P&ID NRD Pumping Clean Water Services 17101_05 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_06 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Clarifier 5 110SecondaryContr-Ol LoOp Description Clarifier 5 Process Description: Secondary Clarifier 5 serves Aeration Basin 5. Settled sludge from Secondary Clarifier 5 (SC5) goes to a common manifold in the RAS/WAS pump station either for return to aeration basin or for wasting to the digesters. The clarified secondary effluent goes to tertiary treatment. A scum spray control valve will operate in automatic via intermittent time controller to help push scum toward the scum beach in automatic control. Last Update: Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment.. .. • Secondary Clarifier 5 Drive 420SCD 1805 Type: Direct Rating: 2 HP • Secondary Clarifier 5 3W Water Scum Spray Valve • 420VBL805 Type: Solenoid Valve Rating: • Secondary Clarifier 5 Scum Pump 1 465P2101 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 5 HP • Secondary Clarifier 5 Scum Pump 2 465P2102 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 5 HP Instrumentation Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 420LT2101 - Secondary Clarifier 5 Scum Pit Level 0-10 Feet • 420ZS 1805 - Secondary Clarifier 5 Rake Position Switch • 420NSH1805 - Secondary Clarifier 5 Torque Switch High • 42ONSHH1805 - Secondary Clarifier 5 Torque Switch High High • 420AIT1805 - ChemScan Analyzer Ammonium Concentration 0-10 mg/L Nitrite Concentration 0-5 mg/L Nitrate Concentration 0-15 mg/L • Phosphate Concentration 0-4 mg/L Clean Water Services 17101_06 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_06 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary CJarifier 5 Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center Scum Pumps: Each Scum Pump will be provided with a reset button at the MCC. If the motor temperature switch high opens on high temperature the pump shall shutdown. The operator will be required to press the reset button at the MCC to reset the pump provided the high temperature condition does not still exist. An alarm light for the temperature switch shall be provided on the front of the MCC for temperature high alarm. If the motor moisture switch high opens on high moisture the pumps shall provide information only status to SCADA. A status light for the moisture switch shall be provided on the front of the MCC for moisture high alarm. Secondary Clarifier Drive: If the drive motor torque switch high high opens on high high torque alarm then the drive shall shutdown. The operator will be required to press the reset button at the LCS to reset the drive provided the high high torque condition does not still exist. 'VFD Control Panel None Manufacturer's Su lied Control Panel .,, pplied,:. . . ,. None Local Control Station Clarifier Drive Local Control Station includes the following • On/Off(2-position switch) • Running Light • High Torque Light • Reset Push Button Each Scum Pump Local Control Station includes the following • Local—Off/Reset—Remote (LORR 3 position selector switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button • Temperature Alarm Light • Moisture Status Light Intermediate;Control Panel None • Clean Water Services 17101_06 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_06 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Clarifier 5 • SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset e SCADAManual Scum Pumps: II, The operator shall have the ability to place each pump into SCADA-Manual control. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start and stop and the pump manually. NPW Water Scum Spray Valve: The operator shall have the ability to place the spray solenoid valve in SCADA- Manual control. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to open and close the spray solenoid valve manually. SCADA Auto ., .. Scum Pumps: SCADA-Auto Control for the Scum Pumps automatically operates the pumps on a Duty/Standby configuration. In SCADA-Auto the Duty pump will be commanded to start when scum pit level raise above an operator adjustable start set point. The Duty pump will stop when the scum pit level drops below an operator adjustable stop set point. If the Duty pump fails to run the Standby pump will automatically start and run in place of the lead pump. NPW Water Scum Spray Valve: • The Scum Spray Valve shall default to SCADA-Auto. In SCADA-Auto the Rake Position Switch will trigger the following sequence. 1. An operator adjustable Spray Delay Timer will start. When the timer times out the logic will move to the next step. The purpose of this is to time how long it takes for the rack to move in position after passing under the cat walk. 2. An operator adjustable Spray Duration timer will start. While the duration timer is running the solenoid valve for the sprayer will be opened. When the Spray Duration timer times out the solenoid valve will close, the Spray Duration timer will be reset, the Spray Delay Timer will be reset, and the logic will move to the next step. 3. In this step the logic will wait until the Rake Position Switch triggers this sequence which will start at step one above. SCADA Display Status and Process Display For each Scum Pump the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Control Mode (Local/SCADA-Manual/SCADA-Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • High Temperature Alarm • Moisture High Status 1111 • Duty/Standby Status Clean Water Services 17101_06 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_06 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Clarifier 5 For Spray Solenoid Valve the following will be displayed on SCADA. 1111 • Commanded Open Status • Rake Limit Switch Status • Spray Delay Time • Spray Deration Time For the Clarifier Drive the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Running Status • High Torque Status • High High Torque Alarm SCADA will display Ammonium, Nitrate,Nitrite, and Phosphate concentrations. Operator Entries For Each Pump the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting SCADA-Manual or SCADA-Auto control mode. This method will only be available when LORR switch is in the Remote position. • Method of Starting the pump while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of Stopping the pump while in SCADA-Manual Mode For the Pump Station the operator will have the following: • • Method of selecting the Duty or Standby status for the pump • Method of changing the SCADA-Auto high level start set point • Method of changing the SCADA-Auto low level stop set point For the Spray Solenoid Valve the operator will have the following: • Method of SCADA-Manual or SCADA-Auto control mode. • Method of opening or closing the valve in SCADA-Manual. • Method of changing the SCADA-Auto Spray Delay time. • Method of changing the SCADA-Auto Spray Duration time. • Clean Water Services 17101_06 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_06 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Clarifier 5 SCADA,Alarms and Resets For Each Pump the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the MCC. • Pump Fault • High Temperature Alarm • Fail to Start Indication (Pump being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication(Pump being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector For the Secondary Clarifier 5 Drive alarms will be resettable from the reset button on the LCS. • High High Torque Alarm • Motor Overload Hard-Wired Interlocks The Secondary Clarifier Drive shall shutdown on High High Torque. The interlock is resettable from the Reset button at the LCP, provided the interlock condition is not still active. Software Interlocks None Historical Trending. • Run Status for Each Pump • Scum Pit Level • Run Status for the Clarifier Drive • Ammonium Concentration • Nitrate Concentration • Nitrite Concentration • Phosphate Concentration • All alarms Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence None • Clean Water Services 17101_06 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_06 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Clarifier 5 Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption 1 • The equipment will resume operation as last commanded before the power when out. Scum Pumps running in Local control will need to be manually restarted. Reference Documentation (P&IDs, Loop;D gs , Wirin Dia rams, P&ID Secondary Clarifier and Secondary Effluent Conveyance • • Clean Water Services 17101_06 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_07 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Effluent Collection Structure Control Loop Description Secondary Effluent Collection Structure Process Description: Secondary effluent from Secondary Clarifiers 3, 4 and 5 is collected in the Secondary Effluent Collection Structure (SECS) and is combined into a single connection into the Secondary Effluent Diversion Structure for Tertiary Treatment. The SECS has one downward acting gates that when lowered will send high flows to the surge basins. These gates allow flows in excess of the Tertiary Treatment's capacity to be directed to surge basins and held for disinfection and discharge. The downward acting gates position is set manually from SCADA. The position of the gates combined with the level transmitter will be used to calculate a weir flow rate to the surge basins. Last Update: Design Phase Approved By: Equipment ment Unit Equipment: • Secondary Effluent Diversion Gate 425FCV1810 Type: Weir Gate • ,.. .:.Instrumentation... Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 425LIT1810 - Secondary Effluent Collection Structure Water Level O-X INCHES • 425LIT1811 - Secondary Effluent Collection Structure Weir Level O-X INCHES • PEPS Combined Flow XX MGD Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm.Reset. Motor Control Center None VFD Control Panel None Manufacturer's Supplied Control Panel Each gate actuator will be equipped with the following switches and indicators • Local - Stop - Remote (LSR 3 position selector switch) • Open - Close Switch (OC 3 position return to center momentary switch) • Programmable Display, configured to display percent position Local Control Station • None Clean Water Services 17101_07 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_07 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Effluent Collection Structure Intermediate.Control Panel None • SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCAM.Manual In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to adjust the position in inches above the Common Reference Point. The SCADA-Manual control set point will follow the position feedback for the gate while the gate is in Local control. SCADA Autaw`. The weir gate shall default to SCADA-Auto control mode. In SCADA-Auto when the PEPS flow is 60 MGD (programmer adjustable) or less the gate shall fully close or move to the maximum up position. When PEPS flow is 65 MGD (adjustable) or greater the gate shall be positioned to match the measured height of water plus 0.5 inches (adjustable). When the PEPS flow is greater than Flow Diversion Limit the Wier PID controller will position the top of the gate (weir) below the water surface corresponding to PEPS flow minus an operator adjustable Flow Diversion Limit initially set to 70 MGD. Refer to the following sequence of calculations. 1. Weir PID controller will be used to adjust the elevation of the weir. The output of the controller will be the weir elevation. (Hv refer to diagram and calibration requirements below.) • 2. The set point of the Weir PID controller will be the PEPS flow minus Flow Diversion Limit. 3. The feedback for the Weir PID controller will be the calculated Weir flow as determined by the following equations. Note: the following equations will be calculated in all modes. H _ (14 — Hv) 12 Where, H=Height of water over weir gate,positive values only HL =Level Transmitter Calibrated in inches above reference Hv= Weir Elevation from weir level transmitter calibrated in inch above reference. Equation is only valid for positive values and ifH is negative then H will be set to zero before used in the equation below. Qg = 2.152(L — 0.2H)H1•5 Where, Qc = Calculated Weir Flow in MGD L =Length of the top of the gate in Feet H=Height of water over weir gate determined in the equation above. • Clean Water Services 17101_07 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_07 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Effluent Collection Structure • 4. When the PEPS flow is less than Flow Diversion Limit minus a deadband initially set to 2 MGD the Weir PID controller will be suspended and the output of the PID will track the measured valve position. The diagram below shows profile view of the gate and level transmitter where the common reference point is the bottom of the stilling well for the level transmitter. During commissioning the ultrasonic level transmitter will be zeroed using the bottom of the stilling well. Note: holes will be drilled into the sides of the stilling well to allow the water to raise and fall with the channel level. During commissioning the contractor will calibrate the Weir Span of the gate actuator from a level transmitter installed to measure the vertical movement of the valve steam. Several of the values discuss in the paragraph refer to the diagram below. Weir Span will be the difference between the fully up (Hv_MaX) position and the fully down (Hy-min)position in inches. The Weir Span shall read zero in the full down position and in the full up position the Weir Span will be a positive value in inches equal to actuator travel distance. Using laser levels the contractor will determine the elevation difference from the weir edge in the full down position and the inside bottom of the stilling well which is Hy_ Hv will be the Weir Span plus Hy-min in inches also known as the Weir • Offset. The contractor shall verify the calibration by lowering the weir to the water's edge without spilling and without leaving any weir above the water. HL and Hy should be the same value, if not verify the Weir Span, Weir Offset, and Level transmitter calibration. 0 4111 nF V V-max H L V HyV-TVIirk F • Clean Water Services 17101_07 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_07 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Effluent Collection Structure SCADA Display41, Status and Process Display • Gate Control Mode (Local, SCADA-Manual, SCADA-Auto) • Gate Valve Position (0 - 100% open) • Gate Valve Position(inches above reference point) • PEPS Flow • Calculated Weir Flow (Diversion Flow) Operator Entries For the Secondary Effluent Diversion Gate • Method of selection Control Mode • Method of changing the Valve Position in SCADA-Manaul • Method of changing the set point to fully open the gate valve when the flow is we below the range required for diversion. • Method of changing the set point to pre-position the gate valve for diverting flow. • Method of changing the Flow Diversion Limit. • Method of changing the deadband for deactivating the Weir PID Controller. SCADA Alarms and Resets For gate valve an alarm shall be generated when the absolute value of the position set point minus the actual valve position is greater than 2 percent • (adjustable) for 90 seconds (adjustable). This alarm will auto-reset with the set point is within 2 percent of the set point. Alarm applies to SCADA-Manual and SCADA-Auto control modes only. Hard-Wired Interlocks None Software Interlocks None Historical Trending • Secondary Effluent Collection Structure Level • Gate Valve Position(0 - 100% open) • Gate Valve Elevation(inches Weir Span+Weir Offset) • PEPS Flow • Calculated Weir Flow(Diversion Flow) • All alarms Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) . None Equipment Failure Sequence'. ..e None • Clean Water Services 17101_07 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_07 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Secondary Effluent Collection Structure • Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence None .Eq ipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption Resume operation as last commended. Reference Documentation (P&IDs, Loop Iwgs , Wiring Diagrams, P&ID Secondary Effluent Collection Structure • • Clean Water Services 17101_07 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17101 08 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Side Stream RAS Pumps Control Loop Description AB5 Side Stream RAS Pumps Process Description: When primary effluent is directed to the anoxic mixing chimney a portion of the RAS may be directed to the anaerobic mixing chimney using the Side Stream RAS Pumps. These pumps operate in a duty/standby arrangement and can be operated in manual mode or one of two possible auto modes, Flow Pace mode or Constant Flow mode. Flow Pace mode is based on a percentage of total RAS flow to Aeration Basin 5 (AB5) and will ramp up and down along with the RAS pumps. In this configuration the RAS pump flow is directed to the anoxic mixing chimney. Last update: Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment: • RAS Side Stream Pump 1 465P1903 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 5 HP Pump Drive: VFD • • RAS Side Stream Pump 2 465P1904 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 5 HP Pump Drive: VFD Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 465FIT1905 - AB5 Side Stream RAS Flow 0-800 GPM • 465FIT1900 - ABS RAS Flow 0-12 MGD Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm.Reset Motor Control Center, None • Clean Water Services 17101_08 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_08 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Side Stream RAS Pumps VFD Control Panel Each Pump will be provided with a reset button at the VFD. The VFD will have a programmed interface located on the front panel. Pressing the reset button on the VFD will not disable any interlocks even temporarily while the button is held down. The VFD will be configured to run at a pre-programmed constant speed when started in Local Control mode. The speed will be determined during startup by CWS. Manufacturer's Supplied Cntol Pane None PP or Local Control Sta on For each Side Stream RAS Pumps the local control station will have the following • Local - Off/Reset- Remote (LORR three position switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button .. e Intermediate Control Panel None SCALA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA:Manual The operator shall have the ability to place each pump into SCADA-Manual control. If the pump is running when the pump transitions to SCADA-Manual control the speed of the pump will hold in its last position and SCADA-Auto Control will be suspended. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start, stop, and adjust the speed of the pump manually. All automatic controls will be suspended. SCADA Auto The operator will have the ability to select two SCADA-Auto modes, SCADA- Auto Flow Control mode or SCADA-Auto Flow Pace mode. Once SCADA- Auto mode is selected it will remain in that mode until the operator changes it. The default mode at startup shall be SCADA-Auto Flow Pace mode. Both of the SCADA-Auto modes only apply to pumps that are selected to be in SCADA-Auto and do not apply in Local Control or SCADA-Manual Control modes. SCADA-Auto Control for the Side Stream RAS Pumps automatically operates the pumps on a Duty/Standby configuration. In SCADA-Auto the Duty pump will be commanded to start and the speed of the pump shall be determined by • Clean Water Services 1710108 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_08 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Side Stream RAS Pumps Flow Control mode or Flow Pace mode described below. If the Duty pump fails to run the standby pump will automatically start and run at the speed determined by the SCADA-Auto control mode selected. Flow Control Mode: In Flow Control mode the speed of the pump shall be controlled by a Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controller. The operator will enter a flow set point for the PID controller. The feedback(process variable) for the controller shall be the Side Stream RAS Flow meter value. If the control mode transitions from Flow Pace mode to Constant Flow mode last flow determined from Flow Pace mode will be used as the initial Constant Flow mode set point. For any other transition to Constant Flow control mode,the set point shall be last operator entered value. Flow Pace Mode: In Flow Pace mode the flow set point for the pumps will be an operator adjustable percentage set point of RAS flow. The resulting flow rate will become the set point for the PID controller used in the Flow Control mode described above. Provide bumpless transfer for all SCADA Manual and SCADA Auto control modes. SCADA Display Status and Process Display For Each pump the following shall be displayed on SCADA • Control Mode (Local/ SCADA Manual/ SCADA Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • Speed Indication • VFD Fault • Duty/Standby Status Operator Entries For Each Pump the following shall be provided: • Method of lead pump selection • Method of selection control mode (SCADA Manual/ SCADA Auto Selection) • Method of starting and stop the pump • Method of changing SCADA Manual Speed Set Point Pump Station Control shall include the following: • Method for selecting SCADA-Auto Mode Selection (Flow Control or Flow Paced) • Method for entering Flow Control set point • Method for entering Flow Pace percentage set point • Clean Water Services 17101_08 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_08 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Side Stream RAS Pumps SCADA Alarms and Resets • For Each Pump the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the VFD. • VFD Fault • Fail to Start Indication (Pump being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication(Pump being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector Hard Wired Interlocks • VFD Fault will shut down the pump. A reset from the VFD or local control station will be required before the pump can be operated again. Software Interlocks None Historical Trending • Running Status for each pump • Speed indication for each pump • • Pump Station Discharge Flow • All P&ID tuning parameters • All alarms Equipment Run Time ;Counters Hourl Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment,Failure Sequence . .., None Equipment Automatic Failgver Sequence;.. None Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power interruption For each pump, if the pump is in SCADA-Auto control mode when the power is restored the pump will default to the SCADA-Auto and resume operation. If the pump was in SCADA-Manual control the operator will have to restart the pump if it was running. Reference Documentation P&IDs, Loop Dwgs , Wiring Diagram, etc ) • P&ID Side Stream RAS Pumps • Clean Water Services 17101_08 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_09 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Drainage Pumps ontrO1 Loop Description AB5 Drainage Pumps Process:Description: Aeration Basin 5 (AB5) has been provided with one large pump AB5 Drainage Pump 1 and one small pump ABS Drainage Pump 2 designed to drain AB5 or Secondary Clarifier 5. These pumps will be operated manually from the local control station or from SCADA. Last Update: Design Phase Approved B Equipment Unit Equipment • ABS Drainage Pump 1 470P8101 Type: Centrifugal Rating: 60 HP • ABS Drainage Pump 2 470P8102 Type: Centrifugal • Rating: 5 HP Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • None ControlStrategies ..e Iocal Control peration and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center The large drain pump will be provided with a reset button at the MCC. Pressing the reset button at the MCC will not disable any interlocks even temporarily while the button is held down. VFD Control Panel The small drain pump will be provided with a reset button at the VFD. The VFD will have a programmed interface located on the front panel. Pressing the reset button on the VFD will not disable any interlocks even temporarily while the button is held down. The VFD will be configured to run at a pre-programmed constant speed when started • in Local Control mode. The speed will be determined during startup by CWS. Clean Water Services 17101_09 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_09 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Drainage Pumps Manufacturer's Supplied Control Panel 1111 None Local ControlStati n Each Drainage Pump will include the following: • Local - Off/Reset -Remote (LORR three position switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button • Pressure Lo Light Intermediate Control Panel None SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA Manual Each drainage pump will default to SCADA-Manual control. In SCADA- Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start and stop the pumps manually. In SCADA-Manual the operator shall have the ability to change the speed of the pump. SCADA Auto None SCADA Display s Statu and Process Display For Each pump the following shall be displayed on SCADA • Control Mode (Local/ SCADA Manual) • Running/Stopped Status • Speed Indication(for small pump only) • VFD Fault • Low Pressure Alarm Operator Entries For each pump the following shall be provided: • Method of starting and stopping the pump • Method of changing the speed of the pump (for small pump only) • Clean Water Services 17101_09 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 1710109 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Drainage Pumps 41) . SCADA AIarms and Resets For Each Pump the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button. • Low pressure alarm • Fail to Start Indication (Pump being commanded to start by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication(Pump being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector For the small Pump a VFD fault alarm shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button. Hard-Wired Interlocks • Low Pressure interlock will stop the pump. A reset will be required from the LCS before the pump can be restarted. Software Interlocks None • Historical Trending For each pump • Running Status • Pump Speed (for small pump only) • All alarms Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly). Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. e,e Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence None Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart.After Power Interruption Each pump will remain stopped until restarted by an operator. Reference Documentation (P&IDs .boop Dw s Wiring Diagrams, ..etc • P&ID Aeration Basin 5 Drainage Pumps • Clean Water Services 17101_09 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17101_10 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Gallery Air Supply Control LoopDescription AB5 Gallery Air supply Process Description: The Gallery Air Supply will be provided by the Makeup Air Unit(MAU). The MAU will be a packaged system that is integrated into PLC in the new electrical building via and Ethernet IP connection. The programmer shall meet with the MAU supplier to coordinate the remote monitoring and control of the unit. There are three exhaust fans located throughout the new tunnel sections. Each of these fans are manually controlled and monitored via duct pressure switch. Last Update: Design Phase Approved By :Equipment Unit Equipment: • Heated Water Supply Flow Control Valve 465FCV6602 Type: Modulating Rating: • Heating Coil Pump • 465P6601 Type: Centrifugal Rating: • Gallery Supply Fan 465SF5001 Type: Centrifugal Rating: • Gallery Exhaust Fan 465EF5001 Type: Centrifugal Rating: • Gallery Exhaust Fan 465EF5002 Type: Centrifugal Rating: • Gallery Exhaust Fan 465EF5003 • Type: Centrifugal Rating: Clean Water Services 17101_10 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_10 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Gallery Air Supply Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 465TSL5003—Air Intake Air Temperature Switch Low 40 Deg. F Open • 465PDSL5001 —Gallery Supply Fan Pressure Differential Switch Low 0.1 in.WC Open • 465TIT5004—Gallery Supply Fan Duct Discharge Temperature 55-110 Deg F • 465TIT5005—Aeration Basin 5 Gallery Temperature 30-110 Deg F Control S rategieS. Focal Control Operation"and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center For each Gallery Exhaust Fan • Running Status • Fault Alarm Control Panel 'VPD "., None Manufacturer's Supplied Control Panel None Local Control Station One LORR(Local—Off/Reset—Remote) switch for all heated water supply • valve, heat recirculation pump, and supply fan. One WS (Winter/Summer) switch for all heated water supply valve, heat recirculation pump, and supply fan. For the Flow Control Valve • Position indicator For the Heating Coil Pump • Start switch • Stop switch For the Gallery Supply Fan • Start switch • Stop switch For each Gallery Exhaust Fan • On—Off switch Intermediate.Control Panel None • Clean Water Services 17101_10 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_10 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Gallery Air Supply SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset • e SCADA:Manual Makeup Air Unit will be determined after installation SCADA Auto Makeup Air Unit will be determined after installation SCADA Display. Status and Process Display Makeup Air Unit will be determined after installation Operator Entries Makeup Air Unit will be determined after installation SCADA Alarms and Resets Makeup Air Unit will be determined after installation For each Exhaust Fan • Fan Not Running • Fan Fault Alarm • Fan Pressure Switch Not Low Hard-Wired Interlocks None Software Interlocks Makeup Air Unit will be determined after installation Historical Trending TBD Equipment Run Time Counters:; Hourl ( y).`' Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence None • Clean Water Services 17101_10 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_10 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: Gallery Air Supply Equipment (Auto%Manual).Restart After Power Interruption • Each pump will remain stopped until restarted by an operator. Reference Documentation (P&IDs, Loop`Dwgs , Wiring Diagrams, etc P&ID HVAC Drawing Sheet 2 of 2 • • Clean Water Services 17101_10 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_11 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Biofilter Odor Controls • AB5 Biofilter Control Loop DeSCruptioil Odor Controls Process:Description•. Aeration Basin 5 will be equipped with a Biofilter Odor control system. Last Update: Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment: e • Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Water Flow Control Solenoid 480FV4602 Type: Open/Close Rating: • BioFilter Odor Control Fan 1 480EF4101 Type: Centrifugal Rating: • BioFilter Odor Control Fan 2 480EF4102 Type: Centrifugal Rating: Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 480PIT4103—Biofilter Foul Air Fans Suction Pressure -12 to 0 Inches WC • 480PDIT4104—Biofilter Foul Air Filter Differential Pressure 0 to 4 Inches WC • 480FSL4601 —Biofilter Cell 1 Potable Water Flow Meter 2 gpm • 480FG4601 —Biofilter Cell 1 Potable Rotometer 0-5 gpm • 480FSL4602—Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Water Flow Meter X gpm • 480FG4602— Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Rotometer 0-X gpm • 480PDSH4101 —Biofilter Odor Control Fan 1 Differential Pressure Switch 10 Inches WC • 480PDSH4102—Biofilter Odor Control Fan 2 Differential Pressure Switch 10 Inches WC Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center VFD D Control Panel Each Fan will be provided with a reset button at the VFD. The VFD will have a programmed interface located on the front panel. If the fan differential pressure switch opens for more than an adjustable time, 0 to 10 seconds initially set to 5 seconds, than the fan shall shutdown. The • operator will be required to engage the reset switch to run the fan. Clean Water Services 17101_11 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_11 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Biofilter Odor Controls Pressing the reset button on the VFD will not disable any interlocks even 111 temporarily while the button is held down. Manufacturer's supplied Control Panel None Local Control Station For each Biofilter Odor Control Fan the following will be provide on a local control station. • Local—Off/Reset—Remote (LORR 3 position selector switch) • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button • Pressure Fault Light Intermediate Control Panel None SCADA Control Operation and;Alarm Reset SCADA Manual The operator shall have the ability to place each fan into SCADA-Manual control. If the fan is running when the fan transitions to SCADA-Manual control the speed of the fan will hold in its last position and SCADA-Auto • Control will be suspended. In SCADA-Manual mode the operator shall have the ability to start, stop, and adjust the speed of the fan manually. All automatic controls will be suspended. SCADA Auto ., The operator will have the ability to select SCADA-Auto for each fan. The operator will also have the ability to select the Duty fan and the Standby fan will be automatically selected. In SCADA-Auto the operator will manually set the speed for the duty or standby fans and the control system will start the duty fan. If the Duty fan fails to run the standby fan will automatically start and run at the manual speed entered for SCADA-Auto control mode, provided the Standby fan is in SCADA-Auto mode. The operator shall have the ability to set the on time and off time of a cycle timer for the Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Water Flow Control Solenoid. When one or more fans are running the cycle timer will be enabled and control the solenoid valve to provide water to the sprayers above the Biofilter Cell 1. When no fans are running the valve will be closed and the cycle timer will be disabled. • Clean Water Services 1710111 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_11 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Biofilter Odor Controls SCADA Display Status and Process Display. For each fan the following shall be displayed on SCADA • Control Mode (Local/ SCADA Manual/ SCADA-Auto) • Running/Stopped Status • Speed Indication • Common Fault • VFD Fault • Pressure Fault • Duty/Standby Status Biofilter Cell 1 Potable Water Low Flow alarm Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Water Flow alarm Operator Entries For each fan the following shall be provided: • Method of selecting SCADA-Manual or SCADA-Auto control mode. This method will only be available when LORR switch is in the Remote position. • Method of Starting the fan while in SCADA-Manual Mode • • Method of Stopping the fan while in SCADA-Manual Mode • Method of setting the speed of the fan while in SCADA-Manual Mode. For Both fans the operator will have the following: • Method of selecting the Duty or Standby status for the fans • Method of control the speed manually For Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Water Flow Control Solenoid • Method of changing the on and off times for the cycle timer • Clean Water Services 17101_11 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_11 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Biofilter Odor Controls SCADAAlarms and Resets , For Each fan the following alarms shall be resettable from the LORR switch or the Reset button at the VFD. • VFD Fault • Pressure Fault • Fail to Start Indication(fan being commanded to start by the PLC,but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector switch to the OFF/RESET position and back to the REMOTE position. • Fail to Stop Indication (fan being commanded to stop by the PLC, but no corresponding indication, 60 second delay). Alarm must be cleared by switching the LOCAL-OFF/RESET-REMOTE selector An alarm will be generated when the Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Water Flow Control Solenoid is commanded to open and the associated flow switch does not indicate flow for an adjustable time initially set to 5 seconds. An alarm will be generated when the Biofilter Cell 1 Potable Water Flow Control Solenoid is commanded to open and the associated flow switch does not indicate flow for an adjustable time initially set to 5 seconds. e e Hard Wired Interlocks None Software Interlocks When one or more fans are commanded to run both the Biofilter Cell 1 Potable Water Flow Control Solenoid and the Biofilter Cell 1 Non-Potable Water Flow Control Solenoid. Historical Trending • Running Status • Fan Speeds • All alarms Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) Fan Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. Equ.ipiient.Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic Failover:Sequence., None • Clean Water Services 17101_11 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_11 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Biofilter Odor Controls • Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption Each fan will remain stopped until restarted by an operator. Reference Documentation (P&IDs, Loop Dwgs , Wiring Diagrams, .. .etc.) P&ID Odor Control System Sheet 1 of 2 P&ID Odor Control System Sheet 2 of 2 ID • Clean Water Services 17101_11 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17101_12 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS • Control LOOP Description Primary Effluent Pump Station (PEPS)Pump Control(Replaces Existing CLD D4'0_100_CTL�_010) Process Description: The PEPS pumps primary effluent flow to a headbox where it is distributed by gravity through modulating butterfly valves to each aeration basin (four initially). There are four large pumps and two small pumps in the PEPS - all controlled with VFD's. With one of the large pumps out of service the firm capacity of the pump station is approximately 119 MGD. The number of pumps that are allowed to automatically run will be set up as described below to limit flow to the headbox as necessary to limit flow to each of four aeration basins to an operator adjustable value (0-21.5 MGD). Last Update: Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment::. • 08P11001 Primary Effluent Pump 1 Type:?? Rating: ?? HP (9-33 MGD) • Pump Drive: VFD • 08P11002 Primary Effluent Pump 2 Type:?? Rating: ?? HP (9-33 MGD) Pump Drive: VFD • 08P11003 Primary Effluent Pump 3 Type:?? Rating: ?? HP (9-33 MGD) Pump Drive: VFD • 08P11004 Primary Effluent Pump 4 Type:?? Rating: ?? HP (9-33 MGD) Pump Drive: VFD • 08P11005 Primary Effluent Pump 5 Type:?? Rating: ??HP (9-33 MGD) 1111 Pump Drive: VFD Clean Water Services 17101_12 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_12 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS • 08P11006 • Primary Effluent Pump 6 Type:?? Rating: ?? HP (9-33 MGD) Pump Drive: VFD • 08FCV12101 Aeration Basin 1 Flow Control Valve Type: Flow Control Valve Rating:?? • 08FCV12201 Aeration Basin 2 Flow Control Valve Type: Flow Control Valve Rating:?? • 08FCV12301 Aeration Basin 3 Flow Control Valve Type: Flow Control Valve Rating:?? • 08FCV12401 Aeration Basin 4 Flow Control Valve Type: Flow Control Valve Rating:?? • • 320FCV1305 Aeration Basin 5 Flow Control Valve Type: Flow Control Valve Rating:?? ..eInstrumentation. . .. Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 08LIT10101 -PEPS Plant Effluent Wetwell 1 Level ?? • 08LIT10102 - PEPS Plant Effluent Wetwell 2 Level ?? • 08LIT12001 - Aeration Basin Influent Headbox Level ?? • 08FIT12101 - Aeration Basin 1 Influent Flow Meter 0-25 MGD • 08FIT12201 - Aeration Basin 2 Influent Flow Meter 0-25 MGD • 08FIT12301 - Aeration Basin 3 Influent Flow Meter 0-25 MGD • 08FIT12401 - Aeration Basin 4 Influent Flow Meter 0-25 MGD • 320FIT1305 - Aeration Basin 5 Influent Flow Meter 0-26 MGD • Clean Water Services 17101_12 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_12 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS • Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center VFD Control Panel Local controls for each pump are on the VFD panel for the pump in the Building Control Room and include: • LOCAL/PROFIBUS selector switch • START and STOP buttons • Speed Control Manufacturer's Supplied;Control Pinel None Local Control Station None Intermediate Control Panel In March of 2004, the PEPS wetwell level indicators were added to the Local III Control Panel in the southwest corner of the Control Room. This modification aimed to assist operations when the PLC or SCADA is down and manual PEPS operation is necessary. The level displays are the only instrumentation on this panel. SCADA. Control:Operation`and Alarm Reset = ' SCADA,Manu Each pump can be started or stopped, and have its speed adjusted. SCADA Auto .. Pumps run to maintain a wetwell level set point within the range of 10.5 to 13.5 feet. The specific level set point is a function of the head box level as described below. The level set point operating range is hard-coded in the PLC. Starting and stopping sequence for rising and falling flows have been set to optimize the energy consumption of the pumps by correlating number of pumps on and pump efficiency with flows. Level Sensor Operation Normally both wet wells are in service and level control is from the operator selected level sensor. If the two level sensor outputs differ by more than 1 foot, a High Differential alarm is annunciated. There is no control response to this alarm. III If a level sensor fail is detected, the PLC automatically switches to the other level sensor and an alarm is activated. The sensor fail alarm is generated by a Clean Water Services 17101_12 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_12 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS transmitter output of less than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA. The fail sensor alarm • is annunciated as a Broken Transmitter. Pump Starting Sequence As flows to the PEPS wetwell increase above the level set point plus a deadband, initially set for 0.5 feet, and after a time delay of 5 minutes the PLC will start the next pump in the sequence. The pump will start and ramp up to 100% speed during the period the discharge air release/siphon break valve is open, and for 5 seconds after the valve closes, to establish a siphon in the discharge piping. When the pump reaches full speed, and if the wetwell level continues to rise, the next pump in the sequence will start. The speed of the running pumps will modulate to achieve the wetwell level set point. Additional pumps will be called to start as necessary. When flows are less than the minimum of the SMALL LEAD pump it will cycle on and off as needed. With the SMALL LEAD, SMALL LAG, LARGE LEAD, and LARGE LAG pumps running simultaneously at full speed the total pumped flow to the headbox will be approximately 86 MGD. The pump sequencing for rising flow conditions in the following table will be displayed on the SCADA system as a static information pop-up: • Pump Rising Flows (MGD) Mode 0 -4 4 - 10 10+ - 20 20+ - 43 43+ - 53 53+ - 86 Small ON/OFF ON ON ON ON ON Lead Small OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON Lag Large OFF OFF OFF ON 1 ON ON Lead Large OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Lag l Pump Stopping Sequence As flows decrease the running pumps will reduce speed and sequentially stop to maintain the wet well level setpoint. Pumps will be stopped in sequence in response to total aeration basin flow as shown below. Stopping pumps in this manner avoids running too many pumps at a low speed where fewer pumps at a higher speed and greater efficiency will suffice. The total flow that a pump is turned off at in a sequence step is approximately 95% of the capacity of the remaining pumps that will run under the falling flow sequence. 1111 Clean Water Services 17101_12 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_12 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS • Following are normal pump sequencing for falling flow conditions. These sequencing steps will be programmed as well as provided on the SCADA system as a static information pop-up: Pump Falling Flows 2,3 (MGD) Mode 86 - 50 60 - -41 41 - -19 19 - -8 8 - -4 4 - 0 Small ON ON ON ON ON ON/OFF Lead Small ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF Lag Large ON ON ON1 OFF OFF OFF Lead Large ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Lagl 1. LARGE LEAD pump to be in wet well opposite SMALL LEAD pump. 2. As determined from total flow to aeration basins. 3. Lower falling flow limits set at approximately 95% of capacity of remaining running pumps. Pump Speed Control: • The speed of the running pumps will be modulated using a cascaded loop to maintain the wetwell level setpoint. When multiple pumps are running, their speeds will be modulated equally. The outer loop is based on the headbox level and the inner loop is based on the wetwell level. The outer loop process variable is the actual headbox water level, the setpoint is the headbox, and the controller output will write a wetwell level setpoint to the inner loop. The inner loop process variable is the wetwell level and the controller output is the speed signal to the pump VFD(s). Limiting Pumped Flow to the Headbox to Match the Maximum Aeration Basin Flow: The maximum flow to each aeration basin is operator adjustable within the range of 0-21.5 MGD. If the flow to each aeration basin is below its maximum limit, and flows to the PEPS are increasing, the pumps will pump more flow into the headbox. As the headbox level rises above setpoint, the flow control valves will open further (as described below)to send more flow to the aeration basins. If the flow to any aeration basin increases to its maximum upper limit, the control valve will not open further. If the flow to all aeration basins increases to their respective maximum upper limits, the headbox level will rise above the normal setpoint of 17 feet (elevation 170). As the headbox level increases above the normal level setpoint, the outer loop of the pump speed control system will write a higher 1111 wetwell level setpoint to the inner loop up to a maximum of 13.5 feet. In response Clean Water Services 1710112 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_12 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS to the new wetwell level setpoint, the running pumps will decrease their speed, • thus decreasing flow to the headbox. As the headbox level continues to increase the wetwell level setpoint will continue to rise and the pumps will continue decreasing speed. Flows in excess of the aeration basin maximum upper limit will then overflow at elevation 163.25 feet in the EFDS and be sent towards the surge basin. At this point,the flow to each aeration basin will be at its operated entered maximum value, the headbox will not be overflowing to the wetwell and the excess flow will be overflowing at the EFDS and heading towards the surge basin. At the valve vault in the road, motorized butterfly valves can be used to divert the excess flow to the chemical clarifiers or to the surge basin or to split the flow. On decreasing flows into the PEPS,the reverse sequence will occur and the wetwell level setpoint will gradually return to its lower limit of 10.5 feet and the headbox level will drop and be maintained at the normal level setpoint of 17 feet SCADA.Display. Status,and Process Display • Remote Status • Running Status • Fault Summary Alarm • Speed output of VFD (in%) 11111 • Wetwell Level • Pump status as follows: o All Pumps: MANUAL o Pumps 2 and 5 only: SMALL LEAD/ SMALL LAG o Pumps 1, 3, 4, and 6 only: LARGE LEAD/LARGE LAG 1 / LARGE LAG 2 /LARGE LAG 3 Operator Entries • Set flow limit to each of four aeration basins to an adjustable value (0-21.5 MGD). • Select wetwell to provide level indication for pump control SCADA Alarms'and Resets For Each Flow control valve provide the following alarms • If the commanded valve position is more the 2% (adjustable) different than the valve position indication for an Operator adjustable time delay then a"Valve Feedback Alarm" shall be generated. • Clean Water Services 17101_12 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS Hard-Wired Interlocks SECTION 17101_12 Gravity oil lube system solenoid valve hardwired to VFD and will open when pump starts and close upon pump shutdown in AUTO. Solenoid valve to open upon pump startup and close upon pump shutdown in LOCAL or REMOTE MANUAL Software Interlocks • Air release/siphon break valves time delay close after pump start and open upon pump stop under PLC control in SCADA Manual or SCADA Auto. Valve must be manually controlled from valve actuator if pump is controlled from VFD keypad. • Pump to remain at 100% speed for 5 seconds after air release/siphon break valve closes to ensure establishment of discharge siphon. • Low wetwell level cutoff(Depth of 6.0 feet, El. 156.25). Historical Trending • Wetwell Levels • Pump Speeds • All alarms • .. Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence If any pump is out of service (in LOCAL or failed)with others in AUTO, other pumps that are available will pick up the loss in pumping capacity in one of the following two ways: • If small pump (SMALL LEAD or SMALL LAG) is out of service, the opposite small pump will shut down, and the LARGE LAG 2 pump will be allowed to run if necessary. In this scenario, up to three large (LARGE LEAD, LARGE LAG 1, and LARGE LAG 2)pumps will be allowed to operate as needed. When all three large pumps are running at the same time, the pump speeds will be allowed to ramp up to 90%to limit total flow to the aeration basins to 86 mgd. • If LARGE LEAD is out of service, the LARGE LAG 2 will automatically become the LARGE LEAD pump. • If LARGE LAG 1 is out of service, the LARGE LAG 3 will automatically become the LARGE 1 pump. • • If the LARGE LEAD and the LARGE LAG 1 pumps are out of service, Clean Water Services 17101_12 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_12 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 PEPS the LARGE LAG 1 pump will automatically become the LARGE LEAD • pump and the LARGE LAG 3 pump will become the LARGE LAG 1 pump. If only one of the small pumps is available and less than three of the large pumps are available, then the PLC will automatically operate with all the available pumps. If the available small pump was the SMALL LAG pump,then it will become the SMALL LEAD pump. E 1X1 m e q; � ent (Auto/Manual) Restart Auer Power �n�errupt>no�:.;, . e Reference Documentation, (P&IDs, Loop Dwgs , Wiring Diagrams, etc Clean Water Services 17101_12 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_13 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Tunnel Sumps Control Loop Description Tunnel Sump Pumps Process Description. The Tunnel Sump Pumps are located in the Aeration Basin 5 (AB5)tunnel. The two pumps provided are in a lead/lag configuration. Last.Updatei Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment. • Tunnel Sump Pump 1 470P8104 Type: Floor Mount Submersible Rating: 0.5 HP • Tunnel Sump Pump 2 470P8105 Type: Floor Mount Submersible Rating: 0.5 HP instrumentation:, . Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 470LSL8106—Tunnel Sump Level Low Opens above 36 inches • 470LSH8106—Tunnel Sump Level High Opens above 42 inches • 470LSHH8106—Tunnel Sump Level High High Opens above 48 inches Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center None VFD Control Panel None Manufacturer's Supplied Control Panel None • Clean Water Services 17101_13 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101 13 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Tunnel Sumps ,Local Control Station For each Sump Pump the following will be provided on a local control station. • Local—Off—Auto (LOA three position switch) • Reset Push Button • Start Push Button • Stop Push Button • Run Light • Fault Light For Pump Station the following will be provided on a local control station • Emergency stop push button • Pump 1 Lead—Alternate—Pump 2 Lead (three position switch) • Flooded Light Intermediate Control Panel None SCADA Control Operation wand Alarm Reset CALIA'Manual None SCADA Auto None SCAIIA Dis la e,. „, „, , , , „„ „ .„, Status and Process Display For each pump the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Running/Stopped Status • Pump Fault For both of the pumps the following will be displayed on SCADA. • Flooded Operator Entries None SCADA Alarms and Resets For each of the pumps the following alarms will exist. • Pump Fault • Pump Running For both of the pumps the following alarm will exist. • Flooded Hard ;:Wired.Interlocks None • Clean Water Services 17101_13 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_13 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: AB5 Tunnel Sumps ill Software Interlocks None Historical Trending • Running status for each pump • All alarms Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) Pump Run Times shall be calculated from the historian. .Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence None Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption Control shall resume with the control mode established prior to the power failure. • Reference Documentation (P&IDs, Loop:Dwgs , Wiring Diagrams, • P&ID Tunnel Sump Pumps • Clean Water Services 17101_13 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17101_14 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: ELECTRICAL ROOM HVAC Electrical Room HVAC Control.Loop Description Process Description: The Electrical Room HVAC System Air Conditioning Unit(ACU) is located in the Electrical Building. A thermostat is provided for controlling the ACU and temperature transmitter is provided for monitoring the electrical room temperature on SCADA. Last Update:ei' Design Phase Approved By: Equipment Unit Equipment: qui ment • Air Conditioning Unit 1 960ACU5001 Instrumentation: Tag Number—Description Calibration Range • 960TIC5001 —Electrical Building Thermostat 35-100 Deg. Fahrenheit • 960TIT5002—Electrical Building Temperature Monitoring 35-100 Deg. Fahrenheit • 960YA5001 —Electrical Building ACU Fail • Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset Motor Control Center None VFD Control Panel None manufacturer's SuppliedControl Panel None Local Control Station None Intermediate Control Panel None 1111 Clean Water Services 17101_14 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17101_14 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION: ELECTRICAL ROOM HVAC SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA Manual None SCADA Auto None SCADA Display p Ye Status;,and Process Display • Electrical Building ACU Fail • Electrical Building Temperature Operator Entries None SCADA Alarms and Resets • Electrical Building ACU Fail Hard-wired;Interlocks None Software Interlocks None Historical Trending • Temperature • All alarms Equipment Run Time Counters'(Hourly) None Equipment Failure Sequence None Equipment None Equipment'(Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption The ACU will resume operation automatically upon restoration of power. Reference Documentation (P&IDs, Loop Dwgs , Wiring Diagrams, etc.) • P&ID HVAC Drawing Sheet 1 of 2 • Clean Water Services 17101_14 Control Loop Description Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • Section 17201 LEVEL MEASUREMENT - SWITCHES AND FLOATS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Tilt Switch Ball Float Switch. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, • materials, etc. Clean Water Services 17201 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Physical conditions: • a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition that does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1111 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Ball Float Level Switch: a. US Filter 9GEF. b. ITT Flygt Model ENM-10. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Tilting Float Type Liquid Level Switch: 1. General: a. Free hanging, encapsulated body with a switch to determine position of float. 111 Clean Water Services 17201 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2. Element: a. Mechanical switch encapsulated in waterproof floating polypropylene ball of nominal, supported by flexible PVC cable: b. Mercury switches are not acceptable. c. Lead Wires: Mounted in flexible waterproof PVC cable from switch to junction box terminals without splices. 3. Switch: a. Single pole double throw contacts rated 10 amps resistive at 120 VAC. b. Outputs: 1) Relay outputs: a) 1 Form C contact b) 1 DPDT Rated at 5 amps at 120 VAC c. Adjustments: 1) Mount for field adjustment of level trip set points. d. Provide the number of floats per level system as shown on the Drawings. e. Suspend ball float and adjust for level setpoint as required. 4. Components: a. Floats shall include type 316 stainless steel clamp and brackets and 1/4 inch cable to allow testing of the float without entering the basin or wet well. • b. Provide strain relief at both ends of the float cable. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations that use a tuning fork or capacitance probe level switches. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. • Clean Water Services 17201 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. End of Section Clean Water Services 17201 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 Section 17203 LEVEL MEASUREMENT - SUBMERSIBLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Submersible Pressure Sensing Level Transmitters. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, • materials, etc. Clean Water Services 17203 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Physical conditions: 1111 a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 411 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Wika LH-20 2. Endress + Hauser Waterpilot FMX21 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. The level transmitter system shall consist of a submersible pressure sensor/transmitter unit that is suitable for direct submersion into the liquid being measured. The sensor shall be a solid-state variable capacitance or diffused silicon semiconductor type that shall provide an output signal directly proportional to the sensed pressure over a factory-calibrated range. The sensor assembly shall have a stainless steel or titanium housing and shall be supported by a polyethylene or II/ Clean Water Services 17203 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • urethane jacketed cable with a minimum 200 lb test strength. The sensor cable shall be of sufficient length so that no splice or connector is required in the wet or inaccessible area, and the vent tube termination point is located in an area protected from dirt and moisture. The sensor shall be suitable for wastewater applications. B. The transmitter shall have a two-wire type 4 to 20 mA dc current output that is proportional to level. The output shall have surge protection, and shall not be damaged by reverse polarity. The transmitter shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of 0° to +50°C. Accuracy of the level transmitter shall be ±0.25 percent "best straight line", with an overall combined accuracy of±1 percent over the entire operating temperature/pressure range. The transmitter shall support HART Protocol. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. The sensor cable shall terminate into a junction box with a manufacturer moisture filter to prevent moisture from entering the tubing within the cable. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17203 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.03 ADJUSTING • A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. • 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required • instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. End of Section • Clean Water Services 17203 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Switches and Floats Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • Section 17204 LEVEL MEASUREMENT - LASER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Laser Sensing Level Transmitters. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, • materials, etc. Clean Water Services 17204 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Laser Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. • b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 411 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. ABB Group - Model LLT100 2. No known equal 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Laser level transmitter shall be a microprocessor based electronic unit consisting of an integral sensor assembly, and a signal converter/transmitter. The assembly shall be housed in an aluminum or stainless steel body. Each sensor/transmitter shall operate over a temperature range of 40° to +140°F and a relative humidity of 10 to 100 percent. The sensor shall be compatible with the process media being measured. Each level sensor/transmitter shall be an explosion- • Clean Water Services 17204 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Laser Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • proof or intrinsically safe design suitable for use in all hazardous areas. Each sensor shall be provided with a heated window accessory to prevent condensation on the optics. The System Supplier shall provide 4-wire power to utilize this feature. B. The supplier shall coordinate the sensor mounting requirements and furnish drawings complete with dimensions and elevations. General installation requirements are indicated on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise indicated, mounting and installation hardware shall be provided and shall be Type 316L stainless steel. Each laser sensor/transmitter shall be provided with an optional swivel flange assembly. Each laser sensor/transmitter shall be provided with an optional alignment laser pointer. D. The transmitter shall have a rotating display with a touch through-the- glass interface scaled to read in engineering units. The transmitter shall be loop powered. The transmitter output shall be an isolated 4 20 mA dc signal linearly proportional to the measured level range, or where indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule, shall be characterized to be proportional to the wetwell volume. Calibration parameters shall be entered through a keypad on the unit and shall be stored in nonvolatile EEPROM memory. The • transmitter shall have an integral LCD display scaled to read in engineering units. The transmitter shall be designed to ignore momentary level spikes or momentary loss of signal. A loss of signal condition shall be indicated on the transmitter unit. The transmitter output shall be an isolated, loop-powered 4 - 20 mA dc signal linearly proportional to the measured level range. Accuracy of the transmitted signal shall be ± 0.5 inch or better. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. The sensor cable shall terminate into a junction box with a manufacturer moisture filter to prevent moisture from entering the tubing within the cable. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17204 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Laser Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. End of Section • Clean Water Services 17204 Level Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Laser Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • Section 17302 FLOW MEASUREMENT - MAGNETIC FLOW METERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes requirements for: 1. Full-body magnetic flow meters. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. C. The Report DC-1 Designer Checklists Volume 1 - Flow meters, published by the Water and Wastewater Instrumentation Testing Association. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures, and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Furnish complete Product Data, Shop Drawings, Test Reports, Operating Manuals, Record Drawings, manufacturer's certifications, manufacturer's Field Reports, and other submittals as specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation 111 Materials and Methods, and below. Clean Water Services 17302 Flow Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Magnetic Flow Meters Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 C. Product Data: 111 1. Dimensional Drawings. 2. Materials of Construction: a. Metering Tube. b. Liner. c. Electrodes. d. Flanges. 3. Measurement accuracy. 4. Range and range ability. 5. Enclosure Rating. 6. Classification Rating. 7. Power: a. Voltage. b. Wattage. 8. Output options. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Connection diagram. 2. Loop diagram. 3. Mounting drawings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory Calibration: • 1. Magnetic flow meters shall be factory calibrated on an approved test stand with certified accuracy traceable to NIST. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, and noted herein. B. Store all instruments in a dedicated structure with space conditioning to meet the recommended storage requirements provided by the manufacturer. C. Any instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendation shall be replaced. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. • Clean Water Services 17302 Flow Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Magnetic Flow Meters Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • B. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Rosemount - 8712E 2. Krohne - IFS 4000 3. Endress + Hauser- Promag W 4. Foxboro - 9500A 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Magnetic flowmeter systems shall be based upon Faraday's Law of electromagnetic induction by using low frequency electromagnetic induction to produce a DC pulsed linear signal, which is directly proportional to the liquid flow rate. 2. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flowmeter system. 3. Include for each magnetic flow metering system: a. A metering tube with electrodes (sensor). b. Signal cable. c. Transmitter integral or remote as indicated on the Drawings. d. Flow meter grounding rings. B. Performance requirements: 1. Time constant: a. 0.5 to 50 seconds. 2. Accuracy: a. 0.50 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent of full scale • for velocities over 3 feet per second. Clean Water Services 17302 Flow Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Magnetic Flow Meters Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3. Repeatability: • a. 0.25 percent of full scale. C. Metering tube: 1. Constructed of stainless steel with flanged connections to match with piping material. a. Liner: Teflon, unless otherwise indicated on the Instrument Schedule. 2. Electrodes: 316L Stainless Steel, unless otherwise indicated on the Instrument Schedule. 3. Meter terminal housing IP68. 4. Meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish. 5. 2 grounding rings: a. Which are in conformance with the manufacturer's bore and material recommendation for the meter's intended service. b. Designed to protect and shield from abrasion of the liner's edge interface at the meter's end. D. Transmitter: 1. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter. 2. Utilize DC pulse technique to drive flux-producing coils. 3. Convert DC pulse signal from the tube to a standard 4-20 mA signal. 4. Output: • a. Analog Output 4-20 mA into 500 ohm load at 24 VDC, linearly proportional to measured flow range. 5. Contain a 6-digit display for flow rate, percent of span, and totalizer. 6. Operator interface consisting of a keypad that responds to English text entry. 7. Integral low flow cut-off zero return. 8. Bi-directional flow. 9. Empty Pipe Detection. 10. Automatic range change. 11. Programmable parameters including: a. Meter size. b. Full-scale flow rate. c. Magnetic field frequency. d. Time constant. 12. Data retention for a minimum of 5 years without auxiliary main or battery power. 13. Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking. 14. Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which isolates field connection from electronics. 15. Ambient operating temperature limits of-20 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit (-29 to 60 degrees Celsius). • Clean Water Services 17302 Flow Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Magnetic Flow Meters Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 E. Power supply: 1. 120 VAC ± 10 percent, 60 Hz, 55 Watts, maximum. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Stainless steel tag - labeled to match the Contract Documents. B. Provide sunshades and rain shields for all transmitters located outdoors. C. Furnish 1 spool piece for every size of magnetic flow tube being provided. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, and noted herein. B. Factory calibrate each flow metering system at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). C. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data indicating apparent and actual flows at 20 percent, 40 percent, 60 • percent, 80 percent and 100 percent of the calibrated range shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 30 days before shipment of the meters to the project site. D. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17302 Flow Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Magnetic Flow Meters Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.03 INSTALLATION • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. As shown on installation details and mechanical Drawings. C. As recommended by the manufacturer's installation and operation manual. D. Specific attention should be given to the following technical requirements: 1. Verify ground rings have been installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Demonstrate the performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. ENGINEER to witness all instrument calibration verification in the field. • D. Each instrument shall be tested before commissioning and the ENGINEER shall witness the response in the PLC control system and associated registers. E. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturers' representative shall verify installation of all installed flow tubes and transmitters. 2. Notify the ENGINEER in writing of any problems or discrepancies and proposed solutions. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform any supplemental calibration specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17302 Flow Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Magnetic Flow Meters Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning. Replace any instruments damaged before commissioning: 1. The ENGINEER shall be the sole party responsible for determining the corrective measures. 3.09 SCHEDULES • A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Furnish all instruments identified on the Contract Drawings or in the Contract Specifications. If an instrument is shown on one of these Documents, it shall be considered to be shown on all. B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Instrument Data Sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format. C. The Instrument List is included as a guideline for the supply of instruments. The Instrument List is not complete; some information needed to order and specify the required instruments is not included. End of Section 1111 Clean Water Services 17302 Flow Measurement Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Magnetic Flow Meters Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 17305 FLOW MEASUREMENT - THERMAL MASS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: a. Thermal mass flow measurement for permanent installations. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data sheets. 1.02 REFERENCES • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Surface Mount Technology: The practice and method of attaching leaded and non-leaded electrical components to the surface of a conductive pattern that does not utilize leads in feed through holes. This technology reduces power requirements for the thermal flow instruments. C. Retract mechanism: A device, which holds the sensor probe in place for the flow measurement. This device also includes a mechanism, which enables the plant maintenance staff to remove the probe easily for cleaning and other maintenance need. This device also enables the plant maintenance staff to re-insert the sensor probe back into its original position without leakage for measurement service again. 110 Clean Water Services 17305 Flow Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Thermal Mass Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 01330 • Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Furnish complete Product Data Sheets in ISA form, Shop Drawings, Test Reports, Operating and Installation Manuals, Record Drawings, Manufacturer's Field Reports, and other submittals in the format as specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. C. Additional Requirements: Provide operating procedures for the probe retract mechanism. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal mass flow meters shall be factory calibrated on an approved test stand with certified accuracy traceable to NIST. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Store all instruments in a dedicated structure with space conditioning • to meet the recommended storage requirements provided by the manufacturer: 1. Replace instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendation shall be replaced. C. Pack the retract mechanism with proper identification label with its own assembly instruction manual. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature and humidity conditions. B. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. II) Clean Water Services 17305 Flow Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Thermal Mass Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • B. In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, provide Manufacturer's warranty for each instrument for a period of 1 year after project substantial completion. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flow Measurement Compressed Air Service: 1. Fluid Components International (FCI(D) - Model No. ST100 with thermal dispersion flow element, transmitter, and a balance retract mechanism for the probe sensor, without exception. 2. Flow conditioner shall be FCI Vortab model "VIP" without exception. 111 MANUFACTURED UNITS B. General: 1. Insertion thermal mass flow meter shall be able to measure air flow, industrial, and process gas mass flows by detecting the heat transfer from a heated RTD sensor referenced to the temperature of the ambient gas stream sensor. The electronic circuitry shall either maintain a constant differential temperature between the gas temperature and the heated element or a constant power. The electronic circuitry shall deliver a linear signal 4 to 20mA DC output proportional to the process fluid flow. 2. Thermal mass flow switches shall be able to measure water flow and shall be calibrated to open a dry contact above the calibrated range and close the dry contact below the calibrated range. 3. Each thermal mass flow system shall include: a. RTD sensor(s). b. Signal cable. c. Remote or local mounted transmitter to be FM approved or UL listed for the appropriate electrical area classification. d. A balance retract mechanism or hot tap installation for removing and insertion of the probe sensor assembly. C. Flow Element Sensor with Terminal Enclosure: • 1. Constructed of NEMA 4X cast aluminum housing. Clean Water Services 17305 Flow Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Thermal Mass Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Utilize a 316 stainless steelsensor with 3/4-inch male NPT • process connection. 3. No overheat at zero flow. D. Remote mount transmitter: 1. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter. 2. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X. a. Isolated 4-20 milliampere direct current into 650 ohm load without need for external load adjustments. Linearly proportional to measured level range proportional to tank or vessel volume instead of level where indicated. 3. Contain an alphanumeric display for flow rate. 4. Ambient operating temperature limits of 0 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit. E. Signal Cable between Sensor Head and Transmitter: 1. Transmitter shall be able to install 500 feet away from the sensor head assembly without impact on performance and accuracy. 2. Provide adequate signal cable per Plan Drawings plus extra 6 feet long(coil it up for future need.) F. Performance requirements: 1. Time constant: a. 1 to 50 seconds. • 2. Accuracy: a. 1.5 percent of full scale for velocities over 2 feet per second. 3. Repeatability: a. 0.5 percent of full scale. G. Power supply: 1. 120 VAC ± 10 percent. 2. 60 Hz. 3. 3 Watts Max. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Provide a balance retract mechanism for insertion and retraction of the probe sensor assembly. B. Software (if available as either a standard or an option) for full validation of instrument performances. C. Provide rain-hood and sun shield to minimize glare and effects from UV. D. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. • Clean Water Services 17305 Flow Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Thermal Mass Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • E. Provide isolation valves on insertion of probe sensor assembly for air service measreuments. F. Flow Conditioning: 1. Insertion type flow conditioners shall be provided for all air service flow measurements. 2. The Contractor shall review the mechanical Drawings for size and location of conditioners. 3. Body material and wetted parts shall be 316 stainless steel unless measured media as noted on instrument list requires different material compatibility minimizing chemical effets. 4. Flow conditioner shall be provided by the flowmeter manufacturer. 5. Flow conditioner shall be FCI Vortab model "VIP" without exception. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, and noted herein. B. Factory calibrate each thermal mass flow metering system at a facility that is traceable to the Nation Institute of Testing Standards, using the same medium, as the instrument will be measuring in the field. • C. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data indicating apparent and actual flows at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, 100 percent, 75 percent, 50 percent, 25 percent and 0 percent (a 9-point calibration in both ascending and descending directions) of the calibrated range shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 30 days before shipment of the meters to the project site. D. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. • Clean Water Services 17305 Flow Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Thermal Mass Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.02 PREPARATION • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Site Test and Inspection: 1. Perform installed tests in accordance with Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. C. Demonstrate the performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. D. ENGINEER to witness all instrument calibration verification in the • field. E. Each instrument shall be tested before commissioning and the ENGINEER shall witness the response in the PLC control system and associated registers. F. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturer authorized technician shall inspect and approve each flowmeter installation. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform any supplemental calibration specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17305 Flow Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Thermal Mass Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any instruments damaged before commissioning: 1. The ENGINEER shall be the sole party responsible for determining the corrective measures. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. See the schedule included with Section 17901, Instrument List for additional information. B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control 111 Instrumentation Materials and Methods for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Furnish Instrument Data Sheets in hard copy format. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17305 Flow Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Thermal Mass Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 17316 ROTAMETERS (VARIABLE AREA FLOW METERS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Rotameters (variable area flow meters). B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, • materials, etc. Clean Water Services 17316 Rotameters Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- (Variable Area Flow Meters) Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Physical conditions: 4111 a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.09 MAINTENANCE • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. ABB. 2. Brooks. 3. King Instrument Company. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Rotameters: 1. General: a. Variable area type flow meters with local flow indication. b. Glass Tube type. • Clean Water Services 17316 Rotameters Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- (Variable Area Flow Meters) Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2. Performance requirements: a. Flow Range: 1) As specified by pump manufacturer. b. Accuracy: 1) Glass Tube: ±2.0 percent of range. 2) Repeatability: 0.50 percent of range. 3. Element: a. Flow tube: 1) Glass Tube: Borosilicate glass, or as required to be compatible with the process conditions. b. Turndown: 10 to 1. c. Process Temperature: 1) Glass Tube: 32 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit. d. Maximum Process Pressure: 1) Glass Tube: 100 psig. 2) Size tube for the largest of the following: a) 2.0 times the normal flow rate. b) 1.2 times the maximum flow rate. c) 4.0 times the minimum flow rate. e. Float: 1) Design to provide the widest possible immunity band change in viscosity. • 2) Metal Tube Rotameters: float with encapsulated magnet. 4. Components: a. Seals: 0-rings or packing glands fully compatible with process fluid. b. Integral needle valve for flow control. c. [Integral Alarm Limit Switches: 1) Dual alarm. 2) Adjustable by repositioning alarm switches.] 5. Scale: a. Metal Tube: Dial indicator with rotatable magnet coupled to magnet encapsulated in rotameter float. 6. Other: a. Process Connection: 1) As indicated on the Mechanical Drawings. b. Mounting: 1) As indicated on the Drawings. 2) Provide all necessary hardware for rotameter mounting. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17316 Rotameters Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- (Variable Area Flow Meters) Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control 411 Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17316 Rotameters Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- (Variable Area Flow Meters) Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • SECTION 17401 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIAPHRAGM AND ANNULAR SEALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Diaphragm seals. 2. Annular seals. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty • of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. C. Provide all seals identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17401 PressureNacuum Measurement: Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Diaphragm and Annular Seals Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.04 SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Additional requirements: 1. Product data: a. Manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Seal type. c. Body materials. d. Diaphragm material. e. Fill fluid type. f. Seal size. g. Options. h. Process connection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: • 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17401 PressureNacuum Measurement: Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Diaphragm and Annular Seals Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.08 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Diaphragm seals: 1. For chemical applications, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures greater than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch gauge: One of the following or equal: a. Rosemount 1199. B. Annular seals: 1. One of the following or equal: • a. Ashcroft Iso-Ring. b. Onyx Valve. c. Red Valve. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Diaphragm seals: 1. General: a. Diaphragm seal and pressure instrument shall be assembled by pressure instrument manufacturer and shipped as an assembly. 2. Requirements: a. Seal type: 1) Metallic diaphragm: Welded to upper housing. b. Process connection: 4 inch flange. c. Instrument connection: 1/2 inch NPT. d. Material Construction: Type 316 Stainless Steel. e. Provide 1/4-inch flushing connection in diaphragm lower housing or provide flushing ring. f. Flush port plug: Same material of construction as diaphragm lower housing.] g. Provide fill/bleed connection. h. Mounting: As indicated in the Contract Documents. • Clean Water Services 17401 PressureNacuum Measurement: Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Diaphragm and Annular Seals Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 i. Provide Type 316 stainless steel armored capillary for all remote installations. j. Nuts and bolts: Type 316 stainless steel. k. Materials of construction: 1) Sewage, sludge, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch: a) Diaphragm: Type 316 stainless steel. b) Lower housing: Type 316 stainless steel. c) Upper housing: Manufacturer's standard. d) Fill fluid: Silicon oil. 2) Sewage, sludge, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures greater than 15 pounds per square inch: a) Diaphragm: Type 316 stainless steel. b) Lower housing: Type 316 stainless steel. c) Upper housing: Manufacturer's standard. d) Fill fluid: Silicon oil. 3) Engineer's approval. B. Annular seals: 1. General: a. Inside diameter of annular seal shall provide uninterrupted flow: • 1) There shall be no dead ends or crevices. 2) Process flow shall be sufficient to make the annular seal self-cleaning. b. The pressure sensing flexible cylinder shall measure pressure around the full inside circumference of the pipeline. 2. Requirements: a. Pressure rating: Equivalent to the ANSI flanges. b. Materials of construction: 1) Inner flexible cylinder: Manufacturer's standard. 2) Body: a) Carbon Steel with epoxy coating. 3) Assembly flanges: To match adjacent piping. 4) Fill fluid: Silicon oil. c. Nominal pipe size: As indicated on the Drawings. d. Process connection: Wafer. e. Instrument connection: 1/2 inch NPT. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide field fill kits. • Clean Water Services 17401 PressureNacuum Measurement: Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Diaphragm and Annular Seals Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. C. Do not use Teflon thread seal tape on pressure instruments with silicon oil fill fluid. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 111 B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17401 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Diaphragm and Annular Seals Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.06 PROTECTION • A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 17401 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Diaphragm and Annular Seals Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • SECTION 17402 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT - INSTRUMENT VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Valve manifolds and instrument valves. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all valve manifolds and instrument valves identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data: a. Valve type. b. Body material. c. Size. d. Options. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Mounting details for all manifold valves. Clean Water Services 17402 PressureNacuum Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Instrument Valves Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Protect valve manifolds and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation. Repair coating where damaged. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17402 PressureNacuum Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Instrument Valves Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Valve Manifold Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Anderson Greenwood. 2. Hex Valve. 3. Noshok. 4. Rosemount. B. Block and Bleed Valve Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: C. Anderson Greenwood. 1. Hex Valve. D. Gauge Valve Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: E. Anderson Greenwood. 1. Hex Valve. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Valve Manifolds: 1. General: a. Provide 2-Valve, 3-valve, blowdown type 5-valve, or metering type 5-valve manifolds as indicated on the Drawings. b. Valve manifolds shall have one piece bonnet with a metal to metal seal to the valve body below the bonnet threads. 2. Requirements: a. Bonnet lock pin to prevent accidental loosening. b. Gas leak tested metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. d. Manifold valves shall have straight through portion for bi- directional flow and easy roddable cleaning. • Clean Water Services 17402 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Instrument Valves Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 e. Manifold valves shall allow for direct or remote instrument • mounting. f. Shall be able to withstand pressures up to 6,000 psi for soft seat valves and 10,000 psi for hard seat valves at maximum 200 degrees Fahrenheit. g. Materials of Construction: 1) Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 2) 0-Ring: Teflon. h. 2-Valve Manifolds: 1) 1 isolation valve and 1 drain/vent and calibration valve. i. 3-Valve Manifolds: 1) 2 isolation valves and 1 equalizing valve for differential pressure applications. 2) Plugged vent connections used for vent/drain or calibration. j. Blowdown 5-Valve Manifold: 1) 2 isolation valves, 1 equalizing valve, 2 blowdown valves for differential pressure applications. k. Metering 5-Valve Manifold: • 1) 2 isolation valves, 2 equalizing valves, 1 vent/drain and calibration valve for differential pressure applications. B. Block and Bleed Valves: 1. General: a. Valve shall provide process isolation and venting/draining capabilities. b. Gas leak tested metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. 2. Requirements: a. Materials of Construction: 1) Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 2) 0-Ring: Teflon. • Clean Water Services 17402 PressureNacuum Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Instrument Valves Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • C. Gauge Valves: 1. General: a. Valve shall provide process isolation from pressure instrument. b. Gas leak tested metal to metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. 2. Requirements: a. Materials of Construction: 1) Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 2) 0-Ring: Teflon. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide tube fitting, female NPT, or pipe butt weld connections if necessary. B. Provide stainless steel concentric or eccentric pipe nipples when • necessary. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the with n o all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. • Clean Water Services 17402 PressureNacuum Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Instrument Valves Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17402 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement- Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Instrument Valves Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 SECTION 17403 • PRESSURENACUUM MEASUREMENT - SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Pressure/vacuum switch instruments. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data: a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and pulsation dampeners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation • Materials and Methods. Clean Water Services 17403 Pressure Vacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Measurement- Switches Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: • 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation • Materials and Methods. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mechanical Type Pressure Switch: One of the following or equal: 1. Ashcroft B Series Type 400. 2. United Electric Controls 400 Series. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Mechanical Type Pressure Switches: 1. General: a. Pressure switch shall be diaphragm or diaphragm-sealed piston type. • Clean Water Services 17403 Pressure Vacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Measurement- Switches Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2. Performance requirements: • a. Pressure Range: 1) As specified in instrument list or schedule. b. Accuracy: 1) ±1.0 percent of range. c. Repeatability: 1) ±1.0 percent of range. 3. Element: a. Type: Diaphragm, diaphragm-sealed piston, or bourdon tube. b. Overpressure: 1) Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage to switch or sensing element. 2) Minimum 400percent of nominal range without leakage or rupture. c. Sensing element shall not require ambient temperature compensation. d. Wetted Materials: Stainless Steel. e. Set point: 1) Dual. 2) Switch shall activate at set point on increasing pressure for high-pressure alarm applications and on decreasing pressure for low-pressure alarm applications. f. Adjustable deadband. • g. Switch elements: 1) Snap acting. 2) Single pole-double throw (SPDT). 3) Rated at 10A, 125/250VAC. 4) Automatic reset type. h. Enclosure: Epoxy coated NEMA 4X. i. Switch Mounting: 1) Process connection: 1/2-inch NPT. 4. Components: a. Provide all necessary hardware for pressure switch mounting. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pulsation Dampeners and Snubbers: 1. Provide pulsation dampener or snubber as indicated on the instrument schedule. 2. Materials: Stainless Steel. 3. Connection: 1/4 NPT. B. Provide seals as indicated on the instrument schedule. • Clean Water Services 17403 Pressure Vacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Measurement- Switches Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation • Materials and Methods. B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or 1111 verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. • Clean Water Services 17403 Pressure Vacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Measurement-Switches Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 3.06 PROTECTION • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 17403 Pressure Vacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Measurement-Switches Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17404 • PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT - GAUGES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Pressure/Vacuum gauges. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents 1.02 REFERENCES A. A.Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data: a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and pulsation dampeners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. Clean Water Services 17404 PressureNacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Measurement- Gauges Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: • 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. 3. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Ashcroft 1279. 2. Wika. 3. Ametek U.S. Gauge. • Clean Water Services 17404 PressureNacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Measurement-Gauges Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Pressure gauge assembly shall include pressure sensing element, gauge case, and dial mechanism. B. Performance requirements: 1. Pressure Range: a. Per Instrument Schedule, or as recommended by the related equipment vendor. 2. Accuracy: a. ±1.0 percent of span after friction errors are eliminated by tapping or vibration. b. Maximum allowable friction inaccuracy: 1.0 percent of span. 3. Element: a. Type: Bourdon tube. b. Overpressure: Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage to gauge or sensing element. c. Wetted Materials: Stainless Steel unless otherwise indicated on the Instrument Schedule. d. Dial Gauge: e. Dial Size: 4-1/2 inches. f. Dial case material: Phenolic • g. Dry Type. h. Dial face: Gasketed Polycarbonate. i. Connection and Mounting: 1) Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation. 2) Connection Location: Lower. 3) 1/2 inch NPT. 4) Connection Material: Stainless Steel j. Pointer: Fixed. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pulsation Dampeners and Snubbers: 1. Provide pulsation dampener or snubber with each pressure gauge. 2. Provide piston-type snubber if pressure spikes will exceed 130 percent of gauge maximum range. 3. Materials: Stainless Steel. 4. Mount pulsation dampener or snubber integrally to the pressure gauge. 5. Connection: 1/2-inch NPT. • Clean Water Services 17404 PressureNacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Measurement-Gauges Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 B. Provide integral pulsation dampeners as indicated on the Instrument • Schedule and as specified in Section 17401, Diaphragm and Annular Seals: 1. Diaphragm seal and pressure gauge shall be assembled by Manufacturer and shipped as an assembly. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory calibrate each pressure gauge at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the • mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. • Clean Water Services 17404 PressureNacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Measurement- Gauges Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning: 1. Furnish 8 hours of OWNER training. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: • 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17404 Pressure/Vacuum Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Measurement- Gauges Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • This Page Intentionally Blank • • SECTION 17505 • AMMONIA ANALYZERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Ammonia Analyzers for permanent installations. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its SUBCONTRACTORS to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data sheets. 1.02 REFERENCES • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. C. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17505 Ammonia Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. Product Data: • 1. Complete manufacturer's brochures that identify instrument construction, accuracy, ranges, materials, and options. Mark up to clearly show options and components to be provided, and cross out any options or components that will not be provided. 2. Completed instrument data sheets in ISA format, including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Mechanical connection diagrams. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. D. Test Reports: 1. Certified field calibration data sheets for each instrument. E. Operating Manuals: 1. Complete installation, operation, calibration, and testing manuals. F. Record Drawings: • 1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC I/O address, register, and scaling coefficients. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. 4. Instrument data sheets. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that instruments have been installed properly and that the application of the instrument is within the instrument's specified capabilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certified by UL or ETL. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. Clean Water Services 17505 Ammonia Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. B. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, the probes shall be warrantied for a period of two years from Substantial Completion; or three years from installation, whichever is greater. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. 1111 B. Provide one spare transmitter and two spare probes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Hach Company, Model AISE with SC200 Controller (0-1000 mg/L) 2. YSI AmmoLyt with IQ SensorNet XT Controller (0-1000 mg/L) 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Analyzer for monitoring of ammonium nitrogen in wastewater, with predictive diagnostics capability to monitor instrument status. The measurement method will be by ion selective electrodes (ISE). A differential pH electrode is used for reference. A potassium ISE is used to correct the ammonium value for the presence of potassium ion. Analyzers shall provide local indication in process units and shall be provided with calibration • facilities at the analyzer. Clean Water Services 17505 Ammonia Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2. The Probe shall be constructed of stainless steel. • 3. All components such as probes, associated fittings, mounting kit, cleaning unit, transmitters, and interconnection cables, of an analyzing system shall be of the same manufacturer. 4. The analyzer shall measure ammonia in units of milligrams per Liter (mg/L). 5. The sensor shall have a detection limit of 0.2 mg/L and a response time less than 3 minutes. 6. The sensors shall be provided with sensor brackets, mounting hardware, environmental connectors, and accessory kits. 7. The analyzer shall be 120 VAC and shall have a controller which shall communicate with a PLC over Profibus DP. 8. The controller shall be microprocessor based, 120 VAC and housed in a NEMA 4X housing. 9. The mounting bracket for the sensor shall be stainless steel with quick release pin for 2" handrail mounting and shall be suitable for the probe provided. a. Hardware shall be YSI (YSI 245 8000Y mounting bracket with YSI 559327-2Y threaded PVC sensor coupling, YSI 2559327-4Y slotted PVC end cap, and YSI 559327-7Y PVC • coupler) or equal. 10. An automatic air blast cleaning system shall be provided to periodically jet air across the sensor head. The air blast cleaning system shall be furnished with all components necessary for a complete operating system and shall be compatible with the sensors being cleaned as well as the instrument's transmitter. Air from the service air system, at a nominal pressure of 90 psi, will be supplied upstream of each air blast system's air supply regulator. Service air is shown on Contract Drawings. All wetted materials and tubing shall be 316 stainless steel. The air blast cleaning system at a minimum shall contain the following components: a. Air supply regulator to reduce the service air system pressure to a setpoint compatible with the sensor being cleaned. The setpoint shall be coordinated with the sensor being supplied. b. Ball valve upstream of the regulator for isolation of the entire air blast system. c. Solenoid valve to actuate blast of air to sensor. Solenoid shall be controlled and powered by the transmitter. • Clean Water Services 17505 Ammonia Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project d. Head assembly to force air across the face of the sensor. • e. Sequencer to control the solenoid valve opening and closing frequency and duration. Frequency and duration setpoints shall be field adjustable. B. Analyzer/Transmitter: 1. Display: a. Graphic dot matrix LCD to display Ammonia concentration. b. Alarms: User adjustable high and low alarms. c. Auxiliary Readout: 1) Diagnostic warnings 2) Error messages 3) Other information 4) Display ammonia concentration content equal to sensor reading accuracy. 2. Analog outputs: Dual 4-20 mA optically isolated outputs: • a. Proportional to Ammonia concentration. b. Sourcing type capable of driving 500 ohm load. 1) Relay Outputs: Two outputs corresponding to high and low alarm conditions. 2) Serial Communication: Not used. c. Stainless steel equipment tag 3. Mounting Hardware: Suitable to support panel, surface, horizontal pipe, and vertical pipe mounting. 4. Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X. 5. Automatic temperature compensation. 6. Relay outputs: a. 3 form C outputs. b. Rated 5 ampere at 120 VAC. c. Programmable. 7. Communication: Not required. 8. Power supply: 120 VAC. 11111 Clean Water Services 17505 Ammonia Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. • 2. Humidity range: 15 percent to 95 percent relative humidity. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Calibration Equipment: 1. Provide components recommended by the manufacturer to verify calibration. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory-calibrate each analyzer at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. C. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17505 Ammonia Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Method. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Sections 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. See Section 17901, Instrument List for additional information, B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Furnish Instrument Data Sheets in hard copy format. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17505 Ammonia Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 17506 DISSOLVED OXYGEN ANALYZER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Dissolved Oxygen (DO) analyzer for permanent installations. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its SUBCONTRACTORS to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data sheets. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. C. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. DO - Dissolved oxygen. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17506 DO Analyzer Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. Product Data: • 1. Complete manufacturer's brochures that identify instrument construction, accuracy, ranges, materials, and options. Mark up to clearly show options and components to be provided, and cross out any options or components that will not be provided. 2. Completed instrument data sheets in ISA format, including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Mechanical connection diagrams. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. D. Test Reports: 1. Certified field calibration data sheets for each instrument. E. Operating Manuals: 1. Complete installation, operation, calibration, and testing manuals. F. Record Drawings: 1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC I/O address, register, and scaling coefficients. • 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. 4. Instrument data sheets. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that instruments have been installed properly and that the application of the instrument is within the instrument's specified capabilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certified by UL or ETL. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and • ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. Clean Water Services 17506 DO Analyzer Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, the probes shall be warrantied for a period of two years from Substantial Completion; or three years from installation, whichever is greater. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. B. Provide one spare transmitter and two spare probes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS IP A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hach LDO probe with Hach sc200 Universal Controller no exceptions. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Performance Requirement: a. Measuring range: 0 to 20 ppm. b. Accuracy: 1 percent of full scale: 1) Within 2 ppm for valves above 1 ppm. 2) Within .1 ppm for valves below 1 ppm. c. Repeatability: 0.1 ppm. d. Response time: 90 percent value in less than 60 seconds. B. DO Sensor: 1. Optical type that measures the fluorescence or luminescence of a ruthenium or platinum coated sensor. 2. Using no membrane, electrodes, or electrolyte. 3. Drift: less than 1 percent per year. 4. Automatic self-diagnostics. • Clean Water Services 17506 DO Analyzer Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 5. Sensor to transmitter cable: a. Provide lengths as required based on the actual installation. • b. Provide four(4) 100-foot extension cables in addition to cables required for installation locations shown on the drawings. 6. Integral temperature sensor. 7. Maximum pressure: 100 psi. 8. Power supply: From transmitter through the sensor cable. 9. Enclosure: NEMA 6. 10. Provide pressurized air cleaning system using the instrument air available on the deck. 11. Provide an instrument interface terminal box at each primary and alternate probe location. The terminal box shall contain a bulkhead mounted quick disconnect for the sensor probe electrical connections and for the air cleaning tube. C. Analyzer/Transmitter: 1. Microprocessor based with features resident in non-volatile memory. 2. Analog outputs: Dual 4-20 mA optically isolated outputs: a. Proportional to Dissolved Oxygen. b. Sourcing type capable of driving 500 ohm load. 1) Relay Outputs: Two outputs shall be configured to drive a 120 VAC solenoid operated air blast cleaning valves. • 2) Serial Communication: Not used. c. Solenoid valves shall be supplied with the DO transmitter. 3. Display dissolved oxygen content with 0.01 ppm resolution over a range of 0.00 to 3.99 ppm and 0.1 ppm resolution over a range of 4.0 to 20.0 ppm. 4. Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X. 5. Automatic temperature compensation. 6. Relay outputs: a. 3 form C outputs. b. Rated 5 ampere at 120 VAC. c. Programmable. 7. Communication: Not required. 8. Power supply: 120 VAC. 9. Mounting Hardware: Suitable to support panel, surface, horizontal pipe, and vertical pipe mounting. D. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 2. Humidity range: 15 percent to 95 percent relative humidity. • Clean Water Services 17506 DO Analyzer Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Calibration Equipment: 1. Provide components recommended by the manufacturer to verify calibration. B. Provide probe mounting system to allow the probe to be easily removed from the process flow for maintenance. Provide two probe mounts for each sensor provided. Each probe has been assigned an alternate mounting location. A mount shall be installewd on both the primary and alternate locations. C. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory-calibrate each analyzer at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all • calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. C. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17506 DO Analyzer Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 3.03 INSTALLATION • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. The dissolved oxygen measurement system contains sensitive components. Do not install probes prior to filling of the basins. Install and test dissolved oxygen as part of basin start up. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Method. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. See the schedule included with Section 17901, Instrument List for additional information, B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Furnish Instrument Data Sheets in hard copy format. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17506 DO Analyzer Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • SECTION 17507 TOTAL SUSPENDED SOLIDS ANALYZERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Total Suspended Solids Analyzers (TSS) for permanent installations. a. Sensor immersion type b. In-line (pipe) type B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its SUBCONTRACTORS to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data sheets. • 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. C. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. TSS — Total Suspended Solids. • Clean Water Services 17507 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal 111 Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Product Data: 1. Complete manufacturer's brochures that identify instrument construction, accuracy, ranges, materials, and options. Mark up to clearly show options and components to be provided, and cross out any options or components that will not be provided. 2. Completed instrument data sheets in ISA format, including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Mechanical connection diagrams. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. D. Test Reports: 1. Certified field calibration data sheets for each instrument. E. Operating Manuals: • 1. Complete installation, operation, calibration, and testing manuals. F. Record Drawings: 1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC I/O address, register, and scaling coefficients. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. 4. Instrument data sheets. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that instruments have been installed properly and that the application of the instrument is within the instrument's specified capabilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certified by UL or ETL. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. Clean Water Services 17507 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. B. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, the probes shall be warrantied for a period of two years from Substantial Completion; or three years from installation, whichever is greater. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. • B. Provide one spare transmitter and two spare probes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Immersion Type a. Rosemount b. Hach Solitax c. WTW (Xylem Analytics) 2. In-line Type a. Hach Solitax a. Probe Mounting: LXV424.99.00100 b. Transmitter SC1000 c. Insertion Mount Kit for Solitax SC inline and Highline Insertion sensors. Product Number 5738400. b. Royce Technologies Probe 73P a. Probe Mounting: Ball Valve & Oring Kit b. Transmitter 7110 • Clean Water Services 17507 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS • A. General: 1. Performance Requirement: a. Range: 0 to 15,000 mg/L. b. Sensor Accuracy: , 1) Measurement: plus or minus 1% of reading or plus or minus 20 mg/L whichever is greater. 2) Measurement: plus or minus 5% of reading or plus or minus 100 mg/L whichever is greater. c. Repeatability: 0.1 ppm. d. Response time: 90 percent value in less than 60 seconds. B. TSS Sensor: 1. Light with photocell 2. Process Temperature Range: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F. 3. Process pressure Range: The WAS line will have a normal operating pressure of 10 psi with extremely temporary potential spikes up to 35 psi. The RAS line will have a maximum operating pressure of 7 psi. 4. Submersion Depth: 350 feet maximum. 5. Sensor Cable: Integral 33 feet of cable. Provide additional length as required. 6. Junction Box: Provide junction or termination box and extension • cable as required. 7. Mounting: 1-1/2 UNF - 12 UNF thread 8. Sensor to transmitter cable: a. Provide lengths as required based on the actual installation. b. Provide four(4) 100-foot extension cables in addition to cables required for installation locations shown on the drawings. 9. Power supply: From transmitter through the sensor cable. 10. Enclosure: NEMA 6. C. Analyzer/Transmitter: 1. Display: a. Graphic dot matrix LCD to display TSS b. Alarms: User adjustable high and low alarms. c. Auxiliary Readout: 1) Diagnostic warnings 2) Error messages 3) Other information 4) Display suspended solids content equal to sensor reading accuracy. • Clean Water Services 17507 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2. Analog outputs: Dual 4-20 mA optically isolated outputs: • a. Proportional to Total Suspended Solids. b. Sourcing type capable of driving 500 ohm load. 1) Relay Outputs: Two outputs corresponding to high and low alarm conditions. 2) Serial Communication: Not used. c. Stainless steel equipment tag 3. Mounting Hardware: Suitable to support panel, surface, horizontal pipe, and vertical pipe mounting. 4. Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X. 5. Automatic temperature compensation. 6. Relay outputs: a. 3 form C outputs. b. Rated 5 ampere at 120 VAC. c. Programmable. 7. Communication: Not required. 8. Power supply: 120 VAC. D. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 2. Humidity range: 15 percent to 95 percent relative humidity. 2.03 ACCESSORIES • A. Calibration Equipment: 1. Provide components recommended by the manufacturer to verify calibration. B. Provide automatic air blast cleaning system for probe contained in NEMA 4X enclosure. The air supply shall be from the existing plant supply. C. Provide probe mounting system to allow the probe to be easily removed from the process flow for maintenance. Provide two probe mounts for each sensor provided. Each probe has been assigned an alternate mounting location. A mount shall be installed on both the primary and alternate locations. D. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory-calibrate each analyzer at a facility that is traceable to the • National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). Clean Water Services 17507 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all • calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. C. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.03 INSTALLATION • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. The suspended solids measurement system contains sensitive components. Do not install probes prior to filling of the basins. Install and test suspended solids system as part of basin start up. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17950, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Sections 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1111 Clean Water Services 17507 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. See Section 17901, Instrument List for additional information, B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Furnish Instrument Data Sheets in hard copy format. 110 END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17507 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 17508 ON-LINE NUTRIENT ANALYZER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. This section covers an on-line monitoring system to be located at the Secondary clarifier No.5 for measuring NO2, NO3, NH3, and PO4. All samples consist of activated sludge mixed liquor, and solids concentrations will vary from 1,000 to 5,000 mg/L. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its SUBCONTRACTORS to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data sheets. • 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. C. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. NO2: NITRITE C. NO3: NITRATE D. NH3: AMMONIUM • E. PO4: PHOSPHATE Clean Water Services 17508 On-line Nutrient Analyzer System Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 1.04 SUBMITTALS • A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Product Data: 1. Complete manufacturer's brochures that identify instrument construction, accuracy, ranges, materials, and options. Mark up to clearly show options and components to be provided, and cross out any options or components that will not be provided. 2. Completed instrument data sheets in ISA format, including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Mechanical connection diagrams. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. D. Test Reports: 1. Certified field calibration data sheets for each instrument. E. Operating Manuals: • 1. Complete installation, operation, calibration, and testing manuals. F. Record Drawings: 1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC I/O address, register, and scaling coefficients. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. 4. Instrument data sheets. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that instruments have been installed properly and that the application of the instrument is within the instrument's specified capabilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certified by UL or ETL. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. Clean Water Services 17508 On-line Nutrient Analyzer System Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. B. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, the probes shall be warrantied for a period of two years from Substantial Completion; or three years from installation, whichever is greater. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. B. Provide one spare transmitter and two spare probes. • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. ChemScan® Process Analyzer, no exceptions. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Performance Requirement: a. Sample pressure specification is 2.0 to 10.0 psi with flow of 0.5 to 5 I/min b. Analyzer shall provide On-line analysis of the following parameters with a maximum calibration range of 5 percent as full range: Nitrite 0.1 - 5.0 mg/I as N Nitrate 0.1 — 30.0 mg/I as N Ammonia 0.2 — 30.0 mg/I as N Ortho-Phosphate 0.1 — 5.0 mg/I as P Clean Water Services 17508 On-line Nutrient Analyzer System Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 2. Field Service shall include: • a. Initial on-site installation assist and calibration b. Operation and Maintenance Training Travel expenses 3. Analyzer shall include a Validation/Analysis port to provide the owner with manual analysis of grab sample(s) from any process location with water quality equivalent to the specified duty and parameter(s). B. Analyzer Transmitter: 1. Display: a. Graphic dot matrix LCD to display Nitrite, Nitrate,Ammonia, and Ortho-Phosphate concentration measurement. 2. Analog 4 outputs, 4-20 mA optically isolated outputs 3. Mounting Hardware: Suitable to support panel, surface, horizontal pipe, and vertical pipe mounting. 4. Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X. 5. Power supply: 120 VAC 60Hz. 6. Relay outputs: a. 3 form C outputs. b. Rated 5 ampere at 120 VAC. c. Programmable. 7. Communication sensor to transmitter: RS-232 serial port. • 8. Provide Ethernet IP connectivity module in addition to hardwired analog points. C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature range: Operating temperature range shall be 34°- 140°F for sample liquid and 41°- 113°F ambient. 2. Mount indoors. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Calibration Equipment: 1. Provide components recommended by the manufacturer to verify calibration. B. Provide probe mounting system to allow the probe to be easily removed from the process flow for maintenance. Provide two probe mounts for each sensor provided. Each probe has been assigned an alternate mounting location. A mount shall be installed on both the primary and alternate locations. Clean Water Services 17508 On-line Nutrient Analyzer System Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 4110 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory-calibrate each analyzer at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. • C. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Method. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Sections 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17508 On-line Nutrient Analyzer System Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 3.06 CLEANING • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. See the schedule included with Section 17901, Instrument List for additional information, B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for additional requirements. • 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Furnish Instrument Data Sheets in hard copy format. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17508 On-line Nutrient Analyzer System Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project SECTION 17509 • NITRATE ANALYZERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Nitrate Analyzers for permanent installations. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its SUBCONTRACTORS to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data sheets. 1.02 REFERENCES • A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Refer to Section 17901, Instrument List for calibration and other requirements. C. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. S Clean Water Services 17509 Nitrate Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project B. Product Data: • 1. Complete manufacturer's brochures that identify instrument construction, accuracy, ranges, materials, and options. Mark up to clearly show options and components to be provided, and cross out any options or components that will not be provided. 2. Completed instrument data sheets in ISA format, including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Mechanical connection diagrams. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. D. Test Reports: 1. Certified field calibration data sheets for each instrument. E. Operating Manuals: 1. Complete installation, operation, calibration, and testing manuals. F. Record s:Drawin 1111 9 1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC I/O address, register, and scaling coefficients. 2. Sensor and transmitter mounting drawing with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. 4. Instrument data sheets. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that instruments have been installed properly and that the application of the instrument is within the instrument's specified capabilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certified by UL or ETL. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Materials and Methods. Clean Water Services 17509 Nitrate Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. B. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods, the probes shall be warrantied for a period of two years from Substantial Completion; or three years from installation, whichever is greater. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. • B. Provide one spare transmitter and two spare probes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. YSI NitraVis with IQ SensorNet 282 Controller 2. HACH NitrataxSC with SC 200 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Design spectrometric measurement system for continuous monitoring in situ of Nitrate and TSS using optical detectors that measure the transmission of light through wastewater from light sources that generate 256 separate wavelengths spanning the ultraviolet and visible light spectrum. 2. Connect spectrometric sensors to field-mounted junction box or Input/Output modules shown in the installation details. 3. Spectrometric measuring system components shall be designed to be part of a process control system that is protected from Clean Water Services 17509 Nitrate Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project overvoltage due to lightning and power supply fluctuations and • covered by manufacturer's warranty when installed using manufacturer's recommended components per manufacturer's instructions. 4. The probe shall be constructed of stainless steel or titanium. 5. All components such as probes, associated fittings, mounting kit, cleaning unit, transmitters, and interconnection cables, of an analyzing system shall be of the same manufacturer. 6. The analyzer shall measure nitrate in units of milligrams per Liter (mg/L). 7. The sensor shall have a detection limit of 0.01 mg/L and a response time less than 10 minutes. 8. The sensors shall be provided with sensor brackets, mounting hardware, environmental connectors, and accessory kits. 9. The analyzer shall be 120 VAC and shall have a controller which shall communicate with a PLC over Profibus DP. 10. The controller shall be microprocessor based, 120 VAC and housed in a NEMA 4X housing. 11. The mounting bracket for the sensor shall be stainless steel with quick release pin for 2 inch handrail mounting and shall be • suitable for the probe provided. 12. An automatic air blast cleaning system shall be provided to periodically jet air across the sensor head. The air blast cleaning system shall be furnished with all components necessary for a complete operating system and shall be compatible with the sensors being cleaned as well as the instrument's transmitter. Air from the service air system, at a nominal pressure of 90 psi, will be supplied upstream of each air blast system's air supply regulator. Service air is shown on instrument installation details drawings. All wetted materials and tubing shall be 316 stainless steel. The air blast cleaning system at a minimum shall contain the following components: a. Air supply regulator to reduce the service air system pressure to a setpoint compatible with the sensor being cleaned. The setpoint shall be coordinated with the sensor being supplied. b. Ball valve upstream of the regulator for isolation of the entire air blast system. c. Solenoid valve to actuate blast of air to sensor. Solenoid shall be controlled and powered by the transmitter. • Clean Water Services 17509 Nitrate Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • d. Head assembly to force air across the face of the sensor. e. Sequencer to control the solenoid valve opening and closing frequency and duration. Frequency and duration setpoints shall be field adjustable. B. Analyzer/Transmitter: 1. Display: a. Graphic dot matrix LCD to display Nitrate concentration. b. Alarms: User adjustable high and low alarms. c. Auxiliary Readout: 1) Diagnostic warnings 2) Error messages 3) Other information 4) Display ammonia concentration content equal to sensor reading accuracy. 2. Analog outputs: Dual 4-20 mA optically isolated outputs: a. Proportional to nitrate concentration. • b. Sourcing type capable of driving 500 ohm load. 1) Relay Outputs: Two outputs corresponding to high and low alarm conditions. 2) Serial Communication: Not used. c. Stainless steel equipment tag 3. Mounting Hardware: Suitable to support panel, surface, horizontal pipe, and vertical pipe mounting. 4. Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X. 5. Automatic temperature compensation. 6. Relay outputs: a. 3 form C outputs. b. Rated 5 ampere at 120 VAC. c. Programmable. 7. Communication: Not required. 8. Power supply: 120 VAC. • Clean Water Services 17509 Nitrate Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project C. Environmental Requirements: • 1. Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 2. Humidity range: 15 percent to 95 percent relative humidity. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Calibration Equipment: 1. Provide components recommended by the manufacturer to verify calibration. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory-calibrate each analyzer at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. • I, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. C. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • Clean Water Services 17509 Nitrate Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Method. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. • 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. See the schedule included with Section 17901, Instrument List for additional information, B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Furnish Instrument Data Sheets in hard copy format. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17509 Nitrate Analyzers Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • This Page Intentionally Blank • • • SECTION 17710 CONTROL SYSTEMS - PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Design, fabrication and assembly of all instrumentation enclosures, control panels and components provided under this contract, including but not limited to: a. Custom built instrumentation and control panels, including all enclosures for hand stations controllers, low voltage power distribution, terminal junction boxex, and marshalling panels. b. Control panels furnished as part of equipment systems specified in other Divisions, such as vendor control panels (VCPs) and chemical feed panels. c. Control components. d. Control panel installation. B. Related sections: • 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01611, Meteorlogical and Seismic Design Criteria. c. Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. d. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. e. Section 16262, Variable Frequency Drives 0.50-50 Horsepower. f. Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded d Case Circuit Breakers. g. Section 16422, Motor Starters. h. Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods. C. Provide all instruments identified in Contract Documents. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control • Instrumentation Material and Methods. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41.1 — Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Woltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 508C - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 2. 913 - Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 3. 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 4. 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods. B. Specific definitions: 1. The term "panel" in this Section is interchangeable with the term • "enclosure." 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Panel dimensions: 1. Minimum dimensions are scalable from or as indicated on the Drawings and are based upon manufacturer's non-certified information. It is the responsibility of the Contractor or manufacturer to design and size all panels: a. Size panels to provide space for all equipment, wiring, terminations, and other items in the panel, including space for future build out. b. Panel sizes that substantially deviate (within 3 inches in any dimension) from the sizes indicated on the Drawings must be approved by the Engineer. c. Maximum panel depth: 30 inches, unless otherwise indicated. B. Structural design: 1. Completed and installed panel work shall safely withstand seismic requirements at the project site as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. Enclosures and * • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • internal equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods. B. Provide a control panel hardware submittal, for each control panel and enclosure being provided on this project, including but not limited to: 1. Product data: a. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type. b. Manufacturer's literature and specification data sheets for each type of equipment to be installed within or on the panel or enclosure. 2. Shop drawings: a. Scaled, detailed exterior panel (front and side views) and interior panel layout showing equipment arrangement and dimensional information: 1) Provide draft for review and approval by Engineer. The Engineer has the authority to substantially alter initial panel layouts. 111 b. Complete nameplate engraving schedule. c. Structural details of fabricated panels. 3. Calculations: a. Provide installation details based on calculated shear and tension forces: 1) Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed. b. For assembled enclosures and other equipment with a weight of 200 pounds or more, provide calculations for: 1) Weight including panel internal components. 2) Seismic forces and overturning moments. 3) Shear and tension forces in connections. c. Cooling calculations, to include but not limited to: 1) Highest expected ambient temperature for the enclosure's location 2) Internal heat load. 3) Exposure to direct sunlight. 4) Dimensions of the enclosure in inches. 5) Maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, based on the lowest operating temperature limit of the installed components. • 4. Bill of material, including quantity, description, manufacturer, part number, serial number, vendor name with phone, and spare part Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -3- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 list with unit price. Bills of material shall include all items within • enclosure. a. Provide the Bill of material on CD-ROM in Microsoft Excel format. C. Seismic design: 1. Seismic panel construction: a. Seismic anchorage: Provide seismic design calculations and installation details for anchorage of all panels, enclosures, consoles, etc. to meet seismic requirements in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria: 1) Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the project is being constructed. b. For floor mounted free standing panels weighing 200 pounds or more (assembled, including contents), submit calculations, data sheets, and other information to substantiate that panel, base, and framing meet minimum design strength requirements and seismic requirements as specified in Section 01611, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods. B. Assemble panels, enclosures, and rack systems along with all internal and external devices, wiring, equipment, and materials in a facility that is recognized by UL to assemble and certify UL-labeled control panels. : 1. Provide all panel components with UL 508 listing. 2. All control panels shall be constructed by a UL 508A certified panel shop. C. Factory Acceptance Test. (Not Used) 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient • temperatures. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -4- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS • A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods. 1.09 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. As listed below in the individual component paragraphs. B. Provide instruments and other components performing similar functions of the same type, model, or class, and from 1 manufacturer. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Provide labor and materials for complete modifications to existing panels as required. IDB. Field cut and refinish existing panel faces to original condition to accommodate installation of new instruments, removal of existing instruments and fitting of blanks to suit new layouts. New instrument supports shall be provided as required for complete installation. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Construct and finish enclosures using materials capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical, and thermal stresses, as well as the effects of humidity and corrosion that are likely to be encountered in normal service: 1. Enclosures shall have the following properties: a. NEMA Type 4: Steel with gasketed door, rain tight. b. NEMA Type 4X: Type 316 stainless steel B. Bolting material: 1. Commercial quality 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel hex-head grade 5 bolts, nuts and washers, with unified coarse (UNC) threads. 2. Carriage bolts for attaching end plates. 3. All other bolted joints shall have S.A.E. standard lock washers. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -5- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS • A. Panels/enclosures: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rittal b. Pentair Hoffman 2. Panel assembly: a. General guidelines for panel fabrication include: 1) Continuous welds ground smooth. 2) Exposed surfaces free of burrs and sharp edges. 3) Base formed of heavy channel iron, either galvanized or powder coated, minimum 1/2 inch holes at 12 inch spacing to accommodate anchoring of freestanding enclosures to floor. b. Construct enclosure and mounting panel using stretcher level quality sheet metal having minimum thickness not less than the following sizes (U.S. Standard Gauge): Minimum Enclosure Minimum Back Enclosure Height Steel Thickness Mounting Panel (inches) (gauge) Thickness (gauge) Up to 57 12 12 57 - 69 12 10 69 - 82 12, except 10 on back 10 • 82 or more 10 10 1) Use heavier sheet metal to meet seismic requirements at the project site or when required due to equipment requirements. c. Construct supporting frame structure with angled, channeled, or folded rigid section of sheet metal, rigidly attached to and having essentially the same outer dimensions as the enclosure surface and having sufficient torsional rigidity to resist the bending moments applied via the enclosure surface when it is deflected. d. Provide stiffeners for back mounting panels in enclosures larger than 4 feet. In addition, secure the panels in place by collar studs welded to the enclosure. e. Door construction: 1) Turned-back edges suitably braced and supported to maintain alignment and rigidity without sagging. 2) Sufficient width to permit door opening without interference with rear projection of flush mounted instruments. 3) Heavy gauge piano type continuous stainless steel hinges. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -6- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 4) For NEMA Type 12, Type 4 and Type 4X, provide oil resistant neoprene sealing gasket and adhesive to seal cover to enclosure. 5) Gasket installed to seal against roll lip on the enclosure opening. f. Latches: 1) For panels each door provided with a 3-point latching mechanism and locking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods. Latch rods connected to a common door handle, hold doors securely, forming a compressed seal between door and gasket, at the top, side, and bottom. a) Provide padlock for each enclosure with padlock provisions. 2) Include an oil-tight key-locking, 3-point latching mechanism on each door: a) Provide 2 keys per panel. b) All locks keyed alike. 3) For large type NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 4X cabinets, not available with 3-point latching hardware, provide multiple clips and padlock hasps. 4) Provide quick release latches for all NEMA Type 4 and • Type 4X enclosures. g. Panel cut-outs: 1) Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for instruments, devices, and windows. Smoothly finish with rounded edges. 2) Allow a minimum of 3-inch envelope around all displays, controllers, and monitors. 3) Reinforce around cut-outs with steel angles or flat bars for the following: a) Large panel cutouts; for example, openings for local operator interfaces. b) Pilot device groupings, where the removed metal exceeds 50 percent of the available metal. 3. In addition to the requirements specified above the following requirements for NEMA Type 4X powder coated stainless steel enclosures apply: a. Minimum 14 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel. b. Captive stainless steel cover screws threaded into sealed wells. c. Inside finish: White polyester powder coating. d. Specifically designed for use with flange-mounted disconnect handles where required or as indicated on the Drawings. e. NEMA Type 4X powder coated stainless steel enclosures are not an acceptable substitute for stainless steel. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -7- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 4. Outdoor panels. Supplementary requirements for panels located • outdoors are as follows: a. All enclosures located outdoors shall be explicitly designed and rated for outdoor service by the manufacturer. b. Door hardware: stainless steel. c. Provide rain canopy and sun shield. d. Bases: Heavy channel, gasketed stainless steel bases, flanges up, for anchoring to pad. B. Arrangement of components: 1. Arrange panel internal components for external conduit and piping to enter into panel either from above or below. 2. Arrange panel instruments and control devices in a logical configuration associating pushbutton and selector switches with related readout devices, or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Mount internal control components on an internal back-panel. Devices may be mounted on the side-panel only by special permission from the Engineer. 4. All control panel mounted operator interface devices shall be mounted between 3 feet and 5 feet above finished floor. C. Overcurrent protection: 1. Main overcurrent device: a. Where the electrical power supply voltage to the control • panel is more than 120 VAC, provide the panel with a flange mounted disconnect handle operating a molded case circuit breaker, and provide a control power transformer for 120 VAC circuits: 1) Door-mounted disconnect handles are not acceptable. 2) Mechanically interlocked the disconnect switch with the control enclosure doors so that no door can be opened unless the power is disconnected, and the disconnect switch cannot be closed until all doors are closed. 3) Provide means to defeat the interlock. 4) Lockable in the off position. b. Control panels supplied with 120 VAC: 1) Provide an internal breaker with the line side terminals covered by a barrier. 2) Provide a nameplate prominently positioned on the control panel identifying the location of the power source and a warning statement requiring the source to be disconnected before opening the door to the enclosure. 2. Provide circuit breakers as specified in Section 16412, Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 111 Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -8- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3. Selection and ratings of protective devices: a. Interrupting ratings: Not less than the system maximum available fault current at the point of application. b. Voltage rating: Not less than the voltage of the application. c. Select current rating and trip characteristics to be suitable for: 1) Maximum normal operating current. 2) Inrush characteristics. 3) Coordination of the protective devices to each other and to the source breaker feeding the panel. 4. Provide a separate protective device for each powered electrical device: a. An individual circuit breaker for each 120 VAC instrument installed within its respective control panel and clearly identified for function. b. An individual fuse for each PLC discrete output. Provide with individual blown fuse indication external of the I/O card: 1) Size external fuse to open before any I/O card mounted fuses. c. An individual 1-ampere fuse for each discrete input loop. d. An individual 1/2-ampere fuse for each 4 to 20 milliamperes analog loop powered from the control panel. e. Install protective devices on the back mounting panel and • identify by a service nameplate in accordance with the wiring diagrams. 5. Fuses for 4 to 20 milliamperes signals: a. Provide durable, readily visible label for each fuse, clearly indicating the correct type, size, and ratings of replacement fuse: 1) Label shall not cover or interfere with equipment manufacturer's instructions. b. Provide fuses rated for the voltage and available short circuit current at which they are applied. c. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Ferraz Shawmut. 2) Littelfuse. 3) Bussmann. 6. Fuse holders: a. Modular type: 1) DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. 2) Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. 3) Incorporates blown fuse indicator. b. Provide nameplate identifying each fuse: 1) As specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -9- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 c. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: • 1) Phoenix Contact. 2) Allen-Bradley 1492-FB Series B. 7. Control circuit breakers: a. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. b. Manual OPEN-CLOSE toggle switch. c. Rated 250 VAC. d. Interrupting rating: 10 kiloampere (kA) or available fault current at the line terminal, whichever is higher. e. Current ratings: As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the application. f. Provide nameplate identifying each circuit breaker: 1) As specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. g. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Phoenix Contact. 2) ABB. 3) Allen-Bradley Series. 4) Square D. D. Conductors and Cables: 1. Power and Control Wiring: a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600V type MTW. c. Minimum Sizes: • 1) Primary power distribution: 12 AWG. 2) Secondary power distribution: 14 AWG. 3) Control: 16 AWG. d. Color: 1) BLACK, RED — 120/240VAC Single Phase (line and load) conductors. 2) RED — 120 VAC conductors within control panel (Discrete Input & Output) 3) ORANGE — 120V control conductors internal to the control panel. 4) YELLOW - 120V conductors external to the control panel. 5) GREEN - Ground wire. 6) WHITE - 120V Neutral conductors. 7) A-Brown, B-Orange, C-Yellow— 277/480V three phase conductors. 8) GRAY - 277 Neutral conductors. 9) BLUE - DC positive conductors. 10) WHITE with BLUE stripe - DC negative (grounded) conductors. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -10- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2. Signal Cables, Twisted Shielded: a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600V, PVC outer jacket. c. Minimum Size: 18 AWG paired/triad. d. Overall aluminum shield (tape). e. 20 AWG seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. f. Color: 1) 2 Conductor: a) Positive (+): WHITE. b) Negative (-): BLACK. 2) 3 Conductor: a) Positive (+): WHITE. b) Negative (-): BLACK. c) Signal: RED. g. Insulate the foil shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable with heat shrink tubing. E. Conductor identification: 1. Identify each conductors and cables with unique wire numbers as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2. Readily identified without twisting the conductor. F. General wiring requirements: • 1. Wiring methods: Wiring methods and materials for panels shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise specified. 2. Install all components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions included in the listing and labeling. 3. Provide a nameplate on the cover of the control panel identifying all sources of power supply and foreign voltages within the control panel. 4. Provide transformers, protective devices, and power supplies required to convert the supply voltage to the needed utilization voltage. 5. Provide power surge protection for all control panels. 6. Provide signal surge protection within control panels for each analog I/O, discrete I/O and data line (Copper Ethernet, Coax, Fieldbus signals) that originates from outdoor devices. 7. Provide nonmetallic ducts for routing and organization of conductors and cables: a. Size ducts for ultimate build-out of the panel, or for 20 percent spare, whichever is greater. b. Provide separate ducts for signal and low voltage wiring from power and 120 VAC control wiring: 1) 120 VAC: Grey colored ducts. • 2) 24 VDC: White colored ducts. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -11- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 8. Cables shall be fastened with cable mounting clamps or with 11111 cable ties supported by any of the following methods: a. Screw-on cable tie mounts. b. Hammer-on cable tie mounting clips. c. Fingers of the nonmetallic duct. 9. The free ends of cable ties shall be cut flush after final adjustment and fastening. 10. Provide supports at the ends of cables to prevent mechanical stresses at the termination of conductors. 11. Support panel conductors where necessary to keep them in place. 12. Conductors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal without splice or joints. Exceptions: a. Factory applied connectors molded onto cables shall be permitted. Such connectors shall not be considered as splices or joints. 13. The control panel shall be the source of power for all 120 VAC devices interconnected with the control panel including, but not limited to: a. Solenoid valves. b. Instruments both mounted in the control panel and remotely connected to the control panel. 2.05 COMPONENTS 111 A. Thermal management: 1. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices in order to maintain all instrumentation and control devices to within a range as specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 2. Heating: a. Provide all panels located in areas that are not climate controlled with thermostatically controlled strip heaters; except, where all of the following conditions apply: 1) The panel is not supplied with 120 VAC power. 2) There are no electronics or moisture-sensitive devices in the enclosure. 3) The panel is smaller than 38 inches high. 3. Heat exchanger: a. Closed-loop design ensuring separation of ambient air and clean air inside the cabinet. b. Filterless design to facilitate easy cleaning of the core. c. Mounting: Indicated on the Drawings. 4. Enclosure temperature sensor as indicated on the Drawings: 1111 Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -12- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 5. Enclosure temperature switch: a. Provide wall mount bimetallic switch transmitter (to measure internal cabinet temperature in all enclosures) containing electrical components such as PLCs, RTUs, RIO, and VFDs. b. Sensor and electronic enclosure. c. Accuracy: Within 2.0 degrees Fahrenheit. d. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) Hoffman ATEMNC. 6. Fan ventilation: a. Temperature control switch and alarm: 1) Power: 120 VAC. 2) Bimetallic temperature senor. 3) Adjustable setpoint range 30 degrees Fahrenheit to 140 degree Fahrenheit. 4) Hoffman ATEM series or equal. B. Panel meters. C. Pilot devices: 1. General: a. Provide operator pushbuttons, switches, and pilot lights, from a single manufacturer. b. Size: • 1) 30.5 millimeters. c. Heavy duty. d. Pushbuttons: 1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA Type A600. 2) Furnish 1 spare normally open and normally closed contact with each switch. e. Selector switches: 1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA Type A600. b) Knob type: 2) Furnish 1 spare normally open contact and normally closed contact with each switch. 3) Provisions for locking in the OFF position where lockout provisions are indicated on the Drawings. f. Pilot lights: 1) Type: a) LED. 2) Push to test. 3) Lamp color: a) On/Running/Start: Red. b) Off/Stop: Green. c) Power: White. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -13- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 d) Alarm: Amber. • e) Status or normal condition: White. f) Opened: Red. g) Closed: Green. h) Failure: Amber. 2. Indoor and outdoor areas: a. NEMA Type 4/13. b. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Allen-Bradley Type 800T. 2) Square D Class 9001 Type K. 3) General Electric Type CR104P. 4) IDEC TWTD. 3. Corrosive areas: a. NEMA Type 4X. b. Corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or multiple-layer epoxy coated zinc. d. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Cutler Hammer Type E34. 2) Square D Class 9001 Type SK. 3) Allen-Bradley Type 800H. 4) IDEC TWTD. 4. Hazardous (Classified) Areas/Class I Division 2: a. NEMA Type 4X. • b. Corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or multiple-layer epoxy coated zinc: 1) All contacts contained within a hermetically sealed chamber: a) Pushbuttons. b) Selector switches. c) Push-to-test contacts on pilot lights. 2) UL listed and labeled for Class I Division 2 areas. d. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Cutler Hammer Type E34. 2) Allen-Bradley Type 800H. D. Potentiometer and slidewire transmitters: 1. Provide a DC output in proportion to a potentiometer input. 2. Potentiometer input: a. 100 ohms to 100 K ohms. b. Impedance Greater or equal to 1 M ohms. c. Zero turn-up: 80 percent of full scale input. d. Span turn-down: 80 percent of full scale input. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -14- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 3. Field configurable output: a. Voltage and current: All conventional current loops and voltage control signals. 4. Accuracy including linearity and hysteresis within 0.1 percent max at 25 degrees Celsius. 5. Operating temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 55 degrees Celsius. 6. Supply power: 9 to 30 VDC. 7. Manufacturer: The following or equal: a. Phoenix Contact. E. Signal isolators and converters: 1. Furnish signal isolators that provide complete isolation of input, output, and power input: a. Minimum isolation level: 1.5 kilovolts AC/50 hertz for at least 1 minute. b. Adjustable span and zero. c. Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of span. d. Ambient temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +65 degrees Celsius. 2. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Phoenix Contact MCR Series. b. Acromag 1500, 600T, 800T, Flat Pack or ACR Series. c. Action Instruments Q500 Series or Ultra SlimPakll. • d. AGM electronics Model TA-4000. F. Relays: 1. General: a. For all types of 120 VAC relays, provide surge protection across the coil of each relay. b. For all types of 24 VDC relays, provide a free-wheeling diode across the coil of each relay. 2. General purpose: a. Magnetic control relays. b. NEMA Type A300 rated: 1) 300 volts. 2) 8 Amps continuous (minimum). 3) 7,200 volt-amperes make. 4) 720 volt-amperes break. c. Plug-in type. d. LED indication for energization status. e. Coil voltages: As required for the application. f. Minimum poles: DPDT. g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. h. Enclose each relay in a clear plastic heat and shock-resistant • dust cover. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -15- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 i. Quantity and type of contact shall be as indicated on the • Drawings or as needed for system compatibility. j. Relays with screw-type socket terminals. k. Provide additional (slave/interposing) relays when the following occurs: 1) The number or type of contacts shown exceeds the contact capacity of the specified relays. 2) Higher contact rating is required in order to interface with starter circuits or other equipment. I. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. m. Ice cube type relays with retainer clips to secure relay in socket. n. Integrated label holder for device labeling. o. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Potter and Brumfield Type KUMP. 2) Eaton D5PF 3) IDEC RR series. 4) Allen-Bradley Type 700 H Series. 5) Square D Type K. 3. Latching: a. Magnetic latching control relays. b. NEMA Type B300 rated: 1) 300 volts. • 2) 10 Amps continuous. 3) 3,600 volt-amperes make. 4) 320 volt-amperes break. c. Plug-in type. d. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. e. Coil voltage: As required for the application. f. Minimum poles: 2PDT; as required for the application plus 1 spare pole. g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. h. Clear cover for visual inspection. i. Provide retainer clip to secure relay in socket. j. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Square D type 8501 Type K. 2) IDEC TWTD. k. Provide relays with push to test and manual override lever. 4. Time delay: a. Provide time delay relays to control contact transition time. b. Contact rating: 1) 240 volts. 2) 10 Amps continuous. 3) 3,600 volt-amperes make. 4) 360 volt-amperes break. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -16- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 c. Coil voltage: as required for the application. • d. Provide pneumatic or electronic type with on-delay, off-delay, and on/off delay: 1) For off delay use true power off time delay relays. Where the required timing range exceeds capability of the off delay relay use signal off delay where power loss will not cause undesirable operation or pneumatic time delay relays. e. Minimum poles: 2PDT. f. Units include adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time range in each case. g. Minimum timing range: 0.1 seconds to 10 minutes, or as required for the application. h. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) IDEC RTE series. 2) Agastat type Series 7000 series (pneumatic). 3) Allen-Bradley type 700HR Series. G. Terminal blocks: 1. Din rail mounting on 35 mm rail. 2. Suitable for specified AWG wire. 3. Rated for 15 amperes at 600 volts. 4. Screw terminal type. • 5. Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause permanent deformation to the metal body. 6. Finger safe protection for all terminals for conductors. 7. Construction: Polyamide insulation material capable of withstanding temperature extremes from - 40 degree Celsius to 105 degrees Celsius. 8. Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams: a. Permanent machine printed terminal identification. 9. Disconnect type field signal conductor terminals with socket/screw for testing. 10. Identify terminals suitable for use with more than 1 conductor. 11. Position: a. So that the internal and external wiring does not cross. b. To provide unobstructed access to the terminals and their conductors. 12. Provide minimum 25 percent spare terminals. 13. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Phoenix Contact UK5 Series. b. Allen-Bradley Series 1492. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -17- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 14. Wire duct: a. Provide flame retardant plastic wiring duct, slotted with dust • cover. b. Type: 1) Wide slot. 2) Narrow slot. 3) Round hole. c. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) Panduit. H. Surge protection devices: 1. Control panel power: a. 120-volt control power source: Non-UPS powered: 1) Provide surge protection device (SPD) for panel power entrances: a) Nominal 120 VAC with a nominal clamping voltage of 200 volts. b) Non-faulting and non-interrupting design. c) A response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds. 2) Control panel power system level protection, non-UPS powered: a) Design to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 has waveform according to IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area. • b) For panels receiving power at 120 VAC, provide surge protection at secondary of main circuit breaker. c) Provide both normal mode noise protection (line to neutral) and common mode (neutral to ground) surge protection. d) DIN rail mounting. e) Attach wiring to the SPD by means of a screw type cable-clamping terminal block: (1) Gas-tight connections. (2) The terminal block: Fabricated of non-ferrous, non-corrosive materials. f) Visual status indication of MOV status on the input and output circuits. g) Dry contact rated for at least 250 VAC, 1 Amp for remote status indication. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -18- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • h) Meeting the following requirements: (1) Response time: Less than or equal to 100 ns. (2) Attenuation: Greater than or equal to -40 dB at 100 kilovolt-hertz as determined by a standard 50 ohms insertion test. (3) Safety approvals: (a) UL 1283 (EMI/RFI Filter). (b) UL 1449 2nd Edition. i) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: (1) Phoenix Contact type SFP TVSS/Filter. (2) Liebert Accuvar series. (3) Islatrol. b. 120-volt control power source: UPS powered. 1) Provide surge protection on the control power source at each panel containing power supplies, or electronic components including PLCs, I/O, HMI, and digital meters. 2) Location: a) For panels with a UPS, install surge protection ahead of UPS and maintenance bypass switch. (1) Surge protection is not required for 120 VAC circuits that are only used for panel lights and receptacles. • b) For panels receiving power at 480 VAC, provide surge protection on the 120 VAC control power transformer secondary. 3) MCOV: 150 VAC. 4) Surge capability (8/20 microsecond wave): 10 kA. 5) Peak let-through: 620V L-N, 850V L-G. 6) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab PT series b) MTL Surge Technologies MA15 series 2. Instrument, data and signal line protectors (traditional I/O) — panel mounted: a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a 10 kA test current of a 8/20 ps waveform in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area. b. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail (except field mounted SPDs). c. SPDs consisting of 2 parts: 1) A base terminal block. 2) A plug protection module: a) Replacing a plug shall not require the removal of any wires nor interrupt the signal. b) Base and plug coded to accept only the correct • voltage plug. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -19- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 d. SPD Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab Series. • 2) Bournes Series 1800. 3. Instrument, data and signal line protectors (traditional I/O)—field mounted: a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a minimum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 ps waveform in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area. b. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Plugtrab PT Series 2) MTL TP48 Series. I. Power supplies: 1. Design power supply systems so that either the primary or backup supply can be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the system operation. 2. Convert 120 VAC to 24 volt DC or other DC voltages required or as required for the application. 3. Provide backup 24 VDC power supply units to automatically supply the load upon failure of the primary supply. 4. Provide power supply arrangement that is configured with several modules to supply adequate power in the event of a single module failure: a. Provide Automatic switchover upon module failure. • b. Alarm contacts monitored by the PLC. 5. Sized to provide 40 percent excess rated capacity. 6. UL 508C listed to allow full rated output without de-rating. 7. Provide fuse or short-circuit protection. 8. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry contacts configured to change state on failure for monitoring and signaling purposes. 9. Output regulation: Within 0.05 percent for a 10 percent line change or a 50 percent load change: a. With remote voltage sensing. 10. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 11. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. 12. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. 13. Provide self-protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in case of short circuit. 14. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Phoenix Contact Quint series. b. DEC PS5R series. c. Sola. d. Acopian. e. PULS. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -20- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • J. Intrinsic safety barriers: 1. Transformer isolated barrier: a. Containing a transformer to provide complete: 1) Isolation between the safe and hazardous areas for loop powered devices. 2) 3-way isolation between the safe area, hazardous area and power supply powered devices. b. Resistor for current limitation. c. Fuses for short circuit protection. d. Provide barriers with pluggable connectors that are coded for easy replacement. e. Transmission error shall be less than or equal to 0.1 percent of full scale. f. DIN rail mounted on 35 millimeters DIN rail. g. Approvals: 1) FM. 2) UL 913. 2. Types: a. Switch isolators: 1) Designed and approved for use with discrete inputs. 2) Supply power: 20 to 30 VDC. 3) Output to track input. 4) LED in the cover to indicate the status of the input. • 5) Selector switch to change the logic of the input. 6) Input: Dry contact. 7) Output: SPDT relay. b. Transmitter and converters for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes signals without Hart® communications capability: 1) Designed and approved for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes analog signals. 2) Designed for powering 2 and/or 3 wire transmitters in hazardous locations and repeating and/or generating the current to the safe area. 3) Supply voltage: 20 to 30 VDC. c. Transmitter and converters for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes signals with Hart® communications capability: 1) Designed and approved for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes analog signals. 2) Designed for powering 2 and/or 3 wire transmitters in hazardous locations and repeating and/or generating the current to the safe area. 3) Transfer digital signals from the hazardous area to the safe area. 4) Complete bi-directional communication between a smart transmitter located in the field and the suitable • equipment located in the safe area. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -21- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 5) Supply voltage: 20 to 30 VDC. • 3. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Phoenix Contact ME Series. b. Pepper) + Fuchs. K. Starters: 1. Magnetic motor starters: a. As specified in Section 16422, Motor Starters. L. Variable frequency drives: 1. As specified in Section 16262, Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-50 Horsepower. M. Limit switches: 1. NEMA Type 4X. 2. AC contact rating 120 volts, 10 A. 3. DC contact rating 125 volts, 0.4 A. 4. Provide robust actuation mechanism not prone to degradation. 5. Provide complete actuator mechanism with all required hardware. 6. Allows for contact opening even during contact weld condition. 7. UL approved. 8. Operating temperature range: -18 degrees to +110 degrees Celsius (0 degrees to 230 degrees Fahrenheit). • 9. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Allen-Bradley 802. b. Honeywell HDLS. c. Omron D4. d. Eaton E47, E49, E50. e. ABB equal. N. Current Switches: a. Operate from 120 VAC supply voltage. b. 1 normally open and normally closed contacts. c. Adjustable current setting. d. Manufacturer: 1) Zelio RM35. O. Isolation Transformer: 1. An isolation transformer shall be provided for all control panels as indicated on the Drawings. a. Minimum size: 3kVA. b. Shielded. c. Low noise. d. Mounted outside of the control enclosure when indicated on the Drawings. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -22- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • 2. The panel lights, convenience receptacle and environmental controls shall not be powered from the isolation transformer. 3. Manufacturer: One of the following: a. Acme T-3-53043-S. b. General Electric equivalent. c. Jefferson equivalent. P. Ethernet switches: 1. Unmanaged Ethernet Switches: a. Manufacturers - One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact 2891673. 2) Cisco equivalent. 3) N-Tron equivalent. 4) Approved equal. b. Properties: 1) Power supply: a) Provide redundant power supplies. b) 24 VDC power supply. c) Alarm output indicating loss of power supply. 2) Performance: a) 10/100/1000, Full/half-Duplex. b) MDI/MDI-X Auto-sensing. 3) Environment: • a) Operating Temperature Range: -13 to 167 Degrees Fahrenheit. b) Humidity: 15 to 95 percent, non-condensing. 4) Connector type: a) Copper: RJ-45. 5) Mounting: a) Din Rail. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Provide panels with an inside protective pocket to hold the panel Drawings. Ship panels with 1 copy of accepted Shop Drawings including, but not limited to, schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components in a sealed plastic bag stored in the panel drawing pocket. C. Provide 15 inch floor stands or legs where needed or as indicated on the Drawings. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -23- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 D. Provide a folding shelf for enclosures that contain programmable • controllers. The shelf shall be mounted on the inside surface of the door, capable of supporting a laptop computer. E. Provide nameplate to each panel as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Provide as specified in Section 16075, Electrical Identification on all internal and external instruments and devices. 2. Provide a nameplate with the following markings that is plainly visible after installation: a. Manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the panel can be identified. b. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current. c. Power Source or Circuit ID. d. Short-circuit current rating of the panel based on one of the following: 1) Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly. 2) Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method. 3. Provide enclosures with a flange mounted disconnect that is interlocked with the doors. F. Provide a window kit where indicated on the Drawings. The window • shall meet the following requirements: 1. Safety plate glass. 2. Secured by rubber locking seal. 3. Allow full viewing of devices issuing visual process data or diagnostics. G. Lighting: 1. Provide 1 luminaire for each section, on the interior of the panel, spaced evenly along the top-front of the enclosure door opening(s): a. Covered or guarded. b. Provide On-Off door-activated switches where indicated on the Drawings. c. Provide LED lamp for indoor enclosures: 1) Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width. H. Receptacles: 1. Provide 1 duplex receptacle located every 4 feet of enclosure width, spaced evenly along the back mounting panels. 2. GFCI, 125-volt, single-phase, 15-amp style plug. 3. Provide circuit breaker or fuse to limit receptacle draw to 5 amperes. • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -24- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • I. Grounding: 1. Provide the following: a. Grounding strap between enclosure doors and the enclosure. b. Equipment grounding conductor terminals. c. Provide equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all equipment grounding wires. d. Bond multi-section panels together with an equipment grounding conductor or an equivalent grounding bus. 2. Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word "GROUND," the letters "GND" or the letter "G," or the color green. 3. Signal (24 VDC) Grounding: Terminate each drain wire of a signal (shielded) cable to a unique grounding terminal block, or common ground bus at the end of the cable as shown on the Loop Drawings. 4. Ensure the continuity of the equipment grounding system by effective connections through conductors or structural members. 5. Design so that removing a device does not interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding circuit. 6. Provide an equipment-grounding terminal for each incoming power circuit, near the phase conductor terminal. 7. Size ground wires in accordance with NEC and UL Standards, unless noted otherwise. • 8. Connect all exposed, noncurrent-carrying conductive parts, devices, and equipment to the equipment grounding circuit. 9. Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment- grounding terminal within the enclosure using an equipment- bonding jumper. 10. Bond together all control panels both remote and local, processor racks, and conductive enclosures of power supplies and connect to the equipment grounding circuit to provide a common ground reference. J. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations. 2.07 FINISHES A. Finishes: 1. Metallic (non-stainless): a. Metal surfaces of panels shall be prepared by chemical cleaning and mechanical abrasion in accordance with the finish manufacturer's recommendations to achieve a smooth, well-finished surface. b. Scratches or blemishes shall be filled before finishing. One coat of zinc phosphate shall be applied per the • manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness, and allowed to dry before applying the finish coat. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -25- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 c. Finish coat shall be a baked polyester urethane powder, aliphatic air-dry polyurethane, or epoxy enamel to meet • NEMA rating specified application. d. Exterior of enclosures located outdoors shall be UV resistant polyester powder coating. Total dry film thickness shall be 3 mils, minimum. 2. Stainless steel: a. Stainless enclosures shall be provided with a number 4 brushed finish - not painted. B. Colors: 1. Exterior color of panels mounted indoors shall be manufacturer's standard light gray. 2. Exterior of panels mounted outdoors shall be manufacturer's standard white. 3. Panel interiors shall be manufacturer's standard white. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. B. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to manufacturer's standard at a facility that is traceable • tothe NIST. 1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within within 1/8 inch over the entire surface of the panel; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. Direct attachment to dry wall is not permitted. B. Install the enclosure per guidelines and submitted installation • instructions to meet the seismic requirements at the project site. Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -26- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 • C. Provide floor stand kits for wall-mount enclosures larger than 48 inches high. D. Provide 3-1/2 inch high concrete housekeeping pads for free-standing enclosures. E. Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit: 1. Undercoat floor mounted panels. F. Provide a full size equipment-grounding conductor in accordance with NEC included with the power feeder. Terminate to the incoming power circuit-grounding terminal. G. All holes for field conduits, etc. shall be cut in the field, there shall be no additional holes, factory cut holes, or hole closers allowed. Incorrect holes, additional holes, or miss-cut holes shall require that the entire enclosure be replaced. H. Control panels that are adjacent to motor control centers shall be fully wired to the motor control centers using wireways integral to the motor control center or additional conduits as needed. These interconnections are not shown or reflected on the conduit schedule, • but shall be shown on the Loop Drawings prepared by the Contractor. I. Provide individually fused analog input module points with blown fuse indicator lights, mounted external of the module on the output terminal strip: 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.04 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 3.05 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. END OF SECTION • Clean Water Services 17710 Control Systems: Panels, Durham AWWTF Secondary -27- Enclosures, and Panel Components Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 This Page Intentionally Blank • • Section 17901 INSTRUMENT LIST PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Instrument list is not a take-off list. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for additional information. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern. B. Abbreviations used in the Instrument Index are defined on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTRUMENT LIST A. Instrument list attached to this section as Supplement 1. B. Columns include the following 1. Tag: tag number is a unique number that identifies the instrumentation on the drawings. 2. Description: Describes the instrument or device. 3. Size: Indicates the size of instrument to apply for flow meters and some others. This field does not apply to all instruments. 4. Output Type: for instrumentation that is monitored by the PLC or other devices the signal will be either 4-20ma analog signal or dry contact for discrete signals. None indicates that the instrument is not interface to a PLC or other monitoring device. 5. Calibration: Instrumentation calibration is provided in engineering units. For analog signals, gauges, and rotometers a range will be provided. For discrete instruments a contact open or close above or below a value will be given. The Contractor shall coordinate Owner during construction on all calibration ranges indicated TBD in the schedule. 6. Power Type: "4-Wire" indicates the analog instrument will be • provided with a power source. "2-Wire" indicates the instrument will be loop powered from the PLC. "120VAC" indicates the signal Clean Water Services 17901 Instrument List Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project will be 120 volt ac discrete signal. "None" indicates the 1111 instrument is mechanically indicated. 7. P&ID Drawing: Indicates which P&ID the instrument is shown. 8. Specification: Provides a reference to the instrumentation specification requirements. 9. Installation Details: Provides a reference to all applicable installation details. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 17901 Instrument List Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project • Section 17903 I/O LIST PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The I/O list is not a take-off list. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for additional information. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern. B. Abbreviations used in the Instrument Index are defined on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 I/O LIST A. I/O list attached to this section as Supplement 1. B. Columns include the following 1. Tag: Tag number is a unique number that identifies the I/O point on the drawings. 2. IO Type: Indicates the type of I/O signal, as follows: a. Al = analog input b. AO = analog output c. DI = discrete input d. DO = discrete output 3. Description: Describes the I/O point function. 4. Field Device: Indicates the tag number of the equipment or device the I/O point is associated with. 5. Analog Signal Type: This will typically be 4-20 mADC, but could also be Ethernet, HART or similar to indicate the signal type of the associated input or output. 6. Analog Power: "4-Wire" indicates a device that is powered from external power supplies. "2-Wire" indicates devices that are loop powered from the PLC enclosure. 7. Discrete Signal Type: This will typically be 120 VAC, Ethernet or similar to indicate the signal type of the associated input or output. • Clean Water Services 17903 I/O List Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project 8. Discrete Closed State: Indicates the state of the input or output when it • is considered to be closed or energized. 9. Discrete Power Source: Indicates the power source for the wetting voltage on the contacts, as follows: a. Field = external field power source (may require interposing relays or isolated I/O module type) b. PLC = power originates from within the PLC or I/O enclosure. 10. Interp Relay: Indicates whether the input or output requires an interposing relay. Relays are typically required to isolate external voltage sources. See specifications for more details. 11. P&ID Drawing: Indicates which P&ID the I/O point is shown on. END OF SECTION • • Clean Water Services 17903 I/O List Durham AWWTF Secondary -2- March 2018 Treatment System Expansion Project